This book belongs to

THE CAMPBELL COLLECTION

purchased with the aid of
The MacDonald-Stewart Foundation
and
The Canada Council
 \

,
e of Mecf/3e ^

o r\ /% i

.^on to, C^ r'\0

CAMPBELL
COLLECTION
A HEBREW GRAMMAR
 0**n \K ¥*u*<5u^

A HEBREW GRAMMAR
by 'mi':

Rev. C. T. WOOD, M.A.

FELLOW AND HEBREW LECTURER OK QUEENS* COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE

WITH THE CO-OTERATION OF

Rev. H. C. O. LANCHESTER, M.A.

FORMERLY FELLOW AND HEBREW LECTURER OF PEMBROKE COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE

WITH AN APPENDIX ON THE HEBREW VOWEL SYSTEM

TAKEN FROM LECTURE-NOTES
By PROFESSOR KENNETT
REGIUS PROFESSOR OF HEBREW IN THE UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE

LONDON
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. LTD.
BROADWAY HOUSE, 68-74 CARTER LANE, E.C,

I9 X 3
 INTRODUCTION.
The following pages are an attempt to supply a want
suggested by the experience of two Lecturers for the first

part of the Theological Tripos at Cambridge. A few words

of explanation may serve to make this clear.
There is at the present time a division of opinion
among teachers as to the best way of learning a new
language. Some insist, especially in the case of a dead
language, on a long course of grounding in grammar before
anything serious is attempted in the way of reading or
speaking. Others seek to minimise the learning of
grammar and to push on almost at once to some form of
literature. The standpoint adopted in this book is that a
certain amount of spade-work is necessary, in the way of
learning by heart grammatical forms and usages but that ;

a good deal of memory-work may be saved by starting the

beginner in actual reading as soon as he knows the more
elementary grammatical forms. So the student is expected
to work through the ordinary classes of nouns to the end of
the regular (Strong) Verb, before he reads the Old Testa-
ment but at that point he is given assistance in starting
;

the Hebrew text, before going on to the second half of the

grammar. In this way he becomes accustomed to the
sound and sight of many forms before he tries to commit
them to memory.
Every language is more easily learned with oral assist-
ance from a teacher than from a book alone. The lecturer,
for instance, may point out the peculiarities of the gutturals
wherever he meets them but in a Grammar they must
;

necessarily be collected into a separate chapter. The net

result in most Hebrew Grammars has been to overwhelm
the beginner, at the very start, by setting him to learn a
 ;

vi INTRODUCTION
multitude of rules which he cannot as yet practise satis-
factorily. in this book the laws of accentuation,
Therefore
for have been placed in the middle, not at the
instance,
beginning; and for the same reason certain paragraphs
throughout are marked with an asterisk, to denote that
they are better learned during the process of revision than
at first
The sentences in the exercises are, for the most part,
not taken from the Old Testament as in most Grammars
but are framed with the double object of using none but
the commonest words, and of illustrating the various
grammatical points in the shortest possible space. This
entails a certain monotony of vocabulary and crudity of
expression ; but itappears to be justified by experience in
teaching. To each of the later chapters is added a second
set of exercisestaken from the Hebrew Scriptures, for the
use of the student in revising his grammar.
A certain amount of syntax has been added, and it
may be felt that this is either too little or too much. The
best way to learn Hebrew syntax is to read the Hebrew
text with a commentary and a conscience but a Grammar ;

may reasonably be expected to supply some assistance in

indicating the kind of way in which a Hebrew sentence is
constructed. To afford practice in this, a few Hebrew
proses are added at the end of the book. The student's
further needs be supplied by that " vade mecum " of
may
every Hebraist, the Grammar of Gesenius-Kautzsch, to
which the present writers owe a deep debt or by David- ;

son's Hebrew Syntax, and Driver's or Kennett's " Hebrew

Tenses," to which they are further indebted.
In conclusion, they wish to express their gratitude to
Professor Kennett for allowing them to use his lecture-
notes on the Hebrew vowel-system (which are given in an
Appendix) to Mr. H. Loewe, of Queens' and St. Catharine's
;

Colleges, they are also grateful for some useful suggestions.

C T. WOOD.
H. C. O. LANCHESTER.
January 1913.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS.
TAGE
CHAP.

I. Outline of the History of Hebrew and its Posi-

tion among Semitic Languages

I
.

6
II. Consonants .

ii
III. Full Vowels .

14
IV. Sh e wa . . • • •

A. Vocal.

V.
B. Quiescent.
Dagesh
2. Dagesh Lent'.
...-••• 18

3. Uagesh Forte.
22
VI. Gutturals and Weak Letters .

The Definite Article and the Interrogative

VII.
25
Particle . • • • • •

A. Definite Article.
1. Rules for prefixing, with note on Accents.
2. Usage.
3. Note on HS.
B. Interrogative Particle.
3°
VIII. Adjectives and Adverbs . . •

A. Adjectives (with Comparative and

Superlative).

B. Adverbs.
IX. A. Personal and Demonstrative Pronouns . . 34
B. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . . 38

§ 3. Additional notes on Pronouns.

[Emphatic repetition of Pronoun — " Each ;

one another ; any ;

some ;
none."]

X. Inseparable Prepositions
and the Copula 1 . 43

1. Rules for prefixing 2, 3, ?.

2. it 55 n
3. (a) Note on Divine Names.
XI. Prepositions with Singular Suffixes . . 48

6, DV, nS = 'with,' and DK sign of Accus.).

 , ;

\ 111 TABLK OF CONTENTS

MAT.

....
i

xii. Unchangeable and First Declension Nouns with

Singui ak Suffixes 52
i. Classes of Nouns in Hebrew.
2. Vowel changes in First Declension, with note on
tone-long and
t

3. The suffixes.

4. Old accusative termination H—

5. First Declension Nouns and Adjectives which take
Dagesh forte in third root-letter.
6. FirstDeclension Nouns with Dagesh forte in
second root-letter.
7. Gender of Nouns.
XIII. The Construct Case . 58
XIV. Plural Suffixes with Nouns and Prepositions . 63
A. 2. With unchangeable and First Declension Nouns.
4. Duals.
B. With Sw, by, and nn«
Remark 3, note on |*!3 #

XV. A. Tenses— Perfect Qal— Statives . 67

1. Note on 'Tenses.'
2. Strong and Weak Verbs.
3. Perfect Qal.
4. Stative Verbs.
B. Perfect Tenses of the other Voices 7i
1-2. The Voices.
3. Further notes on form of Voices.
4. „ „ significance of Voices.
5. Conjugation of Perfects.
XVI. A. Imperfect and Imperative Qal 76
4. Prohibitions.
B. Imperfects and Imperatives of other Voices 80
Table of the primitive forms of the Strong Verb

.....
83
XVII. Jussive, Cohortative, and Cohortative Im
perative 85
XVIII. Waw Consecutive and Weak Waw .

1. Meaning of 'Waw Consecutive' and 'Circumstantial

Clauses.'
2. Method of expressing Consecution.
3- Further notes on Waw Consecutive.
(Jussive form of Imperfect ; retraction of tone
rules for \T1 and PITH ; Waw Consec. in Apodosis
of Conditional sentence.)
4. Circumstantial Clauses.
5. Weak Waw.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS ix

CHAP. PAOF
XIX. Second Declension Nouns (S r gholates) . . 94
XX. Infinitives . . . . . • 99
1. Absolute and Construct.
2. Usage and Declension of Inf. Construct.
Usage of Inf. Absolute.
3.
XXI. Participles and Third Declension Nouns . 105
A. Participles.
B. Third Declension Nouns and kindred Adjectives.
C. On certain uses of the Participle.
XXII. "liy, nail, \)8 f }», and 3 with Suffixes . .110
XXIII. Accents and Pause Forms . . . 115
1. The Tone Syllable.

2. Accents.
3. Pause forms.
5. Metheg.
6. Massoretic Terms Q e re and K e
thiv.

7. Raphe.
Notes on Genesis xl.-xliv. 120
XXIV. Pe Nun Verbs, with npb and fro I^O
J
XXV. Pe Yodh and Pe Waw Verbs 135
XXVI. Lamedh He Verbs 142
XXVII. Verbal Suffixes 149
A. The Suffixes themselves.
B. Modification of the Stem.
4. Suffixes to H "7 Stems.

Waw and 'Ayin Yodh Verbs

XXVIII. 'Ayin
XXIX. Double 'Ayin Verbs
8. With Verbal Suffixes.
..... . . 157
164

XXX. Pe Guttural and Pe 'Aleph Verbs . .170

A. Pe Guttural (with
x
nVl
TT
and iTn).
'
T T

B. Pe 'Aleph.
XXXI. 'Ayin and Lamedh Guttural Verbs . . 176
A. 'Ayin Guttural (with "»"#).

B. Lamedh Guttural (with r\"p).

XXXII. Lamedh 'Aleph Verbs . . . . .181

XXXIII. Irregular Nouns .185

......
. . . .

XXXIV. Nouns from n"t», l"y, and Jj"y Stems. . . 189

XXXV. Numerals. 194

Appendices —
A. On
and Predicate
B. On the Method of expressing Oaths
......
the Agreement in Gender and Number between Subject

.... 200
201
C „ n » Wishes . .202 , .
 i

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Ait E n > i C E S (continued)—
PAGE
D. Further Note on Circumstantial Clauses 203
E. On the Method of expressing Conditional Sentences . 205
F. On some Idiomatic Uses of the Prepositions 3, ? y
and JE> . 206

G. On the Work of the Massorctes and their Notes 208

//. On Remains of old Case Endings . 2IO
On some Uses of the Accusative

......
/. . 211
/. Some Notes on the Hebrew Vowel System from Notes by
Professor Kennett) 212

Vocabularies
Hebrew-English
English-Hebrew
—
......
...... 223
234

Paradigms —
A. The Strong Verb 250
B. The Verbal Suffixes to the Strong Verb 252
C. ffi Verbs 254
D. Pe Guttural and N"S Verbs 2$6
E. 'Ayin Guttural Verbs . 258
F. Lamedh Guttural Verbs 20O
G. X"b Verbs 262
H. n"b Verbs 264
,,//
/. D and l"a Verbs 266
/. l"y and *"V Verbs 268
K. y"V Verbs

Proses .... 270

272
 SUPPLEMENTARY INDEX TO TABLE
OF CONTENTS.
(The Numerals refer to Pages.)

Accusative, sign of definite, 28.

Circumstantial clauses, 91, 107, 203.
Closed syllables, 26 (note on accents).
Divine Names, 44.
Duals, 64, 95.
Furtive Pathah, 23.
Gender of Nouns, 56.
Half-open syllables, 21, 49 (footnote), 64 (footnote *), 95 § 2, 100 {b).

K e
thlv, 119, 209.
Mappiq, 9 (note on He).
Maqqeph, 28, 86, 118.
Metheg, 118.
Motion towards, expressed by !"l—
} 55 (and footnote).

Negatives ; &6, 31 ; ?K }
85.

Open syllables, 24 (footnote *).

Prohibitions, 77.
Pronouns repeated emphatically, 39 § 3.

Q e re, 119, 209.

Raphe, 119.
Resh with Hateph Sh e \va, 15 (note).
Sibilants transposed in Hithpa'el, 72.
Yodh quiescent and consonantal, 12, 23.

jq
 HEBREW GRAMMAR.
[Note. — Sections Grammar which are marked with an
in this
asterisk are not meant for the beginner they should be left
:

till he is revising his Grammar.]

CHAPTER I.

OUTLINE OF THE HISTORY OF HEBREW AND ITS

POSITION AMONG SEMITIC LANGUAGES.
!
§ I. Hebrew is a branch of an important family of

languages called Semitic, 2 which was spoken over a tract

of country, extending approximately from the Tigris valley
to the Mediterranean, and from the mountains of Armenia
to the coasts of Arabia. There are four 3 main divisions
of the Semitic group of languages.
(i.) The southern group, chiefly represented by Arabic,
(ii.) The middle group, including Hebrew and the
kindred dialects of Palestine, and Phoenician,
(iii.) The northern group, including Syriac and Pales-
tinian Aramaic : also Samaritan.
1
The word " Hebrew " represents an meaning " belonging
Hebrew adjective
to those on the other side" i.e. (probably) "those who came from beyond the
river Euphrates." The term was seldom used by the Hebrews when speaking of
themselves, except to foreigners. The language is called in the Old Testament
the Jews' language, 2 Kings xviii. 26; Isa. xxxvi. 11. 13, or the language of
Canaan, Isa. xix. 18.
2 " Semitic" is derived from Shem, one of the three sons of Noah, among
whom, according to Gen. x., all the families of the world were divided. The
original home of the Semites was probably Arabia. (Cp. Geden, Introduction to
Hebrew Bible, p. 1 1 ).
3
Cp. Ges. K. p. 2.

I
 —

2 OUTLINE OF THE HISTORY OF HEBREW AND

(iv.) The eastern group, including Babylonian and

Assyrian.
It is not to be supposed that all these languages are very
closely allied to each other, but they all, or nearly all,

contain certain common characteristics, some of which are

as follows :

(i.) A preference for stems consisting of three con-

sonants only,
(ii.) A tendency to have only two tenses in verbs, and
two genders in nouns,
(iii.) A similarity of roots for certain common ideas,
(iv.) The custom of writing and reading from right to
left instead of vice versa. The so-called cunei-
form script of Babylonian and Assyrian does not
follow this direction,
(v.) Only the consonants are written in the early text,
the vowels being added later. (This, of course,
does not apply to the cuneiform script).
§ 2. Until comparatively recent times it was imagined that
Hebrew was the oldest language in the world. Modern in-
vestigation, especially with regard to the comparative study of
languages, has proved this not to be the case. Hebrew comes,
in point of date, about the middle of the Semitic group of
languages, certainly long after Babylonian * and Assyrian.
§ 3. The literature of Hebrew proper is almost confined
to the Old Testament : outside this we have only (ci) a few
inscriptions, notably the Siloam inscription mentioned below ;

(J?)
certain coins, principally Maccabean (r) fragments of the ;

Book of Ecclesiasticus, together with various other frag-

ments recently discovered in Egypt and now in the
Cambridge University Library. These last are of great
importance, but the task of sifting them is not yet accom-
plished. Within the Old Testament there are the following
2
passages written in Aramaic (i.) two words in Gen. xxxi. :

1
Babylonian tablets have been found which are said to date back as early as
4000 B.C. (Hilprecht, Babylonian Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania^
i. pp. 1 1 ff. ).

2
Cf. (jes. K. p. 2,
 ITS POSITION AMONG SEMITIC LANGUAGES 3

47 ;
(ii.) Jer. x. 1 1 ;
(iii.) Dan. ii. 4-vii. 28 ;
(iv.) Ezra iv. 8-
vi. 18: vii. 12—26. So the period of Hebrew literature
extends from perhaps the ninth 1 to the second century B.C.
Putting aside for the time the various documents which
make up the Hexateuch,2 the eighth to the sixth century
may be taken as most flourishing era.
representing the
During and after the Exile, Hebrew became tinged with
Aramaic influences, and before long it is probable that it
ceased to be the language of the people. It was, indeed,
understood considerably later, and the fact that the Book
of Daniel, which dates in all probability from 167 B.C., was
written for the most part in Hebrew, serves to show that
3
the literary language was not " dead " as late as that

date.
There is a marked distinction between Hebrew
§ 4.

prose and poetry both in style and in language the :

poetical portions show not only a much larger range of

words, but also a tendency to introduce artificial archaisms,
as well as constructions only found in late Hebrew. It is

probable that the earliest literature was poetical in form,

and that this supplied a model for the later poetry.
§ 5. With regard to the alphabet, there is considerable
doubt as to its origin, but it seems allied more closely with
5
the Egyptian picture-writing 4 than with the ideograms of
Babylonia and Assyria. The earliest extant example of
Hebrew writing is afforded by the Siloam inscription, dis-
covered 1880 A.D. in a rock-cut tunnel connecting with the

1
It is, however, probable that the Hexateuch contains verses which are con-
siderably older than the ninth century. Such would be short poetical fragments,
as for instance Gen. iv. 23, 24 ; Num. xxi. 17, 18.
2
The document known as J is generally supposed to date from the end of
the ninth century B.C., while E is about half-a-century later.
3
When Hebrew wasno longer understood by the mass of people, it became
necessary to translate and explain it in the current Aramaic. Hence arose the
various targums or translations, which are often very free renderings, or even
paraphrases.
4
The
earliest Egyptian writing was in the form of rude figures.
5
An
ideogram is a conventional combination of lines representing a fixed
sound or sounds. In the history of writing it marks a later stage than picture
writing, though there is reason to think that it is developed from it.
4 OUTLINE OF THE HISTORY OF HEBREW AND

Virgin's Well at Jerusalem. There is good reason to

suppose that the tunnel was cut in the reign of Hezekiah,
and therefore the date of the inscription would be about
the end of the eighth century B.C. But Aramaic inscriptions
of a somewhat earlier date have been found at Zendschirli
in N. Syria, and the famous Moabite inscription of Mesha
dates from about 850 B.C.

§ The earlier letters were rounded, whereas those which

6.

are now used are square. The period of transition cannot

be determined exactly, but the Jewish tradition that the
square letters were brought back by Ezra from Babylon
probably gives too early a date. However, transition-forms
are found in inscriptions as early as the fourth century,
while an inscription in the square character has been found
dating from 176 B.C. It is obvious that the square
characters were in general use in the time of our Lord, for
He speaks of the Iwtcl, or yodh, as the smallest letter
(Matt. which is not the case in the older writing.
v. 18),

§ 7. Ancient Hebrew manuscripts of the Old Testament

are rare. There are four fragments of papyri brought
from Egypt which are said to be not later than the second
century A.D., 1 but they seem to belong to a lectionary rather
than a complete text. Beyond these there is no manuscript
of the Old Testament that can certainly be dated earlier than
the tenth century.
§ 8. In early Hebrew the vowels were not represented.
In course of time an attempt was made to denote the long
vowels by consonants but it was the work of the Massoretes, 2
;

a body of scholars who lived in the fifth and sixth centuries A.D.,
to elaborate a vowel system, and to add vowels and accents 3
to the consonantal text. They performed their task with
4
extraordinary faithfulness, so that they hardly ever altered

1
Cf. Geden, p. 57.
2 meant a
The name is derived from Massorah, by which is collection of
various notes on the Hebrew text.
3
These are written above and below the line and not on the same level with

the consonants.
4 which the Massoretes are
Eleven cases are noted by Jewish scholars in said
to have made deliberate emendations.
 ITS POSITION AMONG SEMITIC LANGUAGES 5

the traditional text : whenever it seemed to them wrong or

offensive they put the correction they intended in a note at
the bottom of the page. It is to their pains and their keen
scholarly tact that we owe the fact that we can read with
accuracy the Hebrew Bible.
 :

CHAPTER II.

CONSONANTS.

§ I. In ancient Hebrew, as has been said above, the

consonants alone were written, and there was no proper
system of vowel notation. Like the Egyptian hieroglyphic
characters, they were formed on the "acrophonic" principle,
i.e. each letter was a picture which indicated the initial
sound of the object depicted {e.g. 1, beyth, a house, indicated
the letter b).

This is clearer in the Phoenician method of writing than in

the Hebrew but : it may be seen in such letters as 11 = fence,

!3 = bent hand, t!tf = tooth (see, further, in the table given
below).
§ 2. The pronunciation of Hebrew which we adopt in
this country is that employed by the modern Spanish and
Portuguese Jews (called for convenience S e phardim), in
e
distinction from those of Poland and Russia (called 'Ashk n-
azim). This pronunciation was introduced by Reuchlin in
the sixteenth century, and follows in the main that of
Arabic.
In the following table, the sounds given to the letters
are approximately correct, being the equivalents
only
usually chosen in transliterating Hebrew into English.
The beginner should notice that the vowel sounds have
the value given them in Italian

a like the English ah (the vowel of "calf"),

e „ „ „ ay ( „ „ „ " drake ").
I „ „ „ ee ( „ „ „ " sheep ").
u „ „ n oo ( „ „ „ " goose ").
 CONSONANTS

§ 3. ALPHABET.

93
Form.
>
Name. Sound and Sign. Meaning. 73
O CO
0)
Ordinarily.
s

I N 'Aleph The Greek smooth Ox I

breathing
2 1 Beth b or bh 1
House 2

3 J Gimel g or gh Camel 3
4 1 Daleth dor dh ( = the 'th' Door 4
in '
the ')

5 n He h ? Air-hole 5

6 1 Waw (to w (consonantal u, Hook, nail 6

rhyme with Latin v)
"bough")
7 t
Zayin g Weapon 7

8 n Heth h (ch as in Scotch Fence 8

"loch")
9 to Teth / (lingual) ? Snake 9
10 n Yodh y (consonantal i) Hand 10
11 d Kaph k or kh Bent hand 20
1
i 2 b Lamedh I Goad 30
13 ft d Mem m Water 40
14 3 Nun 11 Fish 5o
I
15 D Samekh s (?) Prop 60
c

16 y Ayin The Greek rough Eye 70

breathing '
(but
see below)

17 Q Pe p or ph (Greek <p) Mouth 80

18 2 £adhe c (hissing s) ? Fish hook 90
19 p Qoph q (palatal k) ? Back of skull, 100
or eye of needle
20 ^ Resh r (palatal) Head 200
21 to, tf Sin, Shin s, sh Tooth 300
22 D Taw (pro- t or th (Greek 6) Sign 400
noun ce d
like waw)

1
Pronounced "v" by convention.
 : :

8 CONSONANTS

§ 4. It will be noticed that Hebrew, with its twenty-two

consonants, has rather a fuller alphabet than English. It
lacks sounds for v and x ; but it has several extra sounds
(n, y, p, etc.), a variety of sibilants or dentals (see below, § 6),

and two forms of t (10 and D).

The following consonants are easily confused with one
x
another

1 (2)
2
with 3 (11).
3 (3) with 3 (14).

1 (4) with ^ (20).

H (5) with H (8) and M (22).
1 (6) with t (7).

10 (9) with 12 and D (13), and the latter with D (15).

V (16) with 2 (18).

§ 5. Final letters.
Five consonants take a special form when they are
"final" {i.e. stand last in a word), i.e. Nos. 11, 13, 14, 17,
and 18. *"[,
|,
f], and y, are distinguished from the more
ordinary forms by being prolonged below the line, instead
of being turned at an angle. Final D (13) is closed,

whereas the ordinary 12 is left open and is rounder.

3
§ 6. Classification.
The consonants may be classed according to their
pronunciations

(a) Labials (pronounced on the lips) 1, 1, 12, D.

a
^ )
{sibnl nL}
(pronounced on the teeth) *'
D> *'
^ tt5 '

(c) Linguals (pronounced on the tongue) 1, 10, v, 0, n.

(d) Palatals (pronounced on the palate) 3, \ 2, p, 1.
(e) Gutturals (pronounced on the throat) N, 71, Jl, V.
1
In Matt. v. 18 our Lord says that no "jot" (Iwra, yodh, the smallest
Hebrew letter) or " tittle " (Kepia) of the Jewish law shall pass away. The Kepia
is the small" horn " which distinguishes {e.g.) 2 from 3.
2
The numbers are given to help the beginner in referring to the previous table.
3
The beginner need not commit this section to memory.
 CONSONANTS 9

§ 7. Further remarks on pronunciation.

(b) Dentals. — Samekh
(15) D, and Sin (21) t?, are
sometimes interchanged in the Old Testament.
It is uncertain what was the distinction between
them. D is transliterated by s.

(c) Linguals. —Teth (9) E, is distinct from Taw

(22) T\. by pressing the
It is pronounced
tongue on the roof of the mouth (to make the
t hard).

(d) Palatals. —
Qoph (19) p, is the true q (Greek
Koirird), a sound which is not found in English
(our qu only = kw). It is pronounced at the back
of the palate.
Resh (20) \ is a palatal in Hebrew, not a lingual
as in English. This explains its many affinities

with the gutturals, e.g. like them it cannot be

doubled.
(e) Gutturals. —'Aleph (1) N, at the beginning of
a syllable is like the smooth breathing in Greek,
i.e. marks the suspension of breath which
it

precedes an initial vowel. If we say in English

" sea-eagle," we close our throats before the
second word, and thus make the sound of N
before " eagle." After a vowel, at the end of
a syllable, it is usually " quiescent," i.e. it is not
pronounced.
He (5) n, when final, is usually quiescent. In this
position, when it is to be pronounced, it is written
with a dot (called Mapplq), 71.

Heth (8) H, is an h pronounced in the throat. It

is a stronger sound than H.

'Ayin (16) V, has probably a stronger and a weaker
1
pronunciation. It is something like the sound

1
In Arabicit has two different forms. It may be noted that in the
Septuagint sometimes transliterated by 7,
it is e.g. To/xoppa, sometimes by the
rough breathing (which we use to represent it).
 : — —

10 CONSONANTS
made in the throat by those who cannot pro-
nounce the English letter r. At the end of
a syllable, it may be represented by a catch in
the breath.
N.B. — Further remarks on the pronunciation of the six
letters, 1 D (11), D (17), and H (22), which
(2), 3 (3), 1 (4),
are sometimes aspirated, will be found in Chapter V.
The beginner should practise the sounds n, V and
t p.

He should particularly avoid the common blunder of

pronouncing V like y.

EXERCISE.
Identify the following names of consonants
—"H2—yso— —iv —^]b^—ttfn— pr—nvb— m
1. :

1 1
ptf

*p— pi —hm— «d— Nn_Yi—r\u—nn— nn—pt— d^d

—nVr iH'ip
1

2. Read the following names, sounding the vowels

which you think correct.

_p_*tiiN— rvn— fttii— dm$— mto— omit*— trra

3. Write the following names in Hebrew, omitting the

vowels
Dawid — Mosheh — Gad — Tartan — Kaleb — Ribqah
— Rahel— — Yichaq — 'Eprayim —Yosep
Par'oh
—Tebet— Ziza'
 :

II

CHAPTER III.

FULL VOWELS.

§ I. Ancient Hebrew, as was pointed out above, had no

system of vowel notation. This defect was attended by
many inconveniences e.g. it was impossible to distinguish ;

" sus," a horse, from " sus-I," my horse, and " sus-o," his

horse, or 'Adam from 'Edom, except by the context.

Hence, as written records became commoner, it was cus-
tomary to denote some of the long vowels by writing the
most closely allied consonantal sounds : ^
(y) was employed
to denote i, 1 Later on, a scheme
(w) to denote o and u.

of signs to denote other vowel sounds was evolved it was ;

systematised by the school of the Massoretes (interpreters),

and isknown as the Massoretic system.
With the exception of the three long vowels mentioned
above, the vowels are denoted by signs placed under the
consonants which they follow.
§ 2. The vowel sounds, in Semitic languages, fall into
three primary classes, a, i, and u. The Massoretic system
may be shown thus
Short. Long.
ist Class, a Pathah (a as in 'man') Qamec (a as in calf)
sign - sign-

2nd Class, i S e ghol l

(e as in hen') £ere (e as in
f
drake
sign — sign - ')

Hlreq (T as in » pin ') Long Hlreq (1 as in '

sheep ')
sign T sign >-

3rd Class, u f Qamec Hatuph 2 (6 as in '

dog ') Holem (6 as in 'colt')
sign - sign ) or '_
Qibbuc (u as in '
bull ') Shureq (u as in '
goose ')

sign - sign n

Thus jj
= qa :
p = qe : ip = qo : ^j? = qi.
1
Pronounce gh as g.
2
Hatuph = "swift" or "hurried."
 . —;

12 FULL VOWELS

§ 3. Remarks.
(a) The Massoretcs adopted the same sign for a —
1
and o. The beginner cannot distinguish them
he learns the laws of accents but he should
until :

remember that a is much commoner than o.

(b) Holem may be written fully as \ or '
defec-
tively '
as '

—
2
; the two are not absolutely inter-
changeable. The defective method of writing is

preferred when the word contains another vocal

1 or \ When Holem occurs after ft? or before tL\

the one dot serves the double purpose of point-

ing the consonant and denoting the vowel ; e.g.

"it? = sor, ti?"l = rosh. Similarly, i may stand for

wo So fiV = 'a-won
or 6w. : !Tjy = lo-weh.
e
(c) S ghol and Hireq, when lengthened, both usually
become —
and Qamec Hatuph and Qibbug
;

likewise become '

—
* *(d) Short hireq and qibbug are frequently written
instead of ^
— and 1 ; e.sr. TH = T^H, David.
This is most common when another ^7- or 1

occurs in the next syllable ; e.g. ^ftj?J for *Mp\

e
* vowel
(/) § ghol belongs properly to the second
class ; but it very frequently stands for a modi-
fiedform of a cp. D5T.> from "P. Similarly ;

Hireq often stands for a thinned-down a eg. ;

* (/) ^ coalesces with the other three vowel sounds of

the second class to form a single vowel sound

1
The modern Polish and German Jews pronounce the two sounds in much
the same way. How easily a passes into o may be tested by any one who tries
to sing ah up the scale.
* 2
It is usually written fully (1) when it represents the contraction of aw (2)
;

when it represents an original Qamec in the tone syllable, e.g. fern. pi. in ]"li

(written defectively in the toneless).

3
The beginner is reminded that all paragraphs in this grammar that are
starred should be omitted by him. They are meant for those revising the
grammar, not for those learning it for the first time.
 . —

FULL VOWELS 13

i.e.
^— ^—, > and 1 — . But when it follows any
vowel of the first or third class, it retains its

consonantal character e.g. Dagesh Lene is ; in-

serted after ^— ^— , , ^— ^— ,

EXERCISE.
1. Read the following extract from Genesis i. 1—4.

¥T T V T T •• — T — •• T TT * *•

^
I I •

rrim nD« ,j

n : Dinn ^b hy ntfm *rfn ^nn rrrvn

)^n 7J23 ate ^ ni^n n« rrtrr run "V\m *TTn tin :

fcng ytirh*\ dv liaS rnrr wipn J^tinrr paa -fi^n

jin« dv> n,p vn :ny W] nfp ?
1

2. Write in Hebrew
— 'Epray 1m — Yarob'am — Go-
:

f
Obady ahu— Mosheh
—'Eden —
shen — Hanun — Qir— — £adoq 'Izebel
Huldah — Lot — Ykonyah — Sukkot 'Elhanan.
1 : is the Hebrew full stop.
 ; "

14

CHAPTER IV.

SH E WA (SEMI-VOWELS).

A. Moving or Vocal Sh e wa.

Every syllable in Hebrew begins with a consonant, 1
sometimes with two conjoined, but never with more than
two. Where there are two, the first, in old Hebrew, carried
a short vowel sound, which has been weakened in the later
language 2 e.g. dabarlm (words) has become dbarlm but :

between the d and the b in this example, the Hebrew

sounded a semi-vowel so that we should more accurately
';

e
transliterate the word as d barim.' We may compare the
'

first vowels in the English words " amend, believe," which

a
do not receive the value of full vowels (
mend, b e lieve). 3
The Hebrews called this semi-vowel sound Sh e wa,4 and
denoted it by the sign e.g. D*H1^T. — ;

This is called the " vocal 5 (or " moving ") Sh e wa to

distinguish it from another use of the same sign, which is
explained below in (B).

RULES FOR VOCAL SHEWA.

§ I. Vocal Sh e wa must be put under the first of two
1
The single exception is } = " and."
2
Cp. the disappearance of the final e of the verb " remember," in the noun
" remembrance."
3
If we say "daba-rim," laying the chief stress on the last syllable, we can
only give the a the value of a in " amend," i.e. a half-vowel sound. In "amend,"
however, the sound is distinctly a half a,' because the vowel stands at the
first '

beginning of the word and no consonant precedes. But in 'd a barlm,' no one can
a
say whether the half-sound is more of an 'e' or an ' ; so we transliterate '

these half-sounds by _f_ for the sake of convenience.

4
Sh e wa is the Hebrew 60 K*, nothingness, pointed K1K> in order to illustrate
the form of the sign.
5 " Vocal," i.e. pronounced $.s a half vowel.
 SH F WA (SEMI-VOWELS) 15

consonants standing together at the beginning of a syllable

without a full vowel between e.g. D*H11. ;

It has two degrees, the simple and the compound, the

latter being slightly nearer to a full vowel sound {eg. the
a in " a mend "). Simple Sh'zva is used with all consonants
except the gutturals
e
(N — —H —
51 V). The semi-vowel sound
of simple Sh wa is insufficient to secure the distinct pronun-
ciation of the gutturals. In compound or Hateph * Sh e was,
the vowel sound is enough for the ear to distinguish
full

to which class of vowels the sound belongs hence they :

may take three forms, corresponding to the three primary

classes of vowels.

(a) Hateph Pathah — ; as in Itoft* ('

a
sher) = " who " or
" which."

(b) Hateph S e ghol — as DVrSfcJ ; in (' e lohim) = " God."

(c) Hateph Qamec — as *0? ; in C° m — " poverty,
)

affliction."
* Note. — Besides the gutturals, other consonants some-
times take compound Sh e wa, where the need is felt of
securing a more distinct pronunciation to the consonant.
This is most frequent with 1, especially in 1 ^ verbs eg. ;

^yyiL. It is also found with sibilants and p ; e.g. lilt

(construct of l<lt).
§ 2. A Hateph vowel can neither precede nor follow a
simple vocal Sh e wa. This is only common sense, and will
be clear if we take examples :

(a) A Hateph before a simple Sh e wa necessarily be-

a
comes a full vowel ; eg. V7foj£ (ya modu) is

pronounceable we drop the ; but if '

— , "llftj?^ is

unpronounceable unless we write a full — under

the V P"l5Si ya'a-mdu ' ')•

(b) A simple, before a Hateph, Sh e wa becomes a full

vowel, its nature depending on the nature of the

Hateph ; e.g. for iforO, which is unpronounce-
able, we must write l&PD.
l
i.e.
" swift" or "hurried." Cp. Qameg Hatuph,
 6 . ;

1 SH E WA (SEMI-VOWELS)

This rule is often expressed by saying that a ITatcph

vowel points itself and the preceding letter.
§ 3. Since it is impossible in Hebrew for a syllable to
begin with more than two consonants, it follows that two
vocal Sh e was cannot stand together in a word. In such a
e
case, the first Sh wa reverts to the original vowel of which
it is a weakened form. This will be clear from the follow-
ing example. Certain particles in Hebrew are prefixed to
the words to which they belong ; e.g. D-
= " in." This is
e
usually pointed with vocal Sh wa, 3- ; but when it is prefixed
e
to a word which already has a simple Sh wa under its first

consonant, e.g. HI"!, " the word (of) . . .", then the 1 carries

its original vowel ; "IT71 would be unpronounceable, and we

naturally have ^5-1?«
The beginner should notice that in such a case the
vowel to which the first Sh e wa reverts is usually —
N.B. — In this Grammar a consonant with vocal Sh e wa
is not reckoned as a separate syllable ; e.g. "HI e
(d var) is

counted as a monosyllable, not a disyllable.

B. Quiescent Or Silent Sh e wa (syllable divider).

§ I. The Hebrews also used Sh e wa for an entirely

different purpose, to mark the division between two syllables

in a word ; e.g. in tODtJJD (mish-pat). This is called

e
" quiescent " Sh wa because it has no pronunciation. It
1
marks the end of a "closed" syllable (i.e. a syllable ending
in a consonant) in the middle of a word. Thus it has no
e
connexion with vocal Sh wa, and it is unfortunate that the
same sign stands for both.
Now, as two vocal Sh e was can never occur together in
e
a word, it follows that if we find two Sh was together in
the same word, the first is quiescent and the second vocal

e.g. Alpj£ = '

yiq-t
e
lu.'

\ A Sh wa coming
e
at the end of a syllable or immediately
before another Slfwa is always quiescent,
1
A syllable ending in a vowel is said to be open.
 : ;

SH E WA (SEMI-VOWELS) 17

e
§ 2. Quiescent Sh vva does not appear in the last letter

of a word, except
(a) in final
"J,
which always contains Sh e wa in its
" bosom," unless it contains a full vowel ; e.g.

^D, <
a king '
; Sp^fc, '
thy king.'
(£) when a word ends in two consonants both of which
are sounded, they are both pointed with She wa
e
e.g. TyP&p, qatalt. In such cases the first Sh wa

is really quiescent, the second vocal ; i.e. the last

consonant has a semi-vowel sound ; e.g. Ty^p
= qa-tal-t * 115 = ner-d.
;

JS/.B. — Two consonants can only stand together thus

at the end of a word, when the second is a mute ; i.e.

1, \ \ D, D, r», 10, or p.

EXERCISES.
N.B. —
Simple vocal Sh e wa is not marked in exercise B.
A. Write out the extract from Gen. i. 1-4 given in the
last chapter, inserting Sh e wa.
B. Write in Hebrew the following names and words
Shkem — Ribqah — Ya qob — Mah nayim — lohim fa a '
e

— Micrayim — dom — Binyamin — — ' e

yiqtlek
ho °mad — shamart —
f
yiqtolka.
C. Correct the following forms
m^v—T^P — i^Ep— nnyn—wn
:

1 2

* 1
This is clearer, if we remember that in old Hebrew it was (vfi^Dp ; cp. DX
( = C0n3X) and F\T\) ( = C0ri3r)3), where the Dagesh forte witnesses to the semi-

vowel sound attached to the last letter (at-t, nathat-t).

2— =6.
 :

18

CHAPTER V.

DAGESH.

§ I. ' Dagesh probably means, by

'
derivation, that which
sharpens or hardens a letter. It is a point standing in the
middle of a consonant {e.g. 1), being identical in form
with the dot called Mappiq, found in a final H [see above,
Chap. II. § 7. (*)].

It indicates two different degrees of hardness in the

consonant
(1) 'Dagesh lene' (i.e. Latin for "the light Dagesh")
marks a lesser degree of hardening : thus "7 = dh ;

1 = d.
(2) '
Dagesh forte ' {i.e. the strong Dagesh) marks a
greater degree of hardening. Its practical effect
is to double the letter in which it stands ; though,
strictly speaking, it only strengthens the pro-
nunciation ; e.g. 7t5fp is pronounced qit-tel.

§ 2. Rules for Dagesh lene.

{a) There are only six consonants which vary from
their original hard sound to a softer or aspirated
sound. These are 2, \ 1, 3, D, and Jl. They
are called the " B gadhk phath
e e
" letters, this
name being formed as a '
memoria technical
The softer pronunciation in each case {i.e. with-
out Dagesh) was that of a true aspirate (cp. the
e.g. T\ = t
r
Greek y) 0, </>, But as we are
; .

almost incapable of making these sounds, we

give 2 (bh) the value of the English v ; 1 (dh),

that of '
th ' in the word '
the '
; D (ph), that of
 : )

DAGESH 19

f; and ]1 (th), that of '

th ' in 'thing': while
we neglect the aspirate in 3 (gh) and D (kh)
altogether.
(b) Dagesh lene never occurs immediately after a vowel,
quiescent letter}- or vocal Sh wa.c
These require
the softer or aspirated sound of the six letters.
It is always found in the six letters.

(1) At the beginning of a ^5^), un ^ ess the word (e.g.

last word has ended in a vowel or quiescent letter

and there is no pause between the two words. If
there is, after the first, any break equivalent to an
English stop, the second is given its initial Dagesh.
(2) At the beginning of a syllable, if the previous
syllable is closed. 2

So ^T? (m\dh-ba.r) ; but "11*1 (^a-^ar).

It is important to remember that Dagesh lene never

follows vocal Sh wa
e
; e.g. ^tt], not *)11r].

* Exceptions
(a) When a word ends in two sounded consonants
without a full vowel, then the second, aif

B gadhk
e e
phath Dagesh. The letter, carries reason
is that the latter is really the beginning of a new

syllable which is cut short see Chap. IV. B. § 2. ;

(b). Therefore this is not really an exception to

the rule, for the previous Sh e wa is quiescent.

(J?)
tD^tp (" two," with fern, nouns) is the one real
3
exception.
§ 3. Rules for Dagesh forte.
(a) As the practical effect of Dagesh forte is to

1
See notes on X and H in Chap. II. § 7 (e). The Yodh in *— *— *—
, , is

quiescent, Chap. III. § 3 (/) ; also the Waw in i and \.

2
That is to say, if it ends in a sounded consonant (which in this case takes
a quiescent Sh e wa).
* 3
The origin of the Dagesh in this word is uncertain. Perhaps D)ljjlEP=

D ri3^
h
(cp. D)J^)> in which case the Dagesh is forte. Or possibly it = DTl£'K»
with a "prosthetic" 'aleph, in which case the Dagesh is lene. (Prosthetic 'aleph
is an 'aleph not strictly belonging to the root, but prefixed to facilitate pronuncia-
tion : cp. especial with special.
20 DAGESH
double the consonant, it follows that it must
immediately follow a full vowel. Thus it is

easily distinguished from Dagesh lene (even in

c
the l) gadhk e phath letters), for the latter never
follows a vowel immediately.
The containing D. forte must have a vowel or
letter
vocal Sh vva of its own
e
a word never ends in a :

letter containing Dagesh forte. 1

(//) Dagesh forte may occur in all consonants except

the gutturals and Resh, their sound being such
as does not admit of doubling.
When a grammatical form demands a Dagesh forte
in one of these five letters, the vowel which
precedes them is usually lengthened to com-
pensate for the loss of Dagesh forte.

A simple example a certain voice of the verb,

is

which demands a D. forte in the second root

2 7ftp gives and
letter: the root 7>t£|? btep^. in

this voice : but "p2 gives T?.5- and ^^ (— and

— in the penultimate by compensation).
Remarks.
1. When the same consonant would be written twice
without an intervening vowel or vocal She wa, it is only
written once, with D. forte; e.g. |i"0 gives ^JlJ, not

*OJOJ' But 0557^ (mal-k e khem) cannot be written with

one Kaph, because the Sh e wa under the first Kaph is vocal.
2. When D. forte occurs in one of the B gadhk phath
e e

letters, the double sound is necessarily hard, not aspirated ;

e.g. lip = Kib-bedh.

* 3. D. forte is often omitted in certain consonants which
e
carry vocal Sh wa. This occurs most frequently with \ the
liquids v, 72, and with p e.g. ^n^J is regularly written
3, ;

for ^rr?] (" and it came to pass "). Also in sibilants, when
followed by a guttural ; cp. NlB') ;
plur. INip'J.

* J
Except such words as flK=^Jtf,
j. .- nn^TOrU.
.._.- T «:- T
2 Almost all verbal roots in Hebrew have three root-letters (consonants).
 ;

DAGESH 21

The syllable preceding the consonant in question is

half-open ; i.e. in the example given, the pronunciation is

neither " wa-yhi," nor " vvay-hi," but is something between

the two.
* 4. " Disjunctive " D. forte is a name given to the
Dagesh, when it is inserted in a consonant carrying a vocal
Sh e wa for no other reason than to make the pronunciation
of the latter more audible; e.g. ^21^ in Lev. xxv. 5 (for

L
We may compare with this the Dagesh in nftT* (' why ? ')

and JIM (' how much ? ') to give greater strength to the first

vowel.
* 5. " Conjunctive D. forte is of commoner occurrence
"

i.e. certain cases where two words are run together in pro-
nunciation, and a D. forte inserted in the first letter of the
second word. Jit (' this,' masc.) and TVfo ( = how) are
often joined to the following word by a hyphen (Maqqeph) :

thus we have NliSTlft how fearful '), Gen.

(' xxviii. 1 7 ;

and iMTilt (' this is his name '), Jer. xxiii. 6.

This con-
junctive D. forte is usually found after a word ending in
quiescent H.

EXERCISE.
1. Correct the following words:
_ rntp — *R$*f\ — aij? — o;i$ — ttt\ — Tni
" T
*
2. Write in Hebrew :

Mqat-tel ; bash-sha-ma-ylm sap-

mal-ke-nu ; dbar ; ;

f
pru rmb-bney ha- am bcjdqatam hag-gip-por
; ; ;
;

zeh ben Ya a qob, ben Yic-haq mal-kkem yish- ;

;

ta-h a wch.
3. Insert Dagesh lene, where necessary, in the extract
from Gen. i. 1—4, given in Chap. III.
1
In this exercise, simple D. lene is not represented in the English ; and the
B gadhk e phath
e
letters are written in their hard unaspirated form. After this, in

transliterating Hebrew words, 2 will be given as v, 1 as dh, etc.

22

CHAPTER VI.

GUTTURALS AND WEAK LETTERS.

The beginner will find it useful to read through this
chapter, but he need not study it carefully at this stage.

A. The Gutturals.
§ I. The gutturals are N, H, H, V, and (for some
purposes) *\
Of these, N and H are usually gutturals only at the
beginning of a syllable.
N is rarely consonantal at the end of a syllable (see

Chap. II. § 7. (e)) f

but a form like "VDfc^ is possible.

H is a guttural at the end of a syllable within a word ;

but not at the end of a word, unless it bears

Mappiq (see Chap. II. § 7. (e)) ; eg. PTOtlttrn, '
he
tarried.'

§ 2. Peculiarities.
(a) They cannot take Dagesh forte : and in rejecting
it, often cause the lengthening of the previous
1
vowel for compensation (see Chap. V. § 3. (J?)).

N and "1 always require this lengthening of a pre-

ceding short vowel, when they would otherwise
take Dagesh forte.

V often does so.

il and n are so strong in sound as to be virtually
reduplicated in speech consequently they do not ;

usually require compensatory lengthening of the

previous vowel. 2
1
—
_
becomes — —
T
;
•
becomes — —
••
;
T
and — become .

* 2
But a vowel coming before any guttural and bearing a countertone
(Metheg) must be lengthened. Cp. Impf. Niph. TjQn^.
 :

GUTTURALS AND WEAK LETTERS 23

(J?)
They cannot take vocal Sh e \va, but must have
a Hateph vowel instead : usually this vowel is

a Hateph PathaJj,.

we write ""ItTN, not *^tTN.

e.g.

(c) They often prefer a Hateph vowel to a quiescent

Sh e wa.
Compare "TOJ?!, he will cause to stand/ with Tfttp^,
'

1
he will destroy/
be remembered that a Hateph vowel conditions
It will

the vowel that precedes cp. Chap. IV. A. § 2 (b). ;

(d) They have a preference for a rather than e or 1

1 or o.

Compare PH??, '

salt,' with *T?ft,
c
king.'

N, however, admits S ghol

often e
where other
gutturals would have Pathah.
(e) Final FT, H, and V
cannot stand directly after a
long vowel other than Qameg. A Pathah slips
in to help the pronunciation, which, though
written under the guttural, is pronounced before
it. This is called Furtive Pathah.
Compare IT'Dtp^, '
he will cause to hear,' with TOtl^
2
*
he will destroy.'

(/) A Hateph vowel becomes a full vowel before a

guttural.

Compare ^JTH, '

shall he go ? ' with lpNH>3 '
shall
I go?'
B. The weak or quiescent letters are N, Ji, \ \
They are, however, only quiescent at the end of a syllable
at the beginning they are full consonants. Final H (not
1
Hireq under gutturals is rare. Not infrequently its place is taken by Seghol,
especially in verbal forms.
2
So n^D • T
is difficult to pronounce, while ITtJJD,
" • T
mashiah (Messiah), is quite
^
easy. The same difficulty would not be felt after a long a e.g. 113D, 'butcher.' ;

The Furtive Pathah disappears when a vowel comes after the guttural e.g. ;

nil, 'spirit,' but Dimi, 'spirits.'

* 3 The interrogative particle has now a countertone and is written with

Metheg ; e.g. "iftNin.

 :

24 GUTTURALS AND WEAK LETTERS

FT) is always silent : within a word it is always sounded.

Final N is always silent : at the end of a syllable within
a word it is occasionally, but rarely, a consonant.
* 1 and *•
are only silent after homogeneous vowels
{i.e. of the o and i class respectively), in which case they
coalesce to form the long vowels \ \ and *•— , ^— , and \^ m

After heterogeneous vowels they are consonantal; e.g. in

in, n in, nation/ the last letters are sounded.

'
line,' '

The effect of these letters being silent is threefold

e
(i) They do not take silent Sh wa ; e.g. 1§fc^, not

(2) A short vow el before r

them being consequently
x
left in an open syllable is usually lengthened.
Thus Sttp
- 'T
= 'he killed';' nSttp,
t - :
'thou didst
't'
kill.'
.

But from N2ft, he found/ the form ' parallel to £?££

is n«S»,
T T T
not HN2E.
' t: _ T
(3) When standing between a vowel and a strong
consonant they have no pronunciation and are
entirely neglected; e.g. tifcn, 'head'; ^NJflJ^,
2
' Ishmael.'
1
i.e. a syllable ending in a vowel sound.
a This rule, in effect, only concerns tf.
 :

25

CHAPTER VII.

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE AND THE INTERROGATIVE

PARTICLE.

A. The Definite Article.

1
§ I. Hebrew has no indefinite article.

The definite article is not an independent word, but is

always prefixed to its noun or adjective. Its original form

2
was perhaps 7H, like the Arabic article al, which it

resembles in many ways. But if so, the final v has been

assimilated to the following consonant and is only repre-
sented by a Dagesh forte in the latter.

Before all consonants, except the gutturals and ^, the

article appears as — 71 followed by Dagesh forte ; eg. *M?ft,

'king'; ^/EH, 'the king.' Before the gutturals and ""),

which cannot be doubled, its pointing varies according to
the following rules
(a) N and 1, being the weakest in sound, demand that
the Pathah of the article should be lengthened
to compensate for the absence of Dagesh forte
(see Chap. V. § 3. (£)) ; e.g. ^NH, 'the man';
ttfNhn, '
the head.'
(b) Before the other gutturals, 71, 71, y, its form varies

* * In later Hebrew the numeral IflX, ' one,' is sometimes used as an in-
T V

I Kings xix. 5)
definite article (cp. cp. unus in late Latin.
: ' '

2
Seen in such words as almanac, algebra, alcohol, alhambra, and in many
Spanish names such as Alcantara, and perhaps preserved in the Hebrew
C'D-lPX, '
hail,' etc. Before some consonants the / disappears as in Hebrew
and the following consonant is doubled. Certain Bedouin tribes are said to
pronounce the article 'hal.'
 : H ;

26 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE AND

according as these gutturals have or have not -^

beneath them.
(i) Before V y
with any vowel except - or with any
hateph vowel, it usually is —H ;
l
e.g. ^.5?n, '
the
eye.'

Before with any vowel except

Pf or 11,it is H, — , —
no compensation being needed for these are the ;

strongest guttural sounds, and the catch in the

breath before pronouncing either of them amounts
to a virtual reduplication e.g. 1'm\T\n *
the
; y

sword.'

(2) Before —H — or 1\
if the accent of the word falls on them, the article

is —n; e.g. ^m, 'the mountain':

<
DVT1. 'the
people.' [The sign < over the word is con-
ventionally used to show where the accent
falls]

if they are unaccented, the article is —H ; e.g.

O^Hn,
•TV*
'
the mountains ' ;
7
ID^n,
X T V '
<
the dust.'
Before — x
2
or — Jl 3 ,
t: '
whether accented or not, the '

article is —H ; e.Q-. DDfin, '

the wise man '

^sTXH. '
the disease.'
— Every
'
• v t:

Note on Accents. independent word has an

accent where the stress of the voice comes. in pronunciation.
The accented syllable is called the tone-syllable. The
beginner will find it sufficient for the present to remember
this rule, that a syllable with a long vowel, if '
closed* {i.e.

ending in a consonant), is always accented '; e.g. D*HPT is

the plural of 1H, but the accent is no longer on the PT but

on the D^ — (long vowel in a closed syllable).
Remark. —The three common words yiN, '
earth, land ' *

* l
Occasionally —n ; e.g. D"Hiyn, 2 Sam. v. 6.

* 2 — before — T\
T
becomes —
V
; e.g. VTJN.
T V
So TIK in pause becomes TlK.
T •

3
Before — JJ, the article is — i"l-
 THE INTERROGATIVE PARTICLE 27

"1PT, '
mountain '
; and DV, *
people,' appear with the article as

p «n, Vrn, oyn.

¥
1

SUMMARY OF THE FOREGOING RULES.

The article is

1. Ordinarily "Pf ; e.g. ^7?n, '

tne king.'

2. [Before N and 1,— H; tt^Nn, *£•. 'the man';

ttfNhn, '
the head.'
(Before y, usually — ^. 71 ;
]?3?PJ, '
the eye.'
Before Jl and H, — ^TTTi,
il ; e.g. ' the sword.'

3- Before H or V, — 71; e.g. ^7171,

'
tne mountain';
/ DVH, ' the people.'
'Before il or V, — H: ^.^. Q^IUT, 'the mountains.'
Before HT or H, —
T.
71
•«•
;
*
&p-,
O O^Jin,
T T V
(
the wise (man).'
x '

* § 2. The article is used in Hebrew even more widely

than in English.
(a) With a few common words, it retains the demon-
strative force that it originally had ; e.g. OVn,
1
to-day '
(this day).
(b) The vocative is usually expressed by the noun with
the article ; e.g. ^ttH njPttftn, " save, O king."
(c) Generic use. — It is widely used, as in Greek, to
denote a member of a class, where we in English
should use the indefinite article ; e.g. ^|N!l, '
an
enemy.'
(d) It is frequently attached to a noun, which denotes
a person or thing mentioned for the first time,
but defined in the mind as the subject of the
following narrative ; e.g. GiTT TT^» " an d it
happened on a day " {the day of the facts to be
narrated). So " he wrote in a book " is "ISDDX
(e) In late Hebrew, it is sometimes used for the
relative pronoun.
* 1
The following nouns also lengthen a vowel with the article : IBj
'buiiock' (nan) j an, 'festival' (ann); fi"iK, 'ark' (rt-i«n).
" T T T v : T
 ' : ; ; '

28 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE AND

§ 3. NOTE. —JIN l
is frequently used with the definite
accusative in Hebrew. It is usually joined to the noun by
a hyphen (MSqqeph), and is then treated as part of the
following word, i.e. it loses its accent and consequently
shortens its vowel.
It is only used before
{a) a noun with the definite article 2
e.g. D^DiTTM,
'
(I saw) the horse.'
{U) a proper noun ; e.g. TnTlN "TV^l, '
I saw David.'
3
{c) a noun with a pronoun suffix e.g. ITTN^,
iD^lDTlSt, ' I saw his horse.'

So it is not correct to say D^lDTlN VVWl, f° r ' I saw

4
a horse.'
HN is frequently omitted even before a definite accus-
ative ; and it is comparatively rare in poetry. But in
Hebrew prose it should usually be inserted.

B. The Interrogative Particle.

Similar in form to the article is the particle H, which is

usually prefixed to the first word of an interrogative

sentence. form varies as follows
Its

(1) Before ordinary consonants with full vowel it is

pointed PT ; e.g. vfe)j£, ' he will slay' ; vbp^H, ' will

he slay ?

(2) Before ordinary consonants with Sh e wa and before

gutturals it is H. 5
'
eg. DJT?ttj?, '
ye slew '
; Di??i?pn, '
did ye slay ?

TfapW, '
I shall slay '
; Sbp^n, <
shall I slay ?
'

1
Ges. K. pp. 365-66, explains it as a noun, originally meaning ' being
(German Wesen).
* - Or in the construct case (when definite).
3
For these suffixes, see Chap. XII. DN is also used before an interrogative

(VOTIX* 'whom?'), or a relative pronoun.

* 4
For apparent exceptions, cp. Ex. xxi. 28 I Sam. xxiv. 5 2 Sam. iv. II. ; ;

5
be remembered that a Hateph vowel can neither precede nor follow
It will

a vocal Sh e wa (see Chap. IV. A. § 2), neither can it come before a guttural
(Chap. VI. A. § 2. (/)).
 —

THE INTERROGATIVE PARTICLE 29

(3) Before all gutturals with — it is PT.

he said lENn, did he say

O "V2N,
'
eg. ' ?
— T '
;
' —TV
* A nuance of surprise or sarcasm is sometimes con-
veyed by omitting the interrogative particle; cf. Judg.
xiv. 16.

VOCABULARY.
man UTN (m.) people DJJ (m.)
woman * PT# « (f.) God 2
D^H'^ (m. plur.)
word, thing *"Q^ ( m ne heard SW?ttJ

heaven D^ftttJ
- x
•
(m.
\
plur.)
X /
he made Jlto^
T T

earth f}N (f.) he saw HiT}

mountain ^H (m.) and — 1. (attached
to next word)
1
Note that it is not JIB^N. n$K is for ntyjtf.

2
The word D^HPtf though plural in form takes the singular verb when
referring to the One God. When used with a plural verb, it refers to (heathen)
gods.

EXERCISE.
N.B. The verb usually comes first in a Hebrew sentence.

1. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) The man and the woman. (2) The heaven and
the earth. (3) God heard the people. (4) The
man heard the word. (5) God made the
mountain. (6) Did the people hear the word ?

(7) Did God see the woman? (8) Did God

make the heaven ? (9) God saw the man and
the man (saw) the woman.
2. Prefix the article to the following:

— DSfi—*©»— W— ^tl— OTY^N— DTtfl-'YBa

I vv • - • t: • t • t -:

3. Prefix the interrogative particle to the following:

' » t F-T '

T » 1 • v:-'; I; v
 : .

30

CHAPTER VIII.

ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.

A. Adjectives.
§ i. Inflection.
(a) In Hebrew there are only two genders, mascu-
and feminine and, as far as the adjective is
line ;

concerned, only two numbers, singular and plural.

The adjective is inflected by adding suffixes to the
masculine singular
Tern. sing, suffix STj-
- Masc. plur. „ C -?-
1

.Fem. plur. „ JTl—

e.g. lift, '
good '
; fern. sing. HlitD ; masc. plur.

D^lift ; fern. plur. rTQitt.

(b) All these suffixes are accented. 1 Now — and

— (for reasons explained below in Chap. XII.)
cannot, as a rule, stand more than one syllable away
from the accent. When, therefore, a polysyllabic

adjective like v'HZl, '

great,' adds a suffix, the
— is now two away from the accented
places
syllable, and consequently is thinned down into
a vocal She wa ; e.g. fern. sing. nTH? ; masc.
plur. D^VTJ ; fern. plur. ni^TH?.
If the first consonant is a guttural, the Sh e wa is, of
<

course, compound ; e.g. pXn, ' strong '

; fern, nj^tn.

1
D^ — and Jli — are necessarily accented according to the rule given in

Chap. VII., that a closed syllable with a long vowel must bear the accent.
 ;

ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS 31

§ 2. The adjective agrees with its noun in number Y

and
gender. If it qualifies the noun it is placed after it, and
if the noun is definite, the adjective must have the article.

e.g. litD UTN, '

a good man.'
niton tir^n, '
the good man.'
liTDn iDiD, '
his good horse ' (lit. ' his-horse the-
good ')•

however, the adjective is a predicate, it generally

If,

comes first in the sentence and does not take the article.
e.g. tt^n litO, '
the man is good.'

iDiO HitO, '

his horse is a good one.'
NOTE. — i. The present tense of the verb to be cannot easily
be expressed in Hebrew, and it is generally omitted.
ii. The ordinary negative with finite verbs is ts?.
Its position is usually first in the sentence; e.g.

tt^Mn litt tib, «

the man (is) not good.'
iii. If there is one predicate to several nouns, the
predicate usually agrees with the nearest noun.
iv. The predicate, whether a verb or adjective,

usually precedes the subject ; eg. O^fl'T^ JlN*l

ttfWnTlN, God saw the man.' '

§ 3. Comparative and Superlative.

Hebrew has no special forms for these, as is natural in
such a primitive and simple language. It expresses them

by certain methods of circumlocution.

(a) Comparison is usually expressed by means of the

preposition |p (' from '), used after the adjective

in the sense of '
more than '
2
e.g. "pT]?p /V"^,
'
great from,' i.e. greater than, '
David.' This
preposition is usually prefixed to the following
noun (always except before the article, when it

1
Certain nouns in Hebrew have a dual, but there is no such form in adjec-

tives : the plural must be used instead. DNlbX, ' God,' usually has a singular
adjective; e.g. Tl DTDX, '
a living God.' (See note on previous vocabulary.)
* 2
Where no definite comparison with another is expressed, fft is not used,
*
Ilis younger son ' is jbpH 133.
 — » '

32 ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS

may appear as "p, with Maqqeph) now Nun :

(like n in many other languages) is a weak letter;

and where it follows a short vowel and carries a
e
quiescent Sh wa, it always drops out in Hebrew,
and is represented by a Dagesh forte in the next
consonant. Just as '
in-movable ' in English
becomes '
zV//movable,' Tn2*3 becomes TITO
so
Before a guttural or Resh, which refuses Dagesh
—p becomes
forte, by compensation 72 ; e.g.

DPniNE than Abraham.'

—
ni!D, «
better
t
—This may be expressed by
t •• '
:

(b) Superlative. the use of

the article ; e.g. |foj?n ^5L, ' his youngest son
(his-son the-young-one).

Or by using the preposition 5-, ' among

in, e.g. '
;

hvCSWl
t •• : • :
p^tlTl
' tt v
ttJ^n.
t • '
'the strongest
° man in
2
Israel.'

Or by using the comparative with 73, ' all' ; e.g.

D^n b^)72 bill, 'greater than all the people'

as the greatest of . . .

B. Adverbs. —These are few in number : the commonest

is IN??, '
very,' which follows the adjective which it qualifies.

It is apparently an accusative of a noun ^Nft, 'strength.'

So it properly = '
to excess.'
* A class of adverbs is formed by adding the suffix

D— ; e.g. D|ll, gratis '

; U12\\ '
by day '
; OJPtf, «
verily.'

VOCABULARY.
good litO great T

bad, evil 3H strong pin

'TT
(fem. nsn) high D1T
* 1
A similar use of JD is found in its use with the Infin. Construct after an

adjective; e.g. Gen. iv. 13, fcO&'ilD ^SV ?)1%> 'my sin is too heavy to bear.'

Cp. 1 Kings xii. 28; Gen. xxxii. 11 ; Ex. xviii. 18; Gen. xviii. 14.
* 2
The Construct case is also used frequently to express a superlative ; e.g.

VJ3 jiDp, '

the youngest of his sons ' ; D^H "1Q2D, '
the choicest of the cities,'
 :

ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS 33

very "THE in 5
not .1* from p
he N*in horse 0*10

she N^n mare HD^lD

T

this (m.) nt hand T (f.)

that, for ^
EXERCISE.
1. Translate into English:

jno^Dn n^-j (2) itrfcttfrrj plan nVn? (1)

ti^rra nvi ptn (4) jpr-tii nyi d^dh (3)
*on (6) : ^ton ^toh mi (5) mn ^n ;

niD^DrrnN
— V
n^
x T
^ (7)
\* /
jrrptnn
'TT-: —
nt^^n
T T •

nbii? (9) jd^idp wn ptn (8) tjntoten

;D^#n
.
T -- iton ;
dw . T (10)
\ /
jtfwra
T . ..
wn
2. Translate into Hebrew
(1) The good horse is strong. (2) The man saw
the mare that it (she) was strong. (3) A very
lofty mountain. (4) The heavens are higher than
the earth. (5) This is the strong horse. (6) This
good horse. (7) He is not better than the
woman. (8) The bad mares are very strong.
(9) He and she are the best of Yisrael. (10)
For a good word is better than a strong hand.
(11) Did the strong man do the evil things ?
34

CHAPTER IX.

PRONOUNS.

A. Personal and Demonstrative Pronouns.

§ I. Personal Pronouns.
The following forms are those of the personal pronouns
when they stand as the subject of a sentence, i.e. in the
nominative case. [Strictly speaking, there are no cases in ' '

Hebrew but the word case is useful to express certain

;
'
'

relations of the noun.] The oblique cases are formed on

quite a different principle, which will be explained later.

Singular. Plural.

ist p. com. I ^t} or We ttfl|fcjW (occas.

• T W2)
2nd p. m. Thou T —
Ye DfiN
f. » J5M \m or rrsriM
<
3rd p. m. He win They DH or TV2T\
<
f. She ^n „ T1271 (after

prefixes |n or ]PT)

< <
f *> * In pause ^N and ^JX- W * In pause UflJg («nj).

W * In pause nfitf.

Remarks.
First Person. —^^ * s commoner than ^3N. The first

personal pronoun is (as in other languages) of common

 ; ;

PRONOUNS 3 5

gender, because there is no need to define the gender of

a person who is speaking.
Second Person. — The Dagesh forte, in both sing, and
plur., points to the fact that each of them had originally

a 3 before the T\ {i.e. they were JHJN, Dfi?N, etc.) ; this

was dropped, just as in the case of |T?, when prefixed to

a word (see Chap. VIII. § 3).
The original form of the fern. sing. V1JN became
^JlN dropped its second vowel but was still pro-
1
this
e
nounced at-t, as shown by the Dagesh forte and Sh wa
in flN.
^ Third Person. — In the Pentateuch 'she' is usually

written as N1H (i.e. K thiv

e
N*n, Q
e
ri W71). This seems
to indicate that the form bWH was originally common in
gender.
§ 2. Demonstrative Pronouns.
(a) This m. Ht {b) That m. fcttH

f. nw f. KVT
These com. H^Sl Those m. n^Jl or OPT
f. run or in

Remarks.
i. These pronouns conform to the same rules as the

adjective with regard to the article ; i.e. they bear when

it,

qualifying, 2
but not when predicative. When a noun is
qualified by both an adjective and a demonstrative, the
former precedes the latter in order
e.g. TVfp litsn t2^«n, '
this good man.'
niton itfWl fcWPT, «
that is the good man.'

2. The article before nftil and HJIl always appears

1
This probably survived longer in North than in South Palestine ; and is
found in what are believed to be narratives from Northern sources, especially in
the Books of Kings.
* 2
When the demonstrative * this ' qualifies a noun with a pronominal
suffix, it is sometimes found without the article ; e.g. PIT )"\21, *
this his word.'
 : ;

36 PRONOUNS

irregularly as — tl ; so HEni! D^ft^n, (

those heavens '

but NVTH min, '

that word.'

3. The feminine .TINT is generally used in Hebrew,

where Greek would use a neuter (toOto) ; Ht?V UNt, c
he
did this.'

* 4. n't is rarely found for JHNt, and /N for J17SI. A

rare secondary form of lit is t7H or nt?n.
* 5. Idiomatic uses of Jit.

(a) It is used indeclinably before numerals; e.g.

D^tp tfttJ Ht, these six years.'

1
(b) It is used as an enclitic to emphasise inter-

rogative or demonstrative words : Pit ^?p, '

who
now ? ' (rfc 7rore) ; ilt'iTO and nN*"P!??, '
what
now . . .
? ' So with Hft7,
X X '
J12I1,
...» and TlFty.
- T

VOCABULARY.
Hlin (f.), law. IttN, he said.

D^JM (plur. of tt^N), men. Ittfj, he sat, dwelt,

D^t!?3 (plur. of »1$N), women. inhabited.

[N,B. — Plur. in 1_
7, though fern.] 7N, unto.
*jf/il, he went. 7JJ, upon, against,
by (near).
EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English:

tfw. n«t ntoy ^ (2) tnt^^n an (o

d^jpjrj (4) :ntn irirrb:? n^ (3) :^nn
diT w
(5) rrrarm
T T ..
rrtD*iDn&
_ ..
cr^on n^n ...

:DflN
v —
D^ » t
N7H -: (6)
v /
Sptm
x x
'
D^'7«nx 2 HfiN
: x - • v:

-bx T?7i
- x '
(8)
\ /
iiittnn
x x ••
d^nto ^n
• x -: x •• • —
nits r?)
\f /

(10) j^D2S "r^ tD^iptrj yiNn

(9) ib^jin
jrfeflN
x — ••
rrtjnx ^•
3
n^rr
V x
d^it^n
x -
•• V
now
- X •

1
i.e. a word which closely follows another word and affects its sense.
2
= Vocative. 8 =the English inverted commas.
 PRONOUNS 37

2. Translate into Hebrew :

(i) Thou art good and he is bad. (2) These are

the strong women. (3) This law is not good.
(4) We are not stronger than this people.
(5) He heard those laws. (6)and thou are
I

evil men. (7) He saw that land, that it was

very good. (8) Thou (f.) art great. (9) He
said unto those men, 'Ye are evil.' (10) Are
these the women ?
 — ;

33

CHAPTER IX.— Continued.

B. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns.
§ i. Relative Pronoun.
There only one relative pronoun, lipy, which
is is in-
variable for all genders, numbers, and cases.
The oblique cases of the relative are formed by peri-
phrases :
'
whom I killed ' is '
who I killed him.' '
To
whom I gave it ' is '
who I gave it to him.' '
The man
whose son was sick ' is '
the man who his son was sick '

(notice a translation of this idiom in Mark i. 7, ov . . .

avTov = whose).
Similarly,
'
the place where ' is '
the place which . . . there/
1
whence ' is '
which . . . from there.'
'
whither ' is '
which . . . thither.'
# NOTES. (a) -
— tp or — US followed by a Dagesh forte

is occasionally found for "lttJN, especially in later

Hebrew. It may be a North Palestinian usage. 1
(b) In poetry the relative is usually omitted.
(c) 1^|}a and ntffcj^ are rare, though ^$$5 is

frequent
(d) In relative clauses which define the time when,
*1tr^ stands alone without addition of any word
like fa ; e.g. ' on the day when ' is . . . Difa

1
The Phoenician relative was probably 'fc^K or 6JW ; but %} with Dagesh forte

was probably used also ; see Wright, Comparative Grammar of the Semitic
Languages, p. 1 19.
 — ' ;

PRONOUNS 39

"Itt5t$ (D<P Construct, see Chap. XIII. § 4. (a)).

Cp. 1 Sam. xx. 31.

§ 2. Interrogative Pronouns.
Who? is *12) :',..,
> indeclinable.
TT71 ^ . '

What A
? is j-jtt
)

NOTES. (a) ^72 is found in the oblique cases ; e.g. ^Tto,

*
daughter of whom ? ' i.e. whose daughter ?

^TlN, whom '

? '
(accusative). ^7, ' to whom ? '

(J?)
7172 is pointed somewhat like the article.

It appears
1. as 7172, followed by Dagesh forte, before
ordinary consonants. 7172 is joined to the next
word by a hyphen (Maqqeph) 1 e.g. TfyTJtt, lit. ;

*
what to thee ? i.e. what is the matter with '

thee?
2. (as 7172 before 71 and n (except as in 3); e.g.

as 7172 before N, #, and 1 ; e.g. PlWrra.

-\.
«J
as 7172 ...
before »1,'
T
H,
T
and'
^T '
3
e.g.
<->
DINH
T T T
ilft,
V '

'
what is man ? '
nto^HEi, '
what did he do ?
'

(c) 7172 is used interjectionally, = how ' !

' e.g. TH^DTlft
'
how great
!

(d) ^72 and 7172 are occasionally used as indefinite

relatives, = '
whosoever, whatsoever'; cp. Judg.
vii. 3.
# Additional notes on Pronouns.
§ 3.

1. The personal pronouns (in the nominative case)

are not infrequently used (standing out of con-
struction, as it were) to give emphasis to a suffix

* 1
Sometimes it is made a part of the word ; e.g. D2?D for DD?"i"ID.

* 2
It is sometimes i"lft before H and PI.
T
* 3
Sometimes also before H, !"l, and ]} with other vowels. Sometimes it is

HO before ordinary consonants, when at a distance from the tone.

40 PRONOUNS
of the same person which precedes, whether that
suffix be attached to a noun, preposition, or
verb. One or two examples will serve to make
this clear. "ON
t i"
^Mt
•
03- KlttL
-: t
Gen. • •• '
xxvii. u^>
34,
1
bless me, even me also, O my father ' ;
^TH^
nribJ'D?. l Kings xxi. 19, 'thy blood, even
thine* \ WW03 ^v?> I Sam. xix. 23, 'upon
him, him also!
2. '
Each,' '
every several one,' in Hebrew are generally
expressed by the use of ttJ'W ; e.g. tfW VF*tP\
nrjJJ ifiHi^NTlN, Gen. xliv. ii, 'and they
took down every man his sack to the ground.'
. ., . VHNT \ BPN . . . (lit.
v
a man, his brother,
Similarly^ *
*

his neighbour) are common expressions to denote

' one the other,' or '
one another '
;
* cp. 1T}S*1
VP1N byte t^N, Gen. 'and they (two) xiii. 11,
separated from one another'; cp. Ex. xxv. 20.
This mode of expression is used even of lifeless
things; eg. of curtains in Ex. xxvi. 3.
3. '
Any one,' some one,' may be also expressed by
'

using 0n$; eg. Gen. xiii. 16, ttfW hlV DM

Y^NIl "^^TlN Hi^p/, '
if any one can number
the dust of the earth.' N7 ttPfcj* followed by the
verb = no ' one shall . . .' ; e.g. Gen. xxiii. 6
(and freq.).

73 . . . frO is a very common way of expressing

a strong negative = '
none whatever.' So "N7
IIT^D Tf©P *h%\ Jer. xxxii. 17=' nothing
shall be too hard for thee {not everything shall '
'

not be too hard for thee ') cp. the Hebraistic ;

ov/c av icrooOr) iracra crap%, meaning no flesh '

would have been saved,' Matt. xxiv. 22.

fnnins . . . nm.
1
The corresponding feminines are
-J
Jj^yZ
 :

PRONOUNS 41

§ 4. The Perfect (Active) of the ordinary verb is as

follows
Plur.

3rd p. m. 7^JJ, he killed, ( ^tpjj, they killed.

f.
H^PjJ, she killed.

2nd p. m. ij7^)J, thou didst kill. ttf^Bj?, ye killed.

f.
P?eiji thou didst kill. ]Jr?W> ye killed.

1st p. c. VPglg, I killed. OTBp, we killed.

(Note the dropping of the in the 2nd p. plur., the —

accent being on the ultimate syllable.)
N.B. —
The usual order of words is (1) predicate,
(2) subject, (3) object.

VOCABULARY.
7, to {prefixed), •~f?^> why?
"iv, to him. OT> (
m - pl ur -)> water.

Oltf, there. DV (m.) day.

Dtkftp, from there, thence. |r0, he gave.

•TOttJ,' thither.
T T

EXERCISE,
i. Translate into English:

(2)
\ /
:rre>tin^S
TT nt^^n
XT T T
an ^ (o
M^n :: — T
\ * l
• /

*r\EN nn (3) :Dtt5 11^ ittJw \nNn l"»*tf

-nw Diwstf
v -
*& naST T
:
(4) snann
T
: X
a^arr
X — \ r' •• •

roVn -itp« y^n nat (5) :n^n rnimn

^ (7)
\/
:ntn
V -/
tfwn
T
^ ntoy
XX nn (6) :hd^
XX • >• '

v —. v : - x \ / • : - t v -: • T

n$*$ y-wn nrrto r? OFr^fc} K7q ( 9) : jtjen

s^inn
-
Divi
- ^iin-n^
T — (10)
\ y
:ofe
T
DMbrr
v:--: •

:n«V ^rox ^S (11)/: • : \

 :

42 PRONOUNS
2. Translate into Hebrew
(i) Who are ye? we are strong men and good.
(2) To whom did that woman give the water?
(3) We inhabited the land where we heard
those laws. (4) What is stronger than a good
word? (5) good thou art, O woman.
How
(6) This is the word which ye said to him.
(7) Which is the land whence ye went ? (8)
Why did they not kill those evil men ? (9) Who
am I, that thou (fern.) hast said this? (10) This
is the day (on) which we gave him this law.
 ;

43

CHAPTER X.

THE INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS AND THE

COPULA.

§ I. Inseparable Prepositions.
Si, in, on, with (of circumstance or instrument).

5, like, about.

7, to, for.
These, like all other prepositions in Hebrew, were originally
nouns ; but they have became reduced to parasitic forms,
prefixed to nouns and verbal nouns.
Rules for pointing.
(a) Ordinarily they take simple vocal She wa ; e.g.

B^N?, '
to a man.'
(b) Before another vocal Sh e wa they take Hireq for ;

e
since two vocal Sh was can never come together,
the preposition in such a case needs the full short
vowel which it originally had and which is else-

where weakened into vocal Sh e wa e.g. ; "O^,

1
by the word of (see Chap. IV. A. §
. .
.'
3).

(c) But before ^ 'the Hireq coalesces with the ^ to

e
make long Hireq, and the Sh wa disappears
eg. iim/l '
Jericho ' ; ^ftn^i '
to J.'

[Note. —The same rule applies to ]12 when pre-

fixed. 'From Jericho' is properly "irfH/Jft but ;

as Hebrew omitted Dagesh forte in ^ (see Chap.

V. § 3, Rem. 3), this became VTH^ = IrTnfO.]

 ;

44 INSEPARABLE PROPOSITIONS AND COPULA

(d) Before a Hateph Sh e wa they take the corre-

sponding full vowel (see rule in Chap. IV. A.
§ 2) ; e.g. ntftJI, '
like as, when.'
* (e) When the accent falls on the syllable immedi-
ately following the preposition, the latter is often
pointed with — (see note below).

(/) The H of the article disappears after these

prepositions, and the latter take its vowel ; e.g.

t2Wn7, ' to the man,' always becomes ttPfcw.

'
In the heavens '
is O^ft&S..

§ 2. The Capula 1. The copula follows much the same

rules as 1, 3, and 7.

(a) It is ordinarily But as it is a labial, it\

cannot stand with a Sh e wa before another labial
sound : it always becomes 1 before 2, \ to, or D
e.g. ti^rrc^l, '
and from the man.'
(J?)
Before another vocal Sh e wa it becomes *) ; e.g.

"I1TI, '
and the word of.'

(c) Before it is ^.
"J

(d) Before a Hateph it takes the corresponding full

vowel.
* (e) Before the accent it is often \
(/") It does not absorb the H of the article ; e.g.

ttTNPn,
T **
l
and the man.'
Thus it differs from the prepositions in (b), (/),
and partly in (a).

§ 3. Additional notes.
(a) The Divine Names.

Before DVT^N, ' God,' 1, D, S, and 1 take T , accord-

ing to rule (d). But — Si— contracts into — «

so we have D^il vfrO, and God.' * The '

sacred
name HIPP was regarded by the Hebrews as too

1
Similarity "lfotA, 'to say,' becomes "ib&O, which is used to mean 'saying'

(English participle).
 ' ;

INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS AND COPULA 45

sacred to pronounce. Originally it was probably

TirX! (Jahweh), interpreted as
'
He (who) is,' see
Ex. iii. 14. Whenever it occurred in the text,
the word tflfcj,
1 ' my Lord/ was read instead of
it ; so the Massoretes wrote mrP with the vowels
of ^'IN (the Hateph Pathah appearing as simple
e
Sh wa under *•) i.e. PfiiT ; and from that we get
'Jehovah/ which is certainly an incorrect form.

When 1, 3, b, or 1 comes before *0'"IN they make

the N quiescent, and so we have ^'""Ffcv?, etc.

Hence when written before mrP they take a

Pathah, and we have nitTI, nifP;? (with no
Sh e \va under the *•).

* Note on rules (e) above.

(J>)

We have T> and 1, especially when a disjunctive

accent, such as 'Athnah or Silluq, appears in
2
the next syllable ; e.g. Gen. iii. 5 :
STJJ litO J?l\
v also stands before the tone syllable
1. with the Infln. Construct of 3 D, ^ D, 1 #, and
double V verbs : DUiib, D*)p7, etc.

2. in certain expressions commonly used as adverbs ;

'
e.g. T^/' to eternity.' Cp. also such combinations
as nD7 HE.

3. in the interrogative TTfo; (so before all con-

sonants except gutturals) or tlft; (so before
gutturals).

1 and 2 only take — before the demonstratives

e.g. JTO., ' here '
; MNte, '
tnus -'
Before the inter-
rogative they take — and Dagesh forte ; eg.
HEft. or ITOSL, 'whereby?' and HIS?, 'how
many?
* l
Plural of Majesty, with — instead of — , to distinguish it from ^'"IX,

which was used to human superiors.

2 —1 occurs especially in giving lists of things which fall into pairs.
46 INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS AND COPULA

VOCABULARY.
*HN, lion. ^9$ he watched, kept.

^V. (m.), poverty, -Hr, he killed,

affliction. ^itVO, saying.

^7?P (m.), king. *^p (Imperative m.), kill

]1 (m.), son. thou ( = 3111).

nil (f.), daughter. "*^N, say thou.

0?5$> two (with masc. "^^5, as, when.

nouns). -ty (prep.) as far as.

h yftW, he hearkened to. llTNl 1JT, until when.

n|27, he took.

* ?0p, though a convenient word for paradigms, is not used in the best
Hebrew. It may be compared with the tutttio of Greek grammars.

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English:

:n^n D^tr^n
t _ t
nm ^]h^ ito
—
1
^iat tibrt (i

m« v •• t • t v v — v.
'
: :

(3) : p«i nnS n#N ft jnj D^rr^i (

2)

(4)
\-r/ PiM.-. ^ r^i
•-:- ont: Svrat nn«t- nim
.
t
?
—
1

:YiNrrnN
v x x
1 v
^pbx iira-iy
v -
*mt^
- t
^tirwi
—T ': -: :

x •• t • t -: t v -: v - • t •.•: w/
;-T •hwi
*o:nn _; _ (7)
\/ / .
tm'ttirmN
T - ...
^ya
^inttf
:-t
T. T (6)
x / •

drw D^jn i^n 8

nir)£fi (8) :mtn yiNn
ma
_T (9)
v J
pmnN
:_T '
ittJ«-nN
vv :
Dwnttf
v: nS na^itt: :

: 1
l

V^msi
Ivtt oyn
tt *at^t (10)
> /
:*wt
:
^^ •
*inEN
:-t ^
': t •— t •

1
= Prince. 2
= Jerusalem. 3 = Pharaoh.
 :

INSEPARABLE PREPOSITIONS AND COPULA 47

2. Translate into Hebrew (keeping the English order

of words)

(1) And in that day ye did not hearken unto God.

(2) He is the king, and son am I and daughter
art thou to him. (3)And keep thou this law,
which he gave. (4) And from there he went to
Jerusalem, and there he dwelt. (5) I hearkened
to the Lord in affliction. (6) And say thou to
these men, Good and strong are ye.'
'
(7) Did
he not do according to what he had heard ?
(8) And from Jerusalem I went thither, I and
two men. (9) What did he say to those two
men? 1 (10) And Pharaoh spake to the woman,
'
saying, Wherefore didst thou not keep the law ?
*

1
Put the numeral before the noun, and the article with the noun only.
 —

43

CHAPTER XI.

PREPOSITIONS WITH SINGULAR SUFFIXES.

§ I. It has already been noticed that there are, strictly

speaking, no cases in Hebrew. The objective me, thee,'
etc. after prepositions, and the subjective '
my, thy,' etc.

with nouns, are expressed by suffixes attached to the

prepositions and nouns. Thus "iv = '
to him'; iD^lD = '
his
horse.' This chapter deals with those prepositions which
take suffixes similar to those attached to singular nouns.
These suffixes bear a resemblance to the forms of the
personal pronouns (nominative). They are as follows:

St '.ngular. Plural.

1st pers. c.
1 12-
T

2nd pers. m. *- D 5—

3rd pers. m.
f.
V
i—
1?-
DH —
<

<
after a vowel D—
; aftera
consonant.
f. n- T lv » » > |~ »

Note (1) the Mappiq in the H of the 3rd fern, sing.,

to denote that the H is not quiescent but is

a guttural [i.e. is sounded).

(2) that in 05 — >

]5 — >
^0 — »
P *
tne accent 1S on
the ultimate, but in 12— on the penultimate.
J

§ 2. The following table gives the declension of 7, '

to ;

Dy, '
with ' ; ilSl, '
with ' ; and fiN, the sign of the accusative.
 .

PREPOSITIONS WITH SINGULAR SUFFIXES 49

Singular.
1st p. c. V, to me. ^y (c
\ with me, ^T\\& "TIN, m e.
2nd p. m. ?p w to thee. q^yw, etc. W?M TI^^ (/) thee.

w
, ,

f.
* etc.,

in DS?
as 5|£k

3rd p. m. V7, to him. toy except in in^, him.

2nd p. plur.

f. P17, to her. pray.

T •
nn^,
X '
her.

Plural.

1st p. c. 127. to us.

T » T ^nfc,
X '
us.

2nd p. m. Q57^, to you. E^PN D5rM (ir)

you.
V X •
,

f.
^f\ jpja^ 15^n
dJw>
3rd p. m. DilW
T
to t hem.
V ' x •
riN
x
(/,)
,
'
them.
1
ft ?*-
f. |jnfc<*>.
i»y-

7V<?/<? the Da^ <*eshforte throughout.

(«) * pause 7p. W * A longer form *HE>y

T
is (/) * pause !jnk.

—
• •
T
W Note the frequently found. <^ Note — in pen-
T
W * pause 7]fcy.
ult. This syllable is

W Note the — T
half -open 1
and so
must be short, as the
accent is on the ulti-
mate.
<*> * rarely DWWi
inns.

H is declined like v, except that the 3rd p. masc. plur.

<

I
is usually D!l, and fern. "[JlS, (note — ).

1
A half-open syllable is one that is neither closed nor open, but half-way
between the two. E^nX is neither D3 J")X nor D3H X. The vowel in the

penultimate is shortened, as would be necessary in D3 fix ; but the division of

the syllables is slurred over, and the 3 follows the D so closely that it receives
its softer sound (without dagesh).
 — :

50 PREPOSITIONS WITH SINGULAR SUFFIXES

(For the declension of 5 and Jft, which also take singu-

lar suffixes, see Chapter XXV.)

* NOTES. (i) In poetry to7 is sometimes found for

DHT', and probably also for t7.

(2) The accus. pronouns prW, etc are sometimes

used to mean ' with (me, etc.),' for ^lljjt, etc.,

especially in the books of Kings.

VOCABULARY.
tltil, to trust. # 7ip (m.), voice.

^5J, to remember. # "V^ (f.), city.

*"H^ (m.), child, small boy.

* It is convenient to give Hebrew verbs in the 3rd p. m. sing. Perfect Active

(Qal), and their English equivalents in the Infinitive.

EXERCISE.
1. Translate into English:

v t • • : - X ••
V T - T v *

D^NH
•t-:t v- D^l
vht ^M3t N7 (2)/ P7 DfiN -t v. •

wnw
:

rrttb (3) :DfiN TO?n -ltTN-ry

rtTj d^N ''^nottJ (4) :tt| d/ide? «?
onS w^ 1
(5) : N*irrn d^s vifo djvot
rra? (6) :nn^ rot *b\ mtn mifirrnN
mtjdn itifcji n-jn tmtttin ]pDtf s
^^
:o:n ^iron ^ ^ n^ ^rroN (7) :^
nto«b on?
v t
wii)
- t • :
*\ti«
v
-:
n^Mn • t -: t
;ron
T •• (8)
\ /

totp ijjn tonfo iS] (9) snipt rvya tihri

i^fy&n
—
'
yh *b ini
...
T T (10)
\ /
... '
;
«
:mn « — tfwrra
T • ••

2. Translate into Hebrew

(i) Say him that thou hast heard him. (2) And
to
in that day we remembered you (plur.). (3)
1
=vom.
PREPOSITIONS WITH SINGULAR SUFFIXES 51

They went with me, as I told them (said to

them). (4) Say to this woman, '
I have hear-
kened to thee, for I have kept thee.' (5) And
what did he do to her when she went to that
city ? (6) This is man who did
the great things l

for us, and in whom we trusted. (7) And (it

was) I (that) gave thee this child. (8) Ye did
not trust in me, and did not remember me.
(9) Say thou to them, Did ye go from Jeru- '

salem with him?' 2

(10) What have I to do
with thee ? (Say what to me and to thee ').
'

(11) They are greater who are with you, than

(they) who are with them.
1
Fem. 3 and he with you.'
plur. Say '
 ;

5*

CHATTER XII.

SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES.

Unchangeable and First Declension Nouns.

§ I. The '
regular ' nouns in Hebrew may be grouped
in two classes :

(a) those of which the vowels are unaffected by pro-

noun suffixes ; e.g. D^lD, '
horse ' ; "HS.?, '
mighty
man '

(J?)
three classes or declensions, which alter their
vowels with suffixes.
In this chapter we are dealing with unchangeable nouns,
and with the first declension of changeable nouns.
§ 2. Before giving the suffixes, it is necessary to say
something about the form of first declension nouns. They
are usually disyllables, which contain — in either syllable or
in both ; e.g. "Q^l, '
word, thing '
; 217, '
heart/ A few
monosyllables with — may be classed with these ; e.g. T,
' hand/
Vowel changes in first declension.
It has already been noticed (in Chap. VIII. § i) that

— and — usually cannot stand more than one place away

from the accented or '
tone ' syllable, which is always
either the last (ultimate) or last but one (penultimate).
To understand the reason of this, we must go back
behind the present forms of words like ^1*1 and 22;? to
their more primitive forms. — (a) nearly always, and —
usually, are the result of lengthening primitive a and i for
 , ;

SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES 53

rhythmical reasons ; that is, technically speaking, they are

4 1
tone-long.'

Thus ""D*! was originally ^l* ! 1

J ^?? was ^e?- The
tone-lengthening of these two vowels only occurs in the
ultimate (when closed and accented), and in the penultimate
(when open). 2 Now in such forms as O^Tl, '
words/ and
t
H3ft word/ the first
f
* his is no longer in the pen- —
ultimate, and therefore cannot be lengthened. But when
the second
<
— , now in the penultimate, was lengthened,
lD'HII, i^ll became
and t^OT, because is now D^ll —
in an open, unaccented syllable and must disappear. Hence
we may formulate the rule a noun, which has tone-long :

— or — in the penultimate, replaces this by vocal Sh e wa

when it takes an accented suffix}
[ — and — are tone-long in the great majority of cases.
The chief exception a class of words which — or —
is in
has been lengthened by compensation before a guttural or
Resh; e.g. tth§ for (ttfag), 'horseman'; plur. ENjhB (the

first — is «
fixed ') : so tthll (for tthPl), ' deaf.']

§ 3. The pronoun suffixes of singular nouns closely

resemble those attached to the prepositions given in the
last chapter : but the 2nd p. f. sing, has ^— (not TJ— ); and j

II the 1st p. c. plur. *0— (not ^— ).

Feminine nouns in H— take the same suffixes as mas-

culine nouns. But as this H— was originally H— , they
change the II — into T\ — with suffixes ; e.g. HD^lD, '
mare '

iriD^lD, '
his mare/

1
i.e. the lengthening is due to the ictus of the accent. Primitive a became
o in later Hebrew. — , when long by nature, and not tone-long, is usually con-

tracted from *—-, and mostly appears as s —

2
The penultimate cannot be short and open unless it bears an accent ; e.g.

!J?D (me-lek).
3
This principle is explained at length in Professor Kennett's Notes on the
Hebrew Vowel-system, Appendix J.
4
All pronoun suffixes are accented.
 54 SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES

Singular noun. D^ID "91 HD^D 't t :

' '

'
horse
'
1
word '
'
mare '
righteousness

1st p. c. my WD '
T -
VOID
• r •
't •
2nd p. m. thy TTP^D'' TBf* (etc.) (etc. as HD1D)
f. IfO^D (etc.)

3rd p. m. his tolD

f. her
T

Plural.
1st p. c. our ^DID
2nd p. m. your d5p*id D5131 MtfDID
f. RO^D 13151 {DflDIP
3rd p. m. their
T t t : T T
f.
JD1D rm •jno^D

<<*> * pause '*' * pause

^D^lD.
vt :

Remarks.
1. Before the suffixes DI3 — and p— » a preceding —
always reverts to the original *•£"• D?^.?*! an d the — , J

penultimate syllable is half-open, i.e. the word is half-way

between d e var-kem and d e va-r e khem.' 1
' ' '

2. In a word like np*T?, beginning with a vocal She wa,

the dropping of the first — would leave us with two vocal
e
Sh was together hence the full vowel : appears in place —
of the first Sh wa (see above, Chap. IV. A. § 3). 2
e

3. The suffix i ('his') was originally ^H— — which ,

became *)— =\
4. Adjectives attached to nouns with suffixes always

1
DT'OI was once apparently DlD")^. It is (presumably) owing to the

heavy DID— that the word retained 2 instead of lengthening to 2.

2
The word was originally T\\T1^ (probably) : this became, with suffixes,

DplV (the first — being thinned down to — in rapid pronunciation).

 ;

SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES 55

have the definite article ; e.g. litSJl ^DID = my ' good

horse.'
Demonstratives, when used to qualify a noun with a
suffix, sometimes take the article, sometimes omit it e.g. ;

Ht ^35,, 'this our son' (Deut. xxii. 1).

5. A noun with a pronoun suffix never has the article.

^D^lDn is as impossible in Hebrew as '

the my horse ' is

in English.

§Old accusative termination H— } This remains,

4.

in Hebrew, most commonly to express direction towards e.g. ;

*?na, 'Babylon'; rh%1i.? 'to Babylon.' So HUTO ?, 'to

<

Lachish 7
miUl.
'
TT T
; to the mountain.' '
'

* Its locative sense may perhaps be traced in the word

TyTH (masc), '
night,' which is a strengthened form of the

poetical word vyj. So probably TTThT\, '

God forbid.'
* 5. certain
§ A number of nouns and adjectives, having
—
T
in the ultimate, double their final letter before suffixes,

and consequently shorten ~ to — ; e.g.

*?M, '
camel ' ;
plur. D^M, V^J, etc.

ntpip, ' confidence '

; with suff. ^nttltt (H virtually
doubled).
jBg, TOgf. '
small '
; fern.

Adjectives having holem for their second vowel usually

modify it before suffixes, i often becomes 1 ; e.g. pW^,
sweety f. n^np. *
— becomes — followed by Dagesh f.

eg. DTjJ, '

naked,' f. HEW.
1
To be distinguished from the feminine term. H — , as the latter is always
accented, and the former very seldom. For other remains of old case endings
in Hebrew, see Appendix H.
* 2
If this suffix is attached to a word like D^"l¥D, Egypt, the word must
undergo some slight modification to obviate a short vowel coming in an open
unaccented syllable : ilDHVD being impossible, we must write HEHVE. So
with a word like 1T2 : 'he went home' is nn 2 s
TlSl, the short Hireq, which
is in this case a helping vowel, being dropped.
 : ; ; ; ; '

56 SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES

* § 6. Some first declension nouns have Dagesh forte in
the second root-letter (cp. the Pi'el Infin.) e.g. 7*N, a stag.' ;
'

The commonest of these are nouns that denote skill

e.g. ItlB, <a cook'; tthB, 'a horseman' (for ttfa§); 22?,
'
a thief.'
#
§ 7. Gender of nouns. gender of nouns is — The
usually obvious but sometimes it must be learned by
;

observation. The following rules will be found useful.

Nouns are usually feminine which
(a) are names of cities and countries (considered as
the mothers of their inhabitants)

(J?)
denote parts of the body, especially such as go
in pairs ; e.g. *"P, '
hand '
; 70H, '
foot '

(c) denote useful implements ; e.g. l^tl, *

sword
(cp. our English use of '
she ' for boats, etc.)
(d) denote elements which may be considered pro-
ductive ; e.g. rPH, '
spirit ' ; Y"JN, '
earth.'

VOCABULARY.
tTN'l (m.), head. fcWJ, prophet.
Ul (m.), blood. ^?P> command.
PPP (f.), breath, spirit. *^j7?£> righteousness.

117 (m.), heart.

^T^ blessing, present.
BS?fa (m.), judgment. nW (m.), night.

(m.), iniquity. [Note gender.]

\ty

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English

prnifiTiN *\b} ^bvb ^??*7 5^3* (0

ji^ip-i onyftp 13 irmif dA xhr\ (2)

•$rtg h^ (4) :ttQrp» nnjji? rWni (3)

^stttos arh nvy (5) sijtfNhn toi r?

tibn
_ arm ?
... • -
1

r
*n— nraS
T T
(6)
v '
:Dtf»
T~.
7i-rn
T
13
•
 :

SINGULAR NOUN SUFFIXES $7

^bttb q*raA
— '
nbN
: : • •':
(?)
\» /
:imi5
x
nib
v v
ntoy
:x x•

tt - x:-- \ / ' -: xt -:

tin TOiii
x - x :
tih rush
x r
-\en
- T
*wn wnarrnN
x — I •

1
rrtoy (10) : ttjrjjpp'nfcji t] ? nanj (9) pnjs?
jjnn
-x
D«^i3
t
i^ ton
- t
nti«s
• v -: -:
^ •

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) This is his commandment about (7^) thine
iniquity. (2) My law is in your heart. (3) Ye
heard our voice in that night. (4) They
remembered her righteousness. (5) Your judg-
ment is good. (6) Their blood (be) on (1)
their head. (7) His good spirit is over the
earth. (8) Thy (fern.) blessing is mine (to me),
for Ihave kept thy commandment. (9) Why
didst thou not hearken to our word? (10) She
remembered her (11) Did
iniquity in affliction.
not your great prophet give us his present ?
 58

CHAPTER XIII.

THE CONSTRUCT CASE

§ I. Hebrew expresses the genitival relation differently

to Aryan languages. We say the-son of-the-king,' putting
'

1
the-son ' absolutely, and '
the-king in the dependent case,
'

the genitive. But the Hebrew regarded 'the-king' as the

emphatic person in such an expression, and put it absolutely ;

while the-son-of/ being dependent on the king, became

'

subordinate, and was put in the construct case 1 (i.e. in ' '

construction with the absolute). Thus in a genitival

relation, it is the first part that alters in Hebrew, not the
m
second. '
The-word-of the-man ' is IPNn S2r\ ("\y! con-
struct, ttTWn absolute).
§ 2. The construct, being less emphatic, was hurried over
in pronunciation, while the absolute took the emphasis.
The construct case of any noun is, in general, the primitive

form of the noun pronounced rapidly : e.g. "*Q^, constr.

But as the beginner needs more definite guidance to

he should learn the following rules
arrive at the construct,
(remembering that they are merely abstract, and that the
Hebrew word never actually went through these various
stages).

A. (i) Tone-long — and — in the penultimate are

e
replaced by Sh wa.

1
The construct case does not necessarily denote a genitival relation ; see
§3. (/) below.
 ;

THE CONSTRUCT CASE 59

(2) Tone-long — and

ultimate are usually — in the
"Q"
shortened; eg. by (1) "Q"! becomes ! and 7
;

by (2) *\1%
No other vowels but these two are affected in the
construct. 1

B. In the feminines in II —T ,
'
the H—
T
reverts to the

primitive Jl— ; e.g. HjTl?, constr. (i"lj77? im-

possible) rijrj?.

Plurals in D^— (and duals in D^t ) change

-
these
terminations into *' — in the construct;

e.g. D'Hl'l, constr. I'JFJ.

D^i, constr. "Oil ('sons of').

§ 3. (#) The Construct never takes tJie Article. Where —

it is definite, this is sometimes expressed by
putting the definite article with the absolute
e.g. ilftrnftn ttTN, '
the man of war, warrior/
(ti) The construct immediately followed by the
is

absolute ; no word may intervene. Therefore an

adjective qualifying the construct must follow
the absolute; *
e.g.
O h^lXl
T -
rwrhftTl
T T — I •
tf*N.*
•
< the
great warrior.'
(c) Two co-ordinated constructs are not put in de-
pendence on one absolute ; e.g. '
he killed the
sons and daughters of the man ' is not T\T\
tir^n rfoyi ^n**, but tfwn ^tin x\n
VrfOlTlNV
t v : .
' the sons of the man and his

daughters ' (note that TIN is repeated).

{d) One construct is not, as a rule, attached to two
absolutes ; but the construct repeated with the
is

second absolute ; e.g. *

the God of heaven and
earth' is Y^H TT^NI D^^H W^N. 2

* Except in nouns from 7\"h and \"y or i"y verbs

> ; see Chaps. XXXIII.
and XXXIV.
2
The construct is usually repeated, unless the two absolutes are regarded as
one expression.
 ';

Go THE CONSTRUCT CASE

(r) Hebrew largely makes up for the paucity of its

adjectives by the use of the construct; and even

where an adjective exists, the Hebrew idiom
often one noun in construction
prefers to use
with another rather than an adjective and noun
e.g. '
my holy hill ' is '•ttJ^g ^H, '
the-hill-of my-
holiness ' ;
(cp. 6 Kpijrjs tt)? aSt/a'a?, '
the un-
righteous judge/ Luke xvi. 8 ; cp. also Jas. i. 25
and ii. 4).
# Particularly useful, in this connexion, are ti^W
('man of . . .'),
|| ('son of . . .'), and h%l
('master of . .
.
') ; cp. D^nrTT tt^N, 'eloquent
man,' Ex. iv. 10. DV2 ]1 (son-of death), '
worthy
to die/ 1 Sam. xx. 31.
#
(/) Adjectives are found in construction with nouns ;

cp. -^rrnp^ '

beautiful of form '
; D^EL iJflT^
*
torn -of garments/ i.e. with rent garments,
2 Kings xviii. 37, etc. Cp. also such phrases
as D^n ^Jrt^N, '
the poor of the people ' = the
poor people.
# Prepositions in nouns used Hebrew were originally
(g)
in the construct, of which the absolute form has
dropped out of use. But we find some nouns,
which are very common in the absolute, used
in the construct with the force of prepositions.
These are rPl^at the house of (French
1
chez '), or '
to the house of . . .' ; HJ1Q, '
at

(or 'to') the door of; TVT, 'the way of' =

towards.
# (//.) Many place names contain a noun in the con-
struct; e.g. Bethlehem ('house of
OrnrP!ll,
bread'). The adjective formed regularly from
this is ^On^rPSl, '
a Bethlehemite.' But since the
construct may never take the article, '
the Bethle-
hemite' is not ^n^r-irT, but ^vhri r\%
 1;

THE CONSTRUCT CASE 6

So ^«r» n% '
the Bethelite,' etc.; cp. WWjl J|,
1
the Benjamite.'
# (2) Compound expressions containing a noun in the
construct often turn both parts into the plural
when used in the plural ; e.g. s*T\T\
m
W J
' the
captain of the host ' ;
pi. QY^nn ^ito, '
captains
of the host.'
# Extended uses of the Construct.
§ 4.

(a) The construct is sometimes used Kara avveaiv,

where a following substantival clause, introduced
by the relative, stands instead of the absolute
e.g. ItpN CipftSL, in the place where . . .'

IttJfc) QV!L, '

on the day when . .
.'

Sometimes it is used abnormally before preposi-

tions ; e.g. "V?jj5. riTOtp, the joy in harvest/
(b) The construct sometimes represents an objective
genitive; e.g. DID T\pV\ = '
the cry about Sodom.'
(c) The extended construct is a name given to
' '
it,

when we have two constructs, in apposition to

each other, before one absolute ; cp. 1 Sam.
xxviii. 7, liN fV?3£l tlMto, lit. <a woman-of,
possessor-of, a soothsaying spirit'; cp. 2 Kings
x. 6.

VOCABULARY.
7i) or — 75, all, every. ft% (m.), house. Constr.

Construct noun = ' totality of . .

.'
J"^. With SUiT. WSi.
Hence unchangeable
h with fern., etc. *»»»s^ / 1 x r
D^?Q (m. plur.), face.

I0VO, a little, few.

D. (m -)> sea (P lur -
D ^_).
Jl !
edge.
Also a construct noun. ?? (Q» «*P,
O50> wise.
DW (plur. of DV), days. VtDj£, he will kill.

D^2L (plur. of JSl), sons.

typ., they (m.) will kill.

TY\yi (plur. of ]"Q), daughters. *TC?{7, to stand.

 :

62 THE CONSTRUCT CASE

EXERCISES.
1. Give the constructs of:

• - T *
T * T TTt
— d^n — ri— D^*»i2— nnS— mra— •aTE
• t -: I
•• • • : t •• t: • ' v v

t t ~:

2. Translate into Hebrew

(i) A few women are better than all the men of
that land. (2)They killed all the wise men of
this city. (3) The God of all the earth is with
you. (4) The word and command of the king
are good. (5) This is command
the of the
wise men of God. (6) These commands of our
prophet are wise, O children (sons) of Israel.
(7) They will keep all the words of the law of
the Lord, and of the prophets of Israel, in their
heart. (8) Ye dwelt on the edge of the sea
(for) a few days. (9) In the days of affliction the
daughters of Israel remembered me. (10) He
beheld the face of the king in those days.
(11) He dwelt (in) the house of that man, and
the sons of the prophets with him. (12) The
heavens of the heavens are the Lord's (to the
Lord). (13) They are men of blood, for they
have slain the king's sons.
 63

CHAPTER XIV.

PLURAL SUFFIXES WITH NOUNS AND

PREPOSITIONS.

A. Nouns,
§ I. The singular and plural suffixes, as attached to
plural nouns (his horses, their horses, etc.) resemble in
form those attached to singular nouns but they differ ;

(broadly speaking) by the insertion of * before the charac-

teristic termination.

Masculine plurals in CT— substitute for it the suffix

—
;

but feminine plurals in T\S add the suffix after it, as the
Jl — is part of the feminine stem.

<

§2. Singular ist p. c. "^D

<
2nd p. m. T£*lD (etc.) (etc.)

f. IfJ&D
<

3rd p. m. VD^D
f. itdid

Plural ist p. c. ^D^D

<
2nd p. m. DJ^DID D^OT
f. J^DID
<

3rd p. m. DrPD^D Drmii

f. pT»D1D
 ''

64 PLURAL SUFFIXES WITH

§ 3. Remarks.
1. Of the disyllabic suffixes, all are Might' (i.e. accented
on the penultimate) except the last four, which are '
heavy
(i.e. accented on the ultimate). Consequently in these four
the —t
in — ^21 t :
cannot stand, and the '
1 takes a full vowel

(pySfl becoming MW). 1

2. V— in the 3rd p. m. sing, is pronounced like the

ow in '
how.'

§ 4. Duals. The dual is not very common in Hebrew,

and is confined to nouns. It is only used, as a rule, to
2
denote a pair of things, e.g. hands, feet, eyes. The dual
is formed by adding 0^.— to the singular stem ; eg. '
lips
3
is D^riErtp (not DTnD£>).
Duals take the same pronoun suffixes as plurals, drop-

ping the D"]— ; e.g. VT, his hands.'

B. Prepositions.
The following prepositions (among others) take the
suffixes of plural stems.

*?N, '
unto.' by, <
upon, by 'nH^,
(of place), against.' ' after.'

J?&
Sing. 1st p. c. *n •nrjN

2nd p. m. T$# etc. etc.

f. T.*?N

3rd p. m. t»f?M
T **

f. n^^
1 Strictly speaking, WHUjn is developed straight out of the primitive WH^I.
The first syllable is half-open, i.e. neither open nor shut but half-way between
' div-reykhem and 'di-vreykhem.'
'

* 2
These words sometimes bear a different (or extended) meaning when
used in the plural ; e.g. fy,
'
eye ' ; dual, D^JJ, ' eyes ' ; plur. Hiry, ' foun-

tains.' So D^T, 'hands'; ffiT, 'directions' (points of the compass).

3
WOW ('heavens') and D^D ('water') are probably not duals, but plurals

with D1 — for D s
— . Cp. the usual Massoretic pointing of 'Jerusalem,'
 ;

NOUNS AND PREPOSITIONS 65

Plur. 1st p. c. ^M
2nd p. m. D 5^ DI^S
f. )$*h$ etc.

3rd p. m. ^&b^
f. JIT?**

Remarks.
1. T>N and T>y lengthen the short vowel with suffixes.
It naturally becomes a Hateph vowel in the last four forms.

2 -
^D^ is properly a plural noun construct (' the
after-parts of . . .').

3. The preposition V%> '

between,' usually takes sing,
suffixes with sing, pronouns, and plur. suffixes with plur.
pronouns. It is repeated with each pronoun * (or noun)
e.g. '
between thee and them ' is DH^p^ ^1^5- The — is

' fixed ' in OrY^S., etc., for *— is always long by nature.

VOCABULARY.
TV, go down. pi, between,

put out. ^'ls face

)> before him.
rntl?, send, *^3? • ( t0

*1T1> pursue. ^ipft (

m 0> pl ace «

^.D*?, after.

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English:

ntn
t t (2)
\ /
:mnN ^bn
t-: - : t
nttfN
v -:
vuh\A
t t —!
n^«
v
rn •• \ /

*iwhti (3) j TOa rh:n lae-nwi vntoi ^btin

:T0?tp rrtyprnM r^pt^ (4) *T^b "h^n
zyby (6) itpba wrf 13 vt^n wrvb& ro
v : — : t t v' / •• t : t

* * Or in the case of nouns it may be followed by ?, e.g. &u? D^D ^S,

'between waters and waters.'
 :

66 NOUNS AND PREPOSITIONS

qfewi
':•:•- D-n
t t (9)
\-'/ jotf
t
rprtti>
tv :
itrw
v -:
n^pn
t ' :

von
tt
vrayt :
(10)
^ ' -tt v:dS
jw-Sid tt:
\rvrcy
- t
itf« • :
•.•-:

2. Translate into Hebrew

(i) Ye stood before them. (2) She put out her
hands before her. (3) He heard your words, but
(and) your face he did not see. (4) They gave
their presents unto them. (5) Thy laws are in
my heart, my God. (6) Thou (fern.) hast kept
the words of my lips, and thy daughters have
not gone after that-which-is-evil (fern, sing.)
before me. (7) The sons and daughters of the
king went down against (7V) us and against
them. (8) Thy hands are strong upon me all
my days. (9) She stood between thee and us
(10) Her daughters went down after her, and
their children's (sons') children with them. (11)
He will pursue after them, and a few men with
him. (12) We gave him into (3.) the hand of
our prophets.
 ;
'

67

CHAPTER XV.

A. Tenses— Perfect Qal— Statives,

§ I. Tenses. must be clearly recognised, at the
It

outset, that Hebrew has no tenses in the English sense

'
'

of the word. In considering an action they had regard,

not so much to its time, as to the question whether it was
completed or not. Hence the verb is put in two states '

rather than '

tenses ' (though it is convenient to use the
word 'tenses'); these are the Perfect and the Imperfect.
Any completed action (past, present, or future) is put
in the Perfect.
Any incomplete action (past, present, or future) is put
in the Imperfect.
Thus the Perfect denotes '
he killed, he has had
(or)
killed ; he will (or) would have killed,' etc. Sometimes it
must be translated by a present ; e.g. ^DJj '
I (hereby) give.'

The Imperfect denotes, 'he will kill; he used to kill

(continuous and therefore incomplete) ; he (habitually) kills

he may, might, would kill/ etc.

[It is most important for the beginner to master this
e.g. to understand why he used to kill and he will kill
'
'
'

are both expressed by the same tense.'] '

§ Strong and Weak Verbs.

2. «
'
'
'

All verbs in Hebrew may be conveniently divided into

these two classes. " Strong " verbs are those of which the

three root-letters are unchangeable, e.g. vtOj?. Verbs of

which one of the root-letters is a guttural (see Chaps. — XXX
XXXII.) also belong to this class, as they differ from v®p
only in vocalisation, and their consonants remain unchanged.
 *
.

68 TKNSES

The term ' weak ' verbs may be taken to include not
only those in which one of the three root-letters is a weak
consonant {e.g. verbs ending in Jl — where the !"T — some-
times appears as ^
— ), but also others in which one of the
root-letters disappears by assimilation, etc. (e.g. verbs which
have 1 for their second root-letter).

§ 3. Perfect Qal.

The ordinary Active voice is called 7>p, the '

light ' voice.
Hebrew verbs are usually quoted by the 3rd m. sing,
perf. Qal ; e.g. ^Bj? (lit. he killed '), '
to kill.'

Singular. Plural.

3rd p. m. besp
— 'x
rJttp (common).

f. rfcup
x x :
F

2nd p. m. rhup
x - : 'x
otbtip
f. nbibp WJ^Si
1st p. c. ^rhup
— • . 'x : - <t

It is therefore inflected only by means of afTormatives

(i.e. syllables added at the end), and in this way differs
from the Imperfect.
These afTormatives are to a large extent the character-
istic parts of the corresponding personal pronouns.

Remarks.
1. The 2nd p. sing, originally was CJp/OjJ: hence
f.

e
the final Sh wa and Dagesh lene. The final vowel was
apparently dropped to avoid confusion with the 1st p. sing.
# It reappears before pronoun suffixes.)
(

2. The 2nd p. plur. originally ended in D^lfi — ,

pD —
These being long closed syllables took the accent, as the

final syllable still does (cp.

<

0£M). Hence the — is

e
weakened into vocal Sh wa under p.

1
See note (1) on Chap. XVI. § I.
 ; '

TENSES 6g

# The 3rd p.
3. f. sing, was originally J"Http. The
D— reappears when the verb takes a pronoun suffix. Its

pause form is nStpJ^, just as the pause form of iy£p is

T T
r

§ 4. Stative Verbs are a class of verbs, usually intransi-

tive, which express a state or condition (he is full, thirsty,
1
in fear, in love, etc.).
In the ultimate syllable of the Perfect Qal, such verbs
may take either — , or -77, or
'

— ; e.g. 25^?> ' lie down

(be down-lying) ; "D3, '
be heavy ' ;
|bj?, '
be small, un-
worthy.'
(a) Those in — change it to — before all consonantal
afformatives (ijjtt^, etc.).

(b) Those in '

— retain it except before the heavy
afformatives of the 2nd plur.
<

e.g. 3rd f. sing. Hitpp

2nd m. sing. natop

2nd m. plur. D&ttp

v t : ':

1st m. plur.
't

VOCABULARY.
TO^, be able. T7J (stat), be great,
|tOp, be small ; be un- grow up.

worth (of ]?p). ^5, cut, cut down.

JpJ,
be old. JlN (fern.) Hnjl ni3, cut

Tl|, be heavy, hard. (z>. make), a cove-

N"V, to fear. nant with . . .

^N/ft ange 1, messenger. tODttf, to judge.

lltp (stat.), lie down. ^|?(/9 (Infin.) (to) kill.

1
Stative verbs are not all intransitive ; e.g. CO?, put on (garment). It is

not always easy to see why such a verb is regarded as stative ;

probably CQ7 =
1
be clothed with.'
70 TENSES

EXERCISE.
1. Put into English :

jw^a ^«itr
T
T T
^1-bv- siVdh
T V v -••
-p- rrM rn
T T
: • •• : : N /

: t:d^q
»t 1
t
pram
t•
D^n-Sy
*.-- wn _ TT
•
nnStr
':tt:- t
(2)
\ / •• !

^1:015
iby?—
b*n$
-:

tpW
(4)

t :
p:i v»jg| "qfcjj o$739 °^^ (3)
rb'yt
xh (5)
\
ilata .... rmn
rronso 1 v:n ftp
-/ / ••

(6)
m : arrow
^IfTQ TTQN W|i (7) JQ'nsa 'ttrra win
Dtf n^uJ i*ran iri 1 tp wpn ijWi
(8)

into nnrn mn
4
*vyn *nnn n7*?n-?3
:vpi ^nn wap mrr ^«S^7 -ton (9)
-*?** Tto-^-nNi
t v
•oa-^-nN
-xt v ^nSttf
: - t (10)
x / : • :

:onS
v x
vnaw
- T
itiM
v
Dipttn
t - • : -: '

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) Thy hand is heavy upon me day and night. 5

(2) Ye made a covenant with him. (3) I am
unworthy of all thy blessings. was not (4) I

able to keep his commands, for they were very

hard. (5) They will judge between us and her
in the matter 6
of the child. (6) We lay down in
the place whither we had gone, all that night.
(7) His heart was hard, and he would not let

(]J"0 with accus. and infin.) hearken to the

us
words of our prophets. (8) Why hast thou not
been able to judge this people? Hast thou
grown old? (9) I grew up in the days of that
king, in whose presence I stood. (10) My in-
7
iquity is too heavy for (me) to keep thy laws.

1
See Chap. XII. § 4, note 2. a *
Joseph.'
3
See Chap. XIII. § 3. (g).
i"l;TD = on this side
4
»"Wp . . . ... on that side. . . .

6 7
6
Use the nouns without a preposition. 12ft. Use }D and Infin.
 ;

7i

CHAPTER XV.— Continued.

B. Voices — Perfect Tenses,

§ I. The Hebrew verb has at least seven possible

voices. 1 All of these, except the Qal, are known by names
which are simply the 3rd p. sing, perf., in each voice, of
a rare word v^Q, '
to act' or 'do.' Thus the ordinary
Passive of 7^3 is 7VP?, and this voice is called the Niph'al.
Therefore from the name of a voice, it is a simple matter
to form the corresponding Perfect of other ordinary verbs

e.g. the Niph'al of btdp is ^BM.

§2.
Significance. Name. Form in T>tOp

Ordinary Active Qal bupT

[2. „ Passive Niph'al (^3*5?)
'3- Intensive Active Pi'el (fjJJB)

(see Rem. 4)
,4. Intensive Passive Pu'al (byB) bto%
'5- Causative Active Hiph'U (^}>pST) b^pri
(see Rem. 4)
,6. Causative Passive Hoph'al (by EH)
7. Reflexive Hithpa el (bv^Tl) btopnri
(see Rem. 4)
1
Very few verbs have all these voices in actual use.
 );

72 VOICES

Remarks.

1. The word /S?D is taken as the typical verb by

grammarians.
They speak of the first root-letter of any verb as the
// //

SD letter, of the second as the V letter, and the third

//i '/

as the s letter. Thus ] D verbs means verbs of which

the first root-letter is 2.

2. In naming the
one great disadvantage voices, 7}?D has
— that its second root-letter is a guttural and cannot take
Dagesh forte. This obscures the important fact that the
second root-letter in strong verbs takes Dagesh forte in the
Pfe/ Pual, and HitJipdel.
y

3. Note that voices 2, 5, 6, and 7 take preformatives

{i.e. syllables before the first root-letter).

4. The Pi'el usually expresses vigour or eagerness of

c
action ; e.g. ?NtL\ '
ask '
; Pi el, beg.' rh%\ '
send '
; Pi'el,
1
send away.'
The HipHil is causative (TtppH = cause <
to kill '). It

is very useful voice

a ; thus '
bring ' = '
cause to come '

'
offer up = cause to go '
'
up,' etc.

The Hithpdel is reflexive, as a rule ; ;V$T\7\ = ' kill

oneself.'

* 3. Further notes on form.

§
(a) In the Pi'el and Hithpa'el the primitive — often
reappears in the ultimate syllable, particularly in

pause ; e.g.he taught'

^ft/, '

(J?)
In the Hithpa'el of words beginning with the sibil-

ants D, to, to, and ^, the H of the preformative

changes place with the initial sibilant for the
sake of euphony ; eg. "V?to, Hithp. ""iMton.

In verbs beginning with ^, the T\ (after the meta-

thesis) becomes 10; e.g. pl% Hithp. (p^^H =

When the first root-letter is 1, 10, or F\, the D of

 ;

VOICES 73

the preformative is usually assimilated to it

e,g. ISntfE becomes IS.'TO.

* 4. Further notes on Significance.
§
(a) The Niph'al sometimes has its primitive reflexive
sense ; e.g. Ulp?, he hid '
himself.'

Sometimes it has a reciprocal sense; e.g. 01172,

1
he fought '
; ^tOQtpi, *
they went to law with
each other ' ;
(cp. Greek Middle, e.g. BcaXeyo/iat).

(b) The Pi'el is frequently causative, especially in

stative verbs ; e.g. *T?7, ' he caused to learn/

i.e. taught.
It is also used to form a verb from a noun (denomina-
tive verb) ; e.g. ]JV,
*
cloud'; ]2y, '
(God) brought
a cloud '
; cp. ^DV from the numeral Hlto^.
(c) The Hiph'il is also used to form denominative

verbs; e.g. "TOO, 'rain'; TttQn, '(God) sent

rain.'

Many Hiph'ils are seemingly intransitive, and we

have to use a periphrasis to find any causative
(

sense in them. Such inwardly transitive or c

'

f
1
intensive ' Hiph ils are IT7?»7> l
ne had success,
succeeded.' t^pipn, ' he showed quietness.'-

Compare the common phrase ")$2&. D^tpn, 'he

rose early in the morning.'
A verb which takes an accusative in the Qal, in the
Hiph'il (or Pfel when causative) may take two
accusatives ; e.g. l^T^^? ttJlT 5
,
'
he put on the
garment'; *r£L«lT\N "ink* ti^H, 'he caused
him to put on the garment.' Verbs which denote
abundance or lack (such as N79> De of .) ' ^ . .

take an accus. in the Qal, and consequently

two accus. in the causative voice ; e.g. N;?ft

YlNHTlN DftTl, '

he filled the land with violence.'
(d) The Hithpa'el may express reciprocity ; e.g.

^inn, '
they looked at one another.' By an
 : ;

74 VOICES

extension of this use, we have such words as

^njin, 'walk about for oneself; i.e. walk to
and fro.

Its reflexive use frequently takes the sense of playing

a part ; e.g. D^nrin = he pretended to be wise
Nl^Htl, ' he acted in an excited manner, like
a prophet.
§ 5. All these Perfects, except the Hiph'il, are con-
jugated in the same way as the Perfects Qal. The Niph'al,
f
Pu'al, and Hoph'al are just like vt?j?; the Pi el and
Hithpa'el, like the stative "Q| ; e.g. 7t£>j?, Tlbl*$, phtefi, etc.

In the Hiph'il~ retained before the

the 1 is vocal
afformatives, but becomes — before the consonantal

Sing, ^tppn, nJpBpn, nbw^, etc.

piur. ^tppn, QinV&jpn, etc.

VOCABULARY.
tTpl, Pi., seek, search for. 1DD, Niph., be hidden, hide
"HI, Pi., speak. oneself.

113, Niph., be honoured. Hiph., hide.

Pi., honour. Hithp., hide oneself.
Hiph., harden* TOttJ, Hiph., destroy, exter-

nal!?, Pi., send away. minate.

11 /, Niph., fight (Si, against). Ht, Hiph., make mention

I07D, Niph., be delivered, escape. of, commemorate.
Hiph., deliver. jTTC, Hiph., justify, acquit.
Hithp., justify oneself.

]?&, Hiph., cast, throw.

EXERCISES.
1. Translate into English:

(2) :t^? who* tibri nbaS *hx v$i (i)

DJ-njJga tib (3) joswraj nto-riN w?jn

 :

VOICES 75

irjfctfn (4) i^is-nM Dirft? tib\ vta

7Jsnfep '•tfjN ri^npn (5) ;NVin oyn-n«
1

jTyrra dh^m ^ni TjStrn (6) sorrspVp

{DiTTQ cpV?? ^nfc V^i^n tib (7) ^
^ rngn (9) ni ton?? ^ ^nV# (8)
:
HW?
nn^tf
t :- (10) jxpi^-nN
• 'its v^
mson
t -
n^b
/t t
in^b : : •

T^? Fvrrw will *^ ^tjl T**

•

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) The woman sought my face, for I justified her
before the king. (2) They cast his head unto us.
(3) They fought with us all that night, but God
2

delivered from their hand.

us (4) She sent
away her sons from before her. (5) I was
hidden from your face, for you had sought me
all that day. (6) In their days these things
were recorded according to the command of the
king. (7) We got ourselves honour before them.
(8) I searched for the woman, whose sons
I had

delivered. (9) She spake saying, Will they not

make a covenant with him ? but (and) a covenant
was not made on that day. (10) They exter-
minated that people and all that was theirs, and
no man escaped 3 from their hand.

1
See § 3. (5) above.
2 Put the Subj. before the Verb.
* Say '
there did not escape a man.'
 7 6

CHAPTER XVI.

STRONG VERBS— Continued.

A. Imperfect and Imperative Qal.

§ I. The Perfect, as we have seen, is inflected by

afiformatives ; the Imperfect mainly by preformatives * {i.e.

prefixes put before the first root-letter) : but in five forms

there are afformatives as well.
The preformatives are the same for the corresponding
persons of the sing, and plur.,except in the first person. 2
The Imperative is identical in form with the Imperfect,
when the preformatives are dropped ; e.g.

1
VtQjW (m.), <
thou shalt kill. VtDj?, '
kill thou/
*bv$n (f.), „ . ^?|?,
(Note full short vowel under p.)

§2.
Qal. Imperfect. Imperative.

Sing. 3rd p. m.

3rd p. f. btowi
?toj;

2nd p. m. Vtapn bbp

2nd p. f. ^Vpft ^j?
1st p. c. VtDW
1
It is convenient in verbal forms to speak of preformatives and afformatives,
'

rather than prefixes and suffixes, to avoid confusion. The term '
verbal suffixes
is thus restricted to the pronoun suffixes attached to the verb to denote the direct
accusative; e.g. the 13 — in ^nPDp, * thou-didst-kill-us ' (see Chap. XXVI.).
2
Both they and the afformatives seem to be abbreviated forms of the personal
pronouns, but the * in the 3rd pers. has not been satisfactorily explained.
 . — .

STRONG VERBS 77

Qal. Imperfect. Imperative.

Plur. 3rd p. m.

3rd p. f. nAtopn
2nd p. m.

2nd p. f. rrAtopii

1st p. c. btoM

§ 3. Remarks.
1. Z$£ second vowel in most strong verbs is
'
— . This
is tone-long, being lengthened from an original — (to judge
from the analogy of Arabic). Therefore it is replaced by
e
vocal Sh wa before vowel afformatives.
Stative verbs however have — in the second syllable;
e.g. iritp, 113, TIT (plural Tl^, nrjajri, etc.).
IStjF :

of —
- .

2. Note the "•— in the 2nd fern, sing., as in the original

form of the corresponding person in the Perfect.

3. Note the — in the 1st p. sing., as N nearly always

prefers — to —
# 4. In the older books of the Old Testament we
frequently find a ] — added to the plur. forms in 1 —
This p —
is supposed to mark an emphatic form : it is

used mostly in pause forms or in divine utterances.

# 5. In the 3rd and 2nd fern. plur. we often have t] —
for PC — , especially in the Pentateuch.

§ 4. Prohibitions.
The Imperative is never used with a Negative. Prohibi-
tions are expressed

{a) either by fcv with the Imperf. (ov /cXei/ret? of N.T.

Greek),

(J?)
or by T>N (not) with the Jussive, which is a modi-
fication of the Imperfect (see below, Chapter
XVIII.) = fir) KXeyfrrjf;.

fcO with the Imperfect is properly a negation of fact

 /

78 STRONG VERBS

with a strong note of assurance ; • tDpJl tib

1
you are not going to kill."
Hence the Imperf. in prohibitions is stronger than
the Jussive, and is usually found in divine
commands.

VOCABULARY.
ON, 'if; with Perf. IfDttf, pour out.
or Imperf.

^^
tlh^T, seek, require.
Also Interrogative.
appoint, muster.
. . . uN . . . H, ' is it ?
Hiph., set over, make
... or is it ... ? overseer.
"^ 15^7 )
]J^?/[
^n order that,'
with Imperf.
^ (p^ ma k e great, bring
up (children).
jB, 'lest,' with Im- (Hithp.), magnify one-
perf. se ^«

1"}£ (stative), draw near.

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English:

TTO
By ^Qum
I
nS (o
•
d«i tinwn
x
n^r-na
-
• v:
ijistfn

snr%o opji^-riH rrc?tp (2) n^r-riM ttn^

rvn-in-riN
- -vstM kS> nsS
• : t t (3)
n^n^
v
•.•
v
B&tiNV jdV
; • \ +* /
:
: : I

jWiY^M nim t
tthi: (4)
~
v:
j^y •»i=n3
-t
ien
v : : • v '
: • • -:

ptitfnn tih n^ ? n^arr o^tiA nba (5) 1

^5jn aVn (6) jpipifl np5« 1^7 ^n

V39i ^3?9 toV? $15£ (7) : ^^"n *?

istp^n (8) j TTJi^s-ns* fhy ipo^ ^gi

^ rnp (10) :vSn D^tt&j} wh$ft **b (9)

jW? A"7ju=i jjnp^ spjii niisi
 STRONG VERBS 79

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) Why will ye not keep his words, O daughters of

Israel ? (2) They will pursue after them on the
mountains. (3) I will pursue after her, lest her
heart be heavy. (4) Wilt thou keep my com-
mands, or wilt thou magnify thyself before me ?
(5) O daughter of Israel, I said unto thee, Draw
'

near unto me, that I may remember thee in

affliction.' (6) We will pour out the blood of
their sons and daughters like water. (7) I will
judge you ; for ye made a covenant with me,
and ye will not hearken unto me. (8) She
brought up the boy, and he (was) to her for
a son. (9) I will not visit her, until she keeps
my judgments. (10) Judge between him and
me. (n) Trust thou (fern.) in the Lord thy God.
 ; ;

So

CHAPTER XVI.— Continued.

B. Imperfects and Imperatives of other
Voices (see Paradigm A).

(a) Niplial. The Perfect ;ttp3 is probably ev >lved out

of a primitive form vftpjn. The Impe feet of

this would be ^tOp^"?'] : the last two vowels are

made tone-long, and we get T>tpj72?T, which
assimilates the H
and becomes /I2p\
and
it
2
: •• •

The Imperative may always be arrived at in

every voice by taking the primitive form of the
Imperfect and dropping the \ Hence Impera-
tive Niph'al is btopyn = ^tOpH.
In inflection the tone-long -7 becomes vocal Sh e wa
before the vocal afformatives, and becomes —
before the consonantal
e.g. Impf. plur. ^^iT-
ra^Qgjn, etc.

(b) Pi el. The Perfect originally 7t?i? becomes vtSp.

The Imperfect „ htGig\ „ htgQ

The Imperative „ 7t5|2 „ /tSp.

In inflection the tone-iong — becomes vocal Sh e wa

before the vocal afformatives, but remains before
1
the consonantal
1
Contrast the 3rd and 2nd f. pi. Impf. Niph., which have — in the pen-

ultimate, with the — - here. The Passive voices prefer — (cp. Niph' a/, PuW,
Hoph'a/).
 : 1

STRONG VERBS 8

e.g. Impf. Plur. *bl$fc)

7l}btep_t), etc.

The 1st p. sing, is vfcSj^.

(c) Pu'al. Imperfect b^, ,

Imperative wanting.
(d) HipJiil. The Perfect v^jJPT probably rests on an

original form /t5|?n. The first — was thinned

down to — as in the Pi'el ; the second — has,
oddly enough, become n and only reappears — ,

before consonantal afformatives (e.g. in Perfect

n^tppn, J^tpprr).

The Imperfect is ^tp|£ (for ^t?^).

1
The Imperative is btppn.
In inflection, *•— appears with the second root-letter
in both Imperf. and Impera. before vocal afforma-
tives, i.e. open but
where the syllable before is ;
—
consonantal afformatives, i.e. where the syllable
is closed.
So we get

Imperf. 2nd p. m. sing. T^tppfi Imper. /ttpPT

2nd p. f. ^t?p£ 1
V 1 9iX7
3rd p. m. plur. ^tppl etc.

3rd p. f. raTQftci
(e) Hoplial. Imperfect (Vttjjrf;=i) htSj%
Imperative wanting.

(/) Hithpdel. Imperfect (^JglpST'; =) b^\)T\\

Imperative bfapJlTl.

(— becomes — before consonantal afformatives ;

e.g. nAtsppri).
1
Note the — which appears also in the Jussive Hiph'il. Perhaps it marks a
tone of decision in giving an order.
82 STRONG VERBS
VOCABULARY.
*Hto, to burn. fflj> (f.), city. Plur. D*^
TOtt! (Niph.), to take heed, (— fixed;.
1

beware. tffotf ( m^ pcacc .

tfM (f.), fire.

1
i.e. the —
T
is never thinned into vocal Sh e wa.

EXERCISE.
1. Translate into English:

a iDnV; (
2) j^nfc vtifR\ ^ ^0?*? (0
itfpon n^S r
3) :orpTO Tito tsSnn njwi
)s ^?Hftfn ( 4) jijWn? *b ^i ^s-hm
nS i$ ^7 rrJ^iijp-no"
(5) t?V *n&Ji
:tiVa
nVi or^y rm-i nh^i (6) :•»»*? ro^nnn

•ibn? 17 rpja !
1

(7) jDwy-nN T&tfr

*nm ^ t-nN nnb ton wm tjS ni^irn

JgB7 D^jn OTftfc} DH^y ^Tp5H (8) J D'ntf

*itttenn tob n^nn awn ( 9) miw« rw
TfSttn
'
v v -
n^-?^-..
ip^T
/- •
(10)j
\
JVtttn
t :
•
*h\:

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) I will escape from his hand. She will not escape.
Escape Cause-to-come-near to me your
ye. (2)
children, 1
that they may hear what I
in order
shall speak unto them. (3) Thou (fern.) shalt
not deliver thy sons from their hands. (4) Seek
ye my face: thy face will I seek. (5) We will
fight with them, lest our city be destroyed. (6)
They spoke to him, saying, Beware lest thou '

justify the wicked more than the good.' (7) She

will get herself honour for they will make- ;

mention-of her to the king. (8) We will speak

1
Say '
sons,'
 :

STRONG VERBS 83

to her saying, '

Beware lest thou burn our city
with (in the) fire and
; if thou shalt destroy it,

the blood of thy sons shall be shed like water.'

(9) Do not honour that evil woman, O daughters
of (10) Fight against them, and do not
Israel.
seek peace from that people.

# Note. —
The following scheme of the Hebrew verb which,
judging by the analogy of Arabic, seems to represent it in
its fundamental form, will be useful to compare with the

forms actually found

Qal. Niph'al. Pi'el. Pu'al. Hiph. Hoph. Hithpa'el.

3 m. s. b®$ ^MM ^Pfi bto$ ^Bipn ^i?n ^tapnn

3 f -
s - rnttj? etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

2 m. s. ri^og
2 f. s. fi^Bg
1
1 s. ^?^g
3 pl- vTtsm

2 m. pl. cwi^SB
2 f. pl. pthup.
ipl. vfy$>
Imperf.

3 m. s. b^_ bttgsir htggi btotfi bvprri htijpy* htgsyy\

3 f- s. btppn etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

2 m. s.
^i?5
2 f. s. ^topj-i

1 s. ^?i?M
3 m- P 1 - i^ipi
3 f- s. nAtspn
2 m. pl. roppj?
2 f. pl. nAtopn
t -
: '•.
':

ipl. 7t?p3
 84 STRONG VERBS
Qal. Niph'al. Pi'el. Pu'al. Mini) Hop!,. Uithpa'el.
Imperat
2 111. S. bl?\? biffin bvp btsp b&$n biggin b^tyn
2 I. S. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc.

2 m. pi. ^pp
2 f. pi. rt&tsp
x
: '•.
':

Inf. Abs. *7ttp—

T '
b^ipyn
t '—
: •
bw T —
'
Stop
t '••.
bupn
t -
':
bupn
t t
':
btsipm
t '- : •

Const. byp bts&in btoo bvvn bwn btspnn

Part. Act. b®\> bup)

t -
':
htgx)
Pass. brpp

This scheme fails to account for the c^ere in the Niph'al

f
Imperf. and Imperat, and in most parts of the Pi eland
Hithpa'el, and for the long hireq in the Hiph'il. It would
seem that these vowels were introduced to vary the
monotony of the constant a sound.
 ; ;

*s

CHAPTER XVII.

JUSSIVE, COHORTATIVE, AND COHORTATIVE

IMPERATIVE.

8 i. The Jussive is a form of the Imperfect, used

commands.
chiefly in giving It is only found in the 2nd

and 3rd persons (the 2nd person chiefly in prohibitions) :

its negative is vN, not bs?.

In form it is like the Imperfect pronounced rapidly to

give a tone of decision. In strong verbs it is identical
I with the ordinary Imperfect in every voice but the Hiph'il.
In the latter, — appears instead of ^— in a closed syllable
(just as in the Imperat. Hiph.)

e.g. vttpl, let him cause-to-kill.

blOpJTl T>N, do not thou (m.) cause-to-kill.

^tppin b«, „ „ (fern.) „ „

§ 2. The Cohortative is used in self-encouragement

it expresses a resolution '
with more keenness and energy,
and with a deeper personal interest or emotion, than the
mere Imperfect.' 1 It is therefore usually confined to the

first person : its negative is vN.

Its mark is the syllable H— , affixed to the Imperfect,

the previous vowel being dropped unless it is ^— or V, 2

e.g.

nSt^p^, <
let me kill '
; but n^I0p«, <
let me cause-to-kill.'

The il— is necessarily accented unless the syllable im-

1
Driver, Hebrew Tenses, p. 51. It often gives a polite tone to the expres-
sion of the resolution, almost as of asking leave.
* 2
or i when long by nature ; e.g. nNUtf, '
let me come.'
 ; ;

86 JUSSIVE, COHORTATIVE IMPERATIVE

mediately preceding contains a long vowel ; e.g. H vippN,

but nnV2N,
T T
let me die.'
'
'

§ 3. The Cohortative Emphatic

(
(or ') Imperative.
The same afformative T\ -
is also attached to the 2nd p.
masc. sing, of the Imperative, to give it a tone of personal
feeling (sometimes expressing decision, sometimes making
the command less brusque). The previous vowel in the
Imperative becomes vocal Sh e wa, unless it is *•— or 1 (or
"1
when naturally long ; see § 2, and the primitive
note 2) ;

full short vowel reappears, if necessary, under the first root-

letter ; e.g.

htip becomes Tlb^p or ?hv% (qotlah). 1

[Tlhvp impossible.]
btgpn „ n^nppn
§ 4. The particle N2, '
prithee,' is frequently added to
the Cohortative, Jussive, and Imperative (as well as to such
particles as njn, '
behold ') to mark the supplicatory
nature of the request or resolution, or sometimes to
strengthen an exhortation. It is usually joined to the verb
by a Maqqeph, the ultimate vowel of the verb being
2
shortened unless it is accented e.g. *b NJ-n^Qtt}, ' hear
me, I pray thee.'

VOCABULARY.
HW, now. ^QJ, to fall.

p"i, only. ^05 1 to write.

]3, thus (in reference to Y?£, to collect.

3 destroy
what precedes). TT\\D (Piel), to ;

Hi), thus (in reference to Hiph. to corrupt,

what follows). ^QD, Qal, to count
nan, lo, behold. Pi'el, to relate.

1DD (m.), book. TO7, to learn ; Pi. to teach.

•121M, to the ground.

1
The student is reminded that the penultimate in all such cases is half-open.
2
fcO is an enclitic ; i.e. bears no accent.

» _, not — ; see Chap. VI. A. § 2.

 JUSSIVE, COHORTATIVE IMPERATIVE 87

EXERCISE.

1. Translate into English:

miptso ^m rn|? (2) p?

1
*WTJ5>D TjV-nn (o
T^' «3tjV? D ^1 ?g? en ™?5?1 (3) JT^y
8fi

d? ?
1
rft^n pi (4) Tf5i^ i*?: ^n
itfjpajj ]5

hAn T
ibM7 toej^
—
xx
nnM
t: — x (5)

ison t^-mro raw (6) nrpy-na nnttfn

n
••
jtos-mn
tx :
^ :

s •* /

nntpn Sn (7) :^7£ntt 'Vjpri ^wj ^?Tn ^

nba ? *h *nmn1

— rra (8) jyod*?

tt: TiniS-nw
x : • ^ / '
: :

•n— (9)
I
n^n
T "
\*S / DmX ^ Tp^-nN
:
V X v
^>n
— mpn— ^m— ' ' •• ••»;

rvsrhn (10)
\ /
:^n'N nirs^Mi
t -
*h txynytjiti
x
x
x x v -: '
:
. . • . •

ink T57feji njrj ttfwn

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) Let me lie down there — Do not lie down. (2)

And now let all his men be collected and let
us fight and destroy it.
against their city

(3) O keep thou this law. I have not been

able to keep it. (4) Only teach me thy com-
mandments, and let me magnify thee thus. (5)
Do not thou throw that which is good before the
swine (D'H^H). (6) And now, lest they grow
too great for this people, let us cast their city
to the ground, and let us burn it with fire. (7)
Let me not make a covenant with him. (8) Do
not thus magnify the evil words of your prophets.

(9) Lo, have told thee all that is in

I prithee, I
my heart, and I have not hidden a thing. (10)
Let us not fight against them, for they are too
strong for our men.
 :

ss

CHAPTER XVIII.

WAW CONSECUTIVE AND WEAK WAW.

§ i. Waw
Consecutive.
Hebrew is above all things a language of word-painting :

it can draw a vivid picture in two or three words but it is ;

lacking in the complex structures and syntax which belong

to more elaborate languages such as Greek. Thus it has
only two modifications of the verbal stem to fill the place
of all the tenses and moods of such languages.
Again, it has very few subordinate clauses where we :

should say, after going there, he killed his enemy, as he

'

sat in his house/ Hebrew says he went there now his '
;

enemy was sitting in him there

his house, and he killed '

or again, he was on the point of getting off his horse and

'

killing him, when his horse ran away,' would be, in Hebrew,
1
He said in his heart, " Let me now get down from on
my horse and kill him," and his horse ran away.'
Now this lack of subordinate clauses would cause great
confusion, if (eg.) vE|71 nftti ^vil could mean either he '

went there and (then) killed him/ or he went there, and

'

'

he had (previously) killed him.' In the former case '

killed
follows on, or is consecutive to> his going : in the latter case
it is not, but gives the circumstances of his going. And
Hebrew marks by expressing the two sentences quite
this
differently, —
the former and killed by a Waw Consecutive
' '

with the verb, the latter by a Circumstantial clause. In

other words, it employs a special method of denoting every
verb in a narrative which is in direct sequence (either of
time or logic) to the preceding verb.
 :

WAW CONSECUTIVE AND WEAK WAVV 89

§ 2. This method may be explained as follows

(a) In a consecutive narrative of past events, the first

verb in the series fixes the time or completeness

of the whole series, and is put in the perfect : all

subsequent or consecutive actions in the same

series are treated from the standpoint of the first
action, i.e. as incomplete, and therefore are ex-
pressed by putting the verb with — "1 in the
Imperfect He went there (Perfect) and-
(
'
'

fought him (Imperfect, because incomplete when

'

he went), and-killed him (similarly Imperfect).

' '

1
The tense which expresses development is the
1
Imperfect.'
RULE : all verbs except the first, in a consecutive
narrative of past events, are put in the Imperfect
and are joined to the Copula — 1, wJiich is then
pointed like the article ; e.g. 7tDp*1 *W2^ = ' ^e
went and (then) killed.'
(J?)
It still remained to find a method of expressing
consecution in future time (or in any series where
the first verb is Imperfect). Apparently by false
analogy with the scheme described in (a), rather
than by any logical process, it was customary\ when
the first verb in a series was Imperfect, to express all
consecutive actions in the same series by the Perfect, [ t

joined to Wazv pointed with vocal Slifwa ; e.g.

7EJJ7) DH^ = <

he will fight and will (then) kill,'
or '
he used to fight and used (then) to kill'

In the best Hebrew, whenever 1 is joined to the

Perfect or Imperfect it is consecutive, except in
the one class of instances explained below in
§5.
Conversely, all consecutive actions in a series are
expressed by Waw consecutive attached to the
verb, when the latter stands first in the clause.
If, however, there is any word interposed between
1
Kennett, Hebrew Tenses, p. 38.
<ju WAW CONSECUTIVE AND WEAK WAW
Waw and the verb {e.g. the negative), the verb
assumes its simple, non-consecutivu form e.g. ;

(he went there) and did not kill ' is b^) ^h)
(not ?bp^ fc*7)) ;
'
/ said (this) ... but he said
(that) ' is "V2N WiTl . . . VTON TJN.
Remark.
Waw consecutive seems at first sight to convert the
Perf. into the Impf. and vice versa. Therefore, before
grammarians recognised its consecutive force, they used to
speak of it as Waw Conversive. This name is unscientific
and has been rightly discarded.
§ 3. Further notes on Waw Consecutive.
(a) The Imperfect with Waw consecutive always takes
the Jussive form except in the 1st pers. sing. ; e.g.

in the Hiphil it is 7tt|?55 (not ^BjJH); 1st

person, TTOpNV
(b) Waw consecutive with the Imperfect draws back
the accent from the ultimate to the penultimate
when the latter is long and open ;
and then the
ultimate vowel must be shortened ; e.g. ^7^, *
he
2
will go '
; "JH, and he went'
'

(c)
v '
ftPm,
TT 'and it shall come pass/
to r
\
:
are usually
I
^H^l, 3 '
and it came to pass,'
followed by Waw consecutive, b ut never wi tljput
some intervening words and it came to ; e.g. '

pass after these things that he killed is . .

.'

1
It will be remembered that the Jussive proper is never used in the 1st person.

In the 1st person, the Imperf. with Waw consec. occasionally takes the form of
the Cohortative.
* 2
With the 2nd m. s. of the Perfect it has the effect of throwing the accent
forward from the penultimate syllable to the ultimate, provided that there is a

long vowel in the ante-penultimate to bear the countertone ; e.g. DpDp but FlptOpI

(with Metheg). This rule does not stand when the verb is in Pause nor in the

Perf. Qal of T\"h stems.

3
The student is reminded that * seldom takes Dagesh forte ; see above,

Chap. V. § 3. Rem. 3. \T is the Jussive form of iTHS the Imperf. of j"|\"l.

 ' ; ;

WAW CONSECUTIVE AND WEAK WAW 91

Stop»n nkxn Dmin *nnN wn (but wi

•tDj?*1 would be impossible).
(d) Waw consecutive very often introduces the
apo dosis of a conditional sentence ; e.g. 1 Sam.
xx. 6, JV1EN1 . . . l'p& DM, ' if he shall miss
x
me, then thou shalt say.'
§ 4. Circumstantial clauses are clauses which break
the consecution of events by giving some attendant circum-
stance. In such clauses, if there is a verb, the Waw must
be kept apart from it by the interposition of some noun
or pronoun ; e.g. nj?7 D wfaSfi = now Absalom had taken '

. .
.
and (then) Absalom took ').
' (not, '

(In most of these clauses the verb is in the participle

see Chap. XXL, and Appendix D).

§ 5. Weak Waw is Waw attached to the verb without

influencing its form (i.e. not consecutive). It is always
pointed with vocal Sh e wa.
Weak Waw is rarely found in good Hebrew except with
the third person of the Jussive, and with the Cohortative
e.g. 7toj£)i '
and let him kill/

nSttpN\
t v
and : ' : :
'
let me kill.'

In translation 7bj7H ma y often be rendered *

that he
may kill '
; eg. Gen. xxxviii. 24, '
bring her out that she
may be burned,' is literally '
and let her be burned,' ?)^tZ?rYl.

* N.B. — Two verbs of which the meaning

synonymous is

or the action contemporary, are sometimes joined by weak

Waw rather than Waw consecutive e.g. 1 Sam. xii. 2, ;

V=l$jn •ystjgt
^l '
I am old and grey-headed.'

VOCABULARY.
nVl, to be, become, happen. ""IPS^ ne will stand.
Nfctt, to lift up. Impf. \tf&\ m :h?J! he will kill.

^7^, to he will go. ^5^*1 and he said.

1
See further, Appendix E.
>,-' \\ AW CONSECUTIVE WD WT.AK WAW
pli^ (m.), lord. Plur. used "1112 (m.), river.

in addressing a superior. JVp (f.) 5

eye . Dual D^JP,
nte (m.), flesh. 1^2- «
Hi s e ye' = ir;\

-Tin3 (m.), glory.

all mankind.
^ great piur
<
D
many.'
^
EXERCISE.
I. Translate into Hebrew:
(i) They dwelt by the rivers of that land, and they
remembered his covenant and kept his words.
(2) I will remember thy glory, and will keep thy
words. (3) Justify thou him, that he may honour
thee. (4) I pursued after them, and I fought
with them, and I burnt their city in (the) fire.
(5) The men and women of this city went to him ;

now (and) they had sent their children away

from there but (and) they did not escape, and
;

their city was burned. (6) And it came to pass

after these days that he lifted up his eyes and ;

behold a man and he went and said to him,

! ;

*
Who art thou ? (7) And it shall come to
'

pass after these things that thy sons shall stand

before me all their days. (8) And he brought
him near to the king and he stood before him :

and said, O deliver me, I pray, my Lord the

'

King.' (9) And all flesh corrupted their heart

on the earth ; and they used to go after that-
which-is-evil in my eyes. (10) If thou shalt
go after them, then I will destroy thee.

2. Translate into English :

Sn mm
t : —t:
;rriK
' :
nn^tr^
t — - : :
Trb
t
*& ibwi—
• :
•
1

•••

^tb nton bvra ttfw nam

".'
-m ^i p:a T
."
J :"

»j*i rriiT ub&) in nnn^ tn Tpfroi

1
Jesse.
WAW CONSECUTIVE AND WEAK WAW 93

•• t : • •• : : - • : x v x : : v : T x

:dv^q nnN
• : • : ••-: -
fi^rw
•-
'
v^y?3
T : T ••

1
The Thilistine.
 '

94

CHAPTER XIX.

SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS (S

E
GHOLATES).
e
§ I. Second Declension nouns are called S gholates,
e
because they have S ghol in the ultimate syllable.
Originally they were monosyllables and they fall into ;

three classes, according as their primitive vowel belongs to

the a, z, or o class.
(a) a Class. Primitive form ^?tt becoming ^77p, ' a king.'
1
With pronominal suffixes ^/ft, etc.

(b) i Class. Primitive form p*T2 becoming p"T^, '

right-
eousness.'

.Primitive form *jDD becoming 1DD, '

a book.
With pronominal suffixes ^p12, *H9?i etc.

(c) o Class. Primitive form "Jp3, becoming 1$2..

With pronominal suffixes 'Hpi, etc.

Thus the a class has — in the penultimate.

„ „ i „ „ — or — in the penultimate.
» » ^ >» » — » j>

Remarks.
i. Most S e gholates with — in the penultimate belong
to the a class.
*
2. With suffixes, the penultimate is closed, ,

5/5 ( no ^

1
The ultimate § c ghol in the Absolute is merely added to facilitate pronuncia-
tion, and is not needed before suffixes. It is called a ' helping vowel. So in
'

English we insert a vowel sound between the s and m in such words as ' prism,
'schism '
; but this sound disappears in 'prismatic,' 'schismatic.'
 ' :

SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS (S

K
GHOLATES) 95

3. When the second root-letter is a guttural, the word

has two pathabs ; e.g. ""Ijn, '
lad '
; 'nip, '
his lad.'
When the third root-letter is a guttural, it takes pathah
before it ; e.g. 5HJ,
"*"
'
seed ' ; ^Jnj, '
his seed.' (See Chap.
VI. A. § 2. (d)).
4. The accent falls on the penultimate ; i.e. where it

necessarily was in the monosyllabic forms.

# In pause, — in this syllable usually becomes — ; e.g.

H& TJ-J but ybn}

e
§ 2. Plurals. In the plural all S gholates take the
form of plurals of the first declension e.g. D^p^D {not ;

I
H^ifay), kings D^IDp, books.'
'
In the Construct, and
'
:
'
I

I with the four heavy pronoun suffixes, the original short

'
'

I
vowel reappears under the first letter

e.g. ^TD (not ^57^), 'kings-of . .

." (penultimate
half-open).

^379, '
our kings.'

Q5^? 7?> '

your kings '
(penultimate half-open).

DPPD?*?! ' their kings „ „

For the plural stem, see further, p. 222.

§ 3. Duals. The dual is formed quite regularly, i.e.

by adding DVr to the singular stem e.g. D^57ft, a pair ;

2 'ears/
of kings': Jtfc,
<
ear '
; D^fM,

§ 4. Feminines.
(a)
e
§ gholate forms add H— to the primitive stem
to form the feminine ; e.g. 713^73, '
queen.' In
the singular they present no difficulty : but in

* 1
A few nouns, which strictly belong to the first declension, take a S e gholate

form in the Constr. sing.; e.g. 7|*V, ' side,' Constr. *|T['• *]ri3, 'shoulder,'

Constr^ 9\T\3.

2
The Construct dual therefore is usually "'IJpD (distinguish *3?p> which is

plural). Sometimes, however, the penultimate in the dual becomes half-open in

the Construct and before heavy suffixes,
 '

96 SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS (S

1

(VIOLATES)

the plural they add rc\ - to the masculine plural

stem ; <y;\ JTOyp, '
queens '
; Constr. JTI-7tt.

(J?)
There is a class of feminine nouns, which form
their Absolutes like the feminines of the first

declension in,» HT T
: but in the Construct and with

suffixes, they merely add n— to the stem, and

e
take S gholate forms ; e.g. HD^???, '
kingdom
(first declension in form).
Constr. (n?S?pn) = Khiyi (just as ^Stt =

With suff. ^V^Qi e tc

Plural n^hr272.

#
(These nouns mostly have the prefix — ft or — ft).

(c) Another fairly numerous class of feminine nouns

is of the form rni?, lady, queen '
(rTYUiJ is also
found for the Absolute) ; JTHN, '
cloak.'
These will give little difficulty. A few have pecu-
liarities like fi?r© or l"l.?fr5» ' cloak ' ;
plur.

O^fiS ; but these must be learned from a

lexicon.

VOCABULARY.
(N.B. (a) or (i) after a word means that it has — or —
in its stem.)

TH (
m -)> way, path (a). TV\V£ (f.), maid.
"Q?? (m.), servant (a). 21j? (m.), midst (i).

BJSDj (f.), soul, life (a). ftfo (f.), ear.

TJJJ (m.), child (a). tlHp (m.), holiness.

plj (f.), land (a). n ?0^ ( f-)i
war *

bT) (f.), foot (a). ^???5 (f-)» kingdom.

1JW (m.), lad, attendant (a).

<
My holy hill ' is ^tt^Jg 111 (the-hill-of my-holiness).
4
His warriors '
is ififtD^P ^JN,
 : —

SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS (S

F
GHOLATES) 97

nilJ[il is a S e gholate noun used as a preposition =

•
under, in the place of . . .,' and is generally used with

plural suffixes ; e.g. VT\T\T\ = '

under him, in his stead.'

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into English:

orrar) nnj? nrw TOti*3 itfga Ni?|rn (i)

bx
n«
(2)

rrratpN
pniD ??? ? rrny: 1

(3)
1

i&n35
oyotep
T^n
^
njjSri
nfen-^3 nnw (4) sdstin ^B-Syn nnn^
ntiN-na
v — v :
T'itM
'
v x :
wjtf
t :
(5)
\^ /
:tod?
tt :
toTT-rw
—:

1t*h (7) S^nfey ^O 'HDDSl IMS fc^H (6)

itfjN DST)i?3 ^T T (8) :*nrjM TJ7!"n *!fl ^

t : — t : \-'/ - ' t — v : »t •" ••:—:•

wn toS^i
..T .-
D^rrtto
- T
Dtfto^jJ
T ._«i
1
tt^n
:t (10)
\ /

xmnsn

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) His lad —
her maidens their ears (du.) my feet — —
(du.) —
your books their servants under me — —
their midst. (2) Do not ye speak good words in
the ears of this people. (3) And their warriors
cut off the feet and hands of this man. (4)
Your ways are not my ways. (5) Thou art my
king of righteousness, and I will dwell on thy
holy hill. (6) And it came to pass in those days,
that his young-men sought his life, and they
killedhim where he was (under him). (7) They
have ears and hear not feet, and they walk not ;

1
hv translate 'for.'
9S SECOND DECLENSION NOUNS (S
n
GHOLATES)

in my holy way. (8) If any one (a man) shall

ape from with me, then let me be killed in his
stead. (9) And the servants of the king had
heard him and they went and recounted these
;

things in the ears of their king. (10) Let me

walk (go), I-pray-thee, in thy holy ways all my
days.
 99

CHAPTER XX.
THE INFINITIVES.

§ Each voice has normally two forms of the Infini-

I.

tive, commonly called the Absolute and Construct, though

it is doubtful whether there is really any linguistic con-
nexion between them. Of these, the Construct is much the
commoner, being used with all prepositions and (usually)
wherever the Infinitive is a verbal noun. The Infinitive
Absolute merely gives the idea of the verb undefined in any
way it paints an action, without regard to agent, time, or
;

circumstances. (See further below in § 3).

The Infinitive except in the Hiph'il, iden-
Construct is,

tical in form with the Imperative (which is derived from it).

Qal. Niph'al. Pi'el. Pual. Hiph'il. Hophal. Hithpa'el.

Constr. %!? ^j?H *7E>g (wanting) ^tppH (wanting) htggfln

Absoi.
1
b^p T
f *?toj?3 f^teB ^toj? ^i?D hupri htofcryn

[bbffi Wag
# Remark.
A few Infin. Constr. are formed like fern, nouns of the
first declension ; e.g. the two statives 2HN, '
love/ and
NT,
•t*
'fear,'
'
make PQnN
t — and HMT.
t -: : •
We find H«T^ =
t ,: • :

to fear,' with an accusative. Cp. the form fifcTjjT?, '

to
meet.'
§ 2. Infinitive Construct and its Declension.
{a) It is used without a preposition as the verbal
1
The beginner will find it sufficient at first to learn, of the Absolute Infini-
tives, only the Qal and Hiph'il.
 . ''

ioo THE INFINITIVES

noun; t.g* I Sam. xv. 2 2, lift ^5?? ?^??,
'
hearkening '
is better than sacrifice.'
(U) '
To kill ' is vbp7 (with the penultimate usually
closed ; i.e. '
to pursue ' is usually ^^Ty?, not

f' At the killing of . .

.'
i .

'

\' About the time of the killing of . .

.' ,:

vbp? (penultimate half-open ; i.e ^113. from

^. "^n D^^n-nsi wm VtDpi 2

vr*i <and it

came to pass, when Jezebel killed the prophets,

that . .
.'

(c) The infinitival noun takes pronoun suffixes.

The Qal 7tDj? is declined somewhat like the

e
S gholates in '
— ; it drops and then
its '
—
necessarily takes a full short vowel under the
first root-letter 3
instead of Sh e wa ; e.g. vtpp
(qotli), '
my killing.' The penultimate is half-
4
open, except in TJ /tpj? and (])D?ytD|?, where it is

o^A ,., necessarily closed*

-» /f
\ The Niph'al, Pi el, and Hithp a el drop the — in
declension (after the model of third declension
nouns : see the next chapter).

e.g. ^"Tl5rT!L, ' when I get myself honoured.'

^Wi m y c
speaking.' ^IIM, thy speaking
*

(with the original — reappearing

e
instead of Sh wa).

1
The ^eginner should carefully distinguish the English use of * hearkening
as a noun from its use as an adjective (participle).
2 There is sufficient pause on \T1 (marked by the English comma) to require

Dagesh lene in the next word.

* 3
The ljolem is changeable, the underlying form being Pt3p. The Absolute
was originally /ftp ; therefore the S is here unchangeable, as it represents a

naturally long —
4
^?t3p and DDpftp are sometimes found.

Mea/ae^
\<&
ie of
^
*%\ (
o.
CAMPBELL
Qj %\ COLLECTION
 ; ;

THE INFINITIVES ioi

The Hipliil keeps "*— in declension.

The Suffixes may be either subjectival or objectival
(except in the ist p. sing.: 1 e.g. PwtppiL may =
either at the killing of her,' or
'
at her killing
(some one else).'

(d) The negative with the Infin. Constr. is usually

2
^Frpy?, '
so as not to . .
.'
(the following Infin.
has no ~~v).

e.g. ybtp ^W?, '

(so as) not to hearken.'

§ 3. Infinitive Absolute.
(a) Its commonest use is to emphasise the finite

verb; eg. T7ptt *T^£, with -the -act -of- ruling

thou shalt rule ; i.e. '
thou shalt verily be
king.'
[Cp. iiridvfiiq iiredv/xTjaa, Luke xxii. 15; cp. also
Jas. v. 17.]
* (b) Continued or gradual action is often expressed
by an Infin. Absol. following the finite verb and
combined with the Infin. Absol. of [711 (or some
kindred verb)
e.g. linj?! TlSn Tyil b& *QTjJ, ' they gradually
drew near to the city.'
rbl^ *!p 7H ^7?1 '
an d he went, weeping the
while.'

rtol^) li 7^ ^ v^, '

they went up, weeping the
while.'

(Sometimes in place of the Infin. Absol. T) TTJ we

have the participle ^7^> coupled to a verbal
adjective.)
# (c) A certain number of Infin. Absol. are used
adverbially (especially in the Hiph'il)

1
vpp always = ' my killing (some one else).' 'The killing of me' is

expressed by putting a different suffix on to the verb ; see below, Chapter

XXVI.
2
With }o and 3 the forms are ^3D ^33.
102 THE INFINITIVES
e.g. TX2T\T\, lit. making much,'
'
i.e. greatly, much,
many.
1
lip" !!, lit. making good,' i.e. well.

1TO, quickly.' '

* (d) The Infin. Absol. is frequently used in vivid

utterance for some part of the finite verb. It

simply focuses attention on the verbal notion,

and leaves the hearer to discover the time,
person, etc., of the action.
It is frequently found for the Imper. ; e.g. Deut.
v. 12, ra#n DimN *Vtott5, 'keep the Sabbath-
day.'
Sometimes for the Cohortative; e.g. Isa. xxii. 13,
"in^l h^tt, '
(let us) eat and drink.' Cp. 1 Kings
xxii. 30.
Sometimes it carries on a consecutive narrative,
instead of Waw consec. with the Imperfect; e.g.

Ex. viii. 11, i27".TM "EprT!, '

and he hardened
his heart'

VOCABULARY.

y*tt (m.), seed, literal or ]tt v Tlb^btl, with Infin.,

metaphorical (a). far be it from me

1^11 (f.), sword (a). to do.
t)M
Hit
TT
(m.), silver (a).

(m.), gold.
**"
^^ ^ wv. to-morrow.
Inu,
not> wM 7 ^
1

•1723 (f.),
v J
corpse.
r
.7* , .
T " ,
:
TOn, hither.
Q>J (m.), people ; with
" NT 1
be afraid (usually
rr ^„4 ,

suff. ^V.
nt. , n ..
u rr with Vfi and Infin.).
'
j4 (m.), son ; with suff- •
 THE INFINITIVES 103

EXERCISE.

I. Translate into English:

t!??
135
W
nm
(
2) :
^
t Tpayg
D ^V^
^?'n
^
W?
n *T*?0 (0
ito ?
1

(3)

nhjpp mtj; (4) J^itffc P n?M

,

p
1

^ •otji

Wron dv-i vm (5) n^N TPW ran

iS> ^jjujjf] •si^arrnM nS^N 19*3 dtp
-n« T^tfnn int (6) Pin?-n«i ^p3-n«

j^ip-nw Mggti ny rrottj to^ri ^ (7)

:toW? titon: nroi D^n ^vnnn mtin (8)

vtW? "51795 nip-riN rrirrj Ta'p^ (9)

ibM ? 1
Tunt^ ^i ? mnMi 1
(10) sonVti

1 v x x v • • '— t • : — :

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) And it came to pass, when our warriors killed

their king, that they said, '
Lo ! his kingdom is
ours.' (2) And it came to pass, when we spoke
to him, that he told (said to) his servants to
honour us. (3) And it shall come to pass on
the day of thy fighting with him, that thou shalt.
destroy that city and its sons in its midst. (4)
I will indeed judge between thee and them.

(5) My heart is too heavy for me to speak

( = heavy from speaking). (6) The hand of the
Lord was with him, so that they did not stand x
before him. (7) And it came to pass, when
they cast his son's corpse at his feet, that he
sought to kill them. (8) Far be it from me to
1
Their-not-standing.
104 THt: INFINITIVES

shed the blood of my servants. (9) And he

went to visit him, with (and) his sword in his
hand. (10) Is it to kill me (that) thou hast
2
purposed, 1 as thou didst kill the Egyptian
man ?

1 2
Said in thy heart *l¥D.
 :

105

CHAPTER XXI.

PARTICIPLES AND THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS.

A. Participles.

§ I. The participles are as follows

Qal. Niph'al. Pi'el. Pu'al. Hiph'il. Hoph'al. Hithpa'el.

il'PpBja
T Ll htoto
htspo tK hum bupo
T T
htopnti
L
7^J "
'
: : ,: :
Passive " " ' • " '

Remarks.
1. All the voices, except the Qal and Niph'al, form

their participles by prefixing 72 to the imperfect stem ; e.g.

Pi. Impf. h®$. ;

partic. htt^O. 1
2. The three Passive voices (Niph., Pu., and Hoph.)
take — in the ultimate.

3. The Qal has two participles. vfcDp is its proper

participle = '
killing ' (adjectival), or '
one killing ' (a killer)

=6 awofCTeivcov. probably the only surviving part

v^tO[J is
of an old Passive of the Qal which exists throughout in
Arabic. 2
§ 2. Declension.
(a) Participles with — in the ultimate syllable, drop
it in declension ; e.g. 7t?p ; fern. i"Htpp ; m. plur.

D^tp'p ; with sufT. *hlipt my killers.'

1
This ft may be connected with ''ft ('who?' or 'whosoever'); cp. — ft

and — ft, which are so often prefixed to the first root-letter of the verb stem to

form nouns of the M

first declension ; e.g. ft5L 'ft, 'judgment' ; )fift, 'gift' (jru).
2
Ges. K. (§ 50, a), however, regards it as an 'original verbal noun.'
 —
. ;

106 PARTICIPLES AND THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS

With 7J — D2 — — 15 '
tnc snort vowel in place of
Sh wa e
is — ; e.g. TTv^Pp, '
thy slayer.'

So the Constr. plur. is ^b^p ; e.g. Gen. ix. 10, ^NIT

nirin (lit. the goers-out-of the ark), '
those that
go out of the ark.'

In the Construct singular the — is unchanged ; e.g.

"Vyn HIT 1

,
'
an inhabitant of the city.'

(J?) Participles with — or n — in the ultimate, retain

it in the Absolute forms ; e.g. D'H2D1 honoured

' '

so Hiph'il, D^tpptt.
(c) Feminine Singular. The feminine singular has a
e
second form which is S gholate and is commoner
than the other;
e.g. Ttt'p; fern. rfapp or Tlbtip
b^pft ; fern. tht^Q or th^tS^Q
htopl ; fern, rbttpi or Tlbttpl

B. Third Declension Nouns

Comprise all which have an unchangeable vowel in the
penultimate, and a tone-long — in the ultimate.
§ 1. These are, for the most part, really participles Qal
of a verb ; e.g. tODttt, '
a judge.' They are declined just
like participles, i.e. dropping the —
Constr. sing. tODitf

Absol. plur. D^tt

with suff. n?gft5, ?ppDW, iregW
iV.#— 1^, '
enemy,' makes ^^ (not ^fc).
§ 2. The other third declension nouns, which are not
participial in form, also drop the — in declension ; e.g.

tyiXO, '
altar '
; Constr. sing. rfcft? ; * with suff. 'fiWP,
TO5P, etc. ;
plur. nin^?.
So ND3, throne ' '
; iNp!D, '
his throne.' (N.B.— Dagesh
1
The is usually shortened to __ in the Constr. sing, of these nouns.
 —

PARTICIPLES AND THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS 107

forte is not inserted in sibilants with vocal Sh e wa, when

followed by a guttural. See Chap. V. § 3, Rem. 3). Cp.
also j!l ; with suff. "^l, etc.

There is a class of adjectives, formed from the Pi'el,

stem of verbs, which decline in the same way as these
nouns. They nearly all denote physical infirmities ; e.g.

"W, «
blind '
; D^M, dumb '
; tthtt, «
deaf ( = ttftPT). Plur.

D'HIV, etc. (N.B. Dagesh— forte omitted in 1. ; see Chap.

V. § 3, Rem. 3.)

C. Remarks on certain uses of the Participle.

§ I. The participle is very often used in circumstantial
clauses, i.e. clauses which are not in the consecution, but
give the circumstances of the action (see Chap. XVIII. § 4).
So Gen. xxiv. 62 :
'
Isaac came from the way of the
well ;
for he was dwelling at . . . / — 5- D,tp NIlTl.
Gen. xviii. 8 :
'
Abraham took food and set it before
them, and they ate with him standing beside them . . .
,'

&y&\ DPP^ IK)} mr\. (See, further, in Appendix D).

Note that in such clauses the subject with 1 usually comes
at the beginning.
§ 2. Such clauses are often found to emphasise con-
temporaneity, frequently with the addition of Tl^, 'yet,
still'; cp. Job i. 16, Nl !"»?] "mil? lit "fty, 'one was still

speaking when another came.'

§ 3. n^rr, behold,' when followed by the Present or

'

Future or Imperfect in English, usually takes the participle

in Hebrew; cp. Gen. xxiv. 30, 'And it came to pass when
. ., that he came unto the man and lo he was standing
; !

b y/— ^S? T®9 (*WT) Hart}.

§ 4. The negative with the participle is usually ]^.
This is properly Construct of ]^N, '
nothingness '
; and
(unless it has a pronoun suffix) is generally found in con-
struction with a noun ; e.g. %tiifi tt^N pfcj, '
there is no
one listening.'
 :

i OS PARTICIPLES AND THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS

(Tiy, 712T1, and ]?N all take pronoun suffixes ; see next
chapter.)

VOCABULARY.
BCW (m.), judge. pN, nought. Constr. pH,
l^to (m.), enemy. (With there is not.
2nd p. suff. qp?k) Tiy, yet, still.

\T(b (m.), priest. "TIN, other. Plur. D^nfcJ.

mtn (f.), altar. JTN, where? H2W, whither?

ND? (m.), throne. pNE, whence ?
"Vl^i blind. DJ, also, even.
nm« (f.), ground. D| . . . DJ = both ... and

EXERCISE.
1. Translate into English:

:du} ttrw pai titoa. nsnto "vyn run rn

7N (3) JD'HWl D3 ^mtn-^M tD^ 1
(2)

Dtp iny -g** ntpy nOT«n 15 mn njjii

D^n "nnjj nari (4) twri tthp nyi**
tin? Min *f& (5) :D*nrj|j D^n^st nrjM
n^*i (6) j nin^nn tv wop nam rfcu
o^np? n^n tiVn "idwi cftfigii rroj

on qSttftT; ^tp^ ^ wptf (7) :n^rr|

•toi 051* TJE BJflM ®!?50 ^"M
nmrrn-nN ovrntito n^n (8) jo^qtv^
(10) :TT0^ PTSD? SppjW ^IJ (9) iw?
n^n • x
^zb iNDa-Sy
•• : • : • «.
tin* •
1
D^ntir'
• :
D^Sam
• t : - :

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) I am thy judge. (2) Lo, their priests were
going down thence, both they and their wives.
1
=Each man.
 ;

PARTICIPLES AND THIRD DECLENSION NOUNS 109

(3) Deliver me from all my enemies and my

pursuers, for they are many. (4) The God, who
giveth (use partic.) me all my blessings, will
surely justify me. (5) Lo, the prophets were
speaking evil things in the ears of the king, as
he sat on his throne. While she was speak-
(6)
ing to him, her son sought to slay him with his
sword. (7) Lo, the prophet will speak all the
words of these books in the ears of the people.
(8) There is none that speaketh comfortably-to-
me ( = on-my-heart), or that honoureth me.
(9) He asked them where they dwelt, whence
1

they had come, 2 and whither they were going

and they told him. And he said, Ye are '

honoured in my eyes.'
1
Use direct questions. 2 DHX3 = ye have come.
 no

CHAPTER XXII.

TW, mn, p«, JO, AND 3 WITH SUFFIXES.

"fi^, ]?N, ]P> an ^ m

P art •"*?'?> insert a 2 before the
suffixes of the singular ist and 3rd persons, and of the
plural ist person :

'
me '
is *1— = en-ni).
(

1
him '
is ^— ( = en-hu).
1
her 'is H2— ( = en-hah). 1
1
us ' is M— ( = en-nu).

Sing.
<
(^jn
ist p. c. *rfat
i32n (a)
^n •
"sbd
•v •
-otaat
•

(I am still.) ,_ ;
v '
. (I am not.) (from me.) (like me.)
(Lo, I am.)

2nd p. m. Tpy 33^ ^& qto|

<
W ^ftft
<
(wanting)

3rd p. m. vrfw
<

f. rrniy T '
rwa n-ra^ rrtaa
<
* («) Pause ^3H.

1
There is no Mappiq in the final n 5
as the preceding n (which is assimilated
to 3) was sounded.
 "fW, n ?rr, pN, p, AND ? WITH SUFFIXES ill

Plur.
< <

ist p. c.
^Ttt T

2nd p. m. orniy djjpi etc. °?P V T

f. 15TV p|n IIP (wanting)

3rd p. m. T
D3n
T •
o™ •• T

f. X(af 13* T •• •• T •• T
* <*> Pause HUH. W also Dm 03.

Notes on |to tf/zaf 3.

(a) "'SEM? is supposed by many to have arisen out of

a reduplication of }P, which gave ^tt?to. But it

may be simply for

l,

?|?. ^E| is from 1^3, a

longer form of 3,
1
which is found in poetry.

(b) |?p properly means '

separation.' Hence it =
1
from, away from, some of — .'

3 = ' like.' — 5 . . . —5 = '

as . . . so . .
.' (with
nouns or with pronoun suff ).

VOCABULARY.
"inN (m.), one (adjec. fol- n5$ (Q> year. Plur.

lowing noun). Fern. • T

*%*V? (m.), wilderness.

D^tp, two, with masc. nouns 3Hj3, tear, rend (Impf.

(usually precedes
noun in apposition). tt£i there is. fl^Jj, thou
^N?ip, two, with fern, nouns. art (with partic).

"T^S- (m.), garment (i). ON ^5) Dut (after preced-

py& (m.), righteousness (i). ing negative).

P^^, righteous. ^^"T^, how long?

1
We also find fo3=3, and iDp = 7, in poetry.
 ;

n2 iir, nin, jjh, p, and 3 with suffixes

EXERCISE.
1. Translate into English :

D^-n (2) :dbm ''awi oro •otoa (0

*>nk ttVipjp nS ^nn-ry ( 3) :d|?2 ttftifc}

m-nn rrrriy (4) ixti nton Srpa

^jn *o

71271 (5) jntfea^ TV ttTW nam vSn

ink itrprr 1

id phem •£ nn-n« mnDB

D^ttJjy DM "fl VI EPttJj?!!? ^pN (6) Ji^np
tFjtf o^ntp nqw vn (7) n:n:« o ,,

i?
Y
7?
n$>tf*l top? b? nip tern. ^n-Sa ^5
Ptf52 ttJj?lQ Tfl£q ^9^1 ^in ^?n if^>
\i on ^"^. (9) •n^ 7" 1
I?
?? ^? P$ (8)

tSn nijnQ ^niy (10) :nn« ra 05 nn«

t t :t T -: - :

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) And it came to pass after two years, while he was

still dwelling in the land, that there went unto
him from the wilderness two men with their gar-
ments torn, 1 and two women with them. (2) Lo,
she is still seeking my life, and I, whither shall I
go? (3) He is not speaking good words in my
ears. (4) And he rent his garments and said,
Our warriors are few (say " men of fewness ")
1

and our enemies are stronger than we.' (5) And

(some) of them spoke to me, saying, Beware '

how long art thou not speaking that which is

pleasing to 2 the king ? (6) Far be it from me
'

that I should kill (any) of you but I will surely ;

deliver you from your enemy. (7) There hath

not been 3
any one like thee among all the kings
1
Say, * torn-of (Pass. Partic. Qal) garments.'
2 3
Say, ' that which is good in the eyes of . .
,' H^H.
 : : '

-riy, niri, y$ t ]p, and 5 with suffixes 113

of Israel. (8) Thus shalt thou speak to him,

saying, '
Lo, I am thy servant.' (9) They took
her son from with her and went on (7) their way.
(10) And what have I been able to speak com-
pared with p) you ? (11) And it came to pass,
when the man of God heard that the king had
rent he sent to him saying,
his clothes, that
'
Why hast thou rent thy clothes ? Dost thou
not remember that there is a prophet in Israel ?

GENERAL EXERCISE.
Translate into English

rrn nin^ niTi tpsrs o^ T

^n« vtn

- pin
'X X
njnm
T TT
vt^n
T : • ••
^ >.,...-
in«n
T T
I ...
ne-fw_ nton
.. T T
;

• :- : t : v "t tt t :— :

rr*pS> vipa rrjrt; ^fcrS-j-i5 w»w rvniprta,

, •vpN'n nn^ onS jra owdp nw? :dw

»Wi jd'wd ? D^n trpi7 ^b vbx nan** 1

im-ayi ma •rxi T^rt nana •pan-nN orn

nam t^i vmn'y im nn« im xbn

jvt^n
T
nsn • •• •• •
t^nS '
V ~ -ton
V5
i? ?
' ••
1
^n- •
*h iewi
V -

'
: : - v 1 •• t - •
t t v v -

*r? mbim fn ^ j^nnb nam* ti

ittiN

T^na? "ton -vsn nnw ^tipiS

' v ':);•-: maftj-rntf
- v: •• x - : x x - x

x : - : > : • .. » -; xx : t • •• •• •

<<*)
Elijah. W Impera. from Tj^H. W Ahab.
W Obadiah. W Jezebel.

3
 .

n4 Tiy, nin, pN, p? f

and 5 with suffixes

-: '
: :
- v t : - - t :
'
: r

*?nps Xvrz
-: - •
s
?pgy- ntoy
t t
ntrtrnN
v -:
*3ivh- rtai ' : : •• • : •

ways d^n t -:
nan
t
toidmit
•• -
phif
t
"wn:-nN
wn
• : • • • : : •• • :

wrayt
• : -
itfN
-:
rrim
t
•••
11®
_^ : t • ••
ton*i- :nim
T .

t •• ' .. •• - ;_ t t :

«) Impcrf. of Kfe>J.
T T

<*' *3 . . . *n='as the Lord liveth (I swear) that . . .'

 : ;

H5

CHAPTER XXIII.

ACCENTS AND PAUSE FORMS, ETC.

§ i. The Tone Syllable.

Every * independent word in Hebrew has an accent,
and the syllable on which it falls is called the tone syllable.
More often than not the tone accent is on the last syllable :

it may be on the last but one, but not farther back in the
word.
The tone syllable can sometimes be determined only
by practice, but the following considerations will show in
many cases which it is

i. A long vowel in a closed syllable must be accented

e.g.D'HOT.
ii. A short vowel in an open syllable must be accented ;
2

e.g. ijS6, cra^ft

iii. The fern, termination H— is accented always in

nouns and adjectives 3 e.g. PHYl}. ;

iv. Pronominal suffixes are accented. In disyllabic

suffixes the accent is on the penultimate except in
< <
2nd plur. (OPT— DD"
the case of the 3rd and 1
— ).
e
v. S gholates are accented on the penultimate : all

1
Words joined together by Maqqeph have only one main accent between
them.
2
But it is sufficient if the syllable bears the counter-tone, Metheg (on which
< <
see below in § 5) ; e.g. |i"inS Such a word as 3~inn is only possible because
the n is virtually doubled.
3
H — ) denoting motion towards, is not usually accented,
 ; . . .

n6 ACCENTS AND PAUSE FORMS, ETC.

other nouns on the ultimate ; e.g. 7n'N, but

vi. The accent in verbs is, in general, on the syllable

which contains the second root-letter (except
after Waw consecutive) ; e.g. JFl/tpp.

§ 2. Accents.
Accents are divided into two classes, disjunctive and
conjunctive, the former answering to marks of punctuation
in English. There are eighteen disjunctive and seven
conjunctive accents but for practical purposes only the
;

most important of the former come into consideration.

These are
(i) Silluq ('end'), marking the last accented syllable
in the sentence :
x
sign —
(2) 'Athnah (' breathing space '), marking the chief

logical break in the sentence: sign —

(3) Zaqeph qat5n, which may occur as often as
required, marking a break less than that ol

'Athnah : sign —
2
Every verse has Silluq ; and all, except the very
shortest, have 'Athnah

e.g. Gen. xi. 9, ^o^b to^rj-nN D^gteiT*riD nQD?l

Itt : Iv v •• • : -: - •„• -
('And the chief of the butlers recounted his dream to
Joseph and he said to him, (It was) in my dream, and
;

lo, a vine before me.')

§ 3. Pause Forms.
'Athnab and Silluq always, and Zaqeph qaton 3 rarely,
have the effect of throwing the word, in which they occur,
into what is called a pause form i.e. of making its ' ;

pronunciation slower, by laying special stress upon it.

1
The last word is followed by the verse-divider (full stop), : , which is called
Soph Pasviq.
2
Three books (Psalms, Proverbs, and Job) have a different accentual system.
3
When a pause form occurs with Zaqeph qaton, attention is generally drawn
7
to it by a Massoretic note ; e.g. Gen. xi. 3, pfcy» with the note p 'D Y^p
(*qamec with Zaqeph qaton').
 ; : ;

ACCENTS AND PAUSE FORMS, ETC. 117

Of the various modifications caused by pause, the

following are the most important

(1) — in the tone syllable becomes — as a rule; e.g.

vttp becomes 7tDp ; D^ becomes D^to.

In S e gholates which have — in the penultimate, it

usually becomes — in pause ; e.g.

<
^"H becomes
^"Vl (
DUt 1/ft is the same in pause).

(2) Before the suffix TJ — , in both nouns and verbs, an

accented — x
takes the place of the preceding
vocal Sh e wa ; e.g. THll becomes 7P2TT: and
Tptjp^ (yiktolka, l
he will kill thee ') becomes

But in prepositions, etc., with suffixes, the pause

form of the 2nd pers. masc. sing, is usually
identical with that of the 2nd pers. fern. ; e.g.

TjrYN, pause ^llN ; TJ7 becomes 1J7. (But TJftfc,

in pause TJttft.)

(3) In verbal forms, a full vowel that has dropped out

reappears and bears the tone

e.g. *ht$pT ( = AbS) becomes Attj?

^t^ ( = WS#) „ WOtp!

* (4) In certain words, the tone is shifted to the
penultimate
< <

°t-
e.e: nflN becomes nfiN,
T It'
and TlDV
T - C
>
now ')
'
becomes TlUV.
T T

td'dn
T
„
" ^ia
'IT
*(5) The displacement of the accent by Waw con-
secutive no longer takes place.

tbttp*)
t —: 't :
becomes fiSttpl
t it't s !

§ 4. Two accented syllables rarely follow each other,

unless they are divided by a disjunctive accent. The
1
i.e. the word reverts to its primitive form.
 : ;

nS ACCKNTS AND PAUSE FORMS, KTC.

difficulty is usually overcome, either by forcing back the

first of the two (a long vowel in a final shut syllable being

then shortened), e.g. TJ? ^QttfTl ; or by using Maqqeph, and

<

dispensing with the first of the two accents ; e.g. PTl"^"^

(Gen. ix. 7).

§ Metheg", meaning
5. bridle/ is not properly an
accent but is a sign which accompanies vowels in some
;

open, unaccented syllables to mark a certain amount of

pause or secondary stress on them. It is a sign that the
voice must halt and do full justice to the vowel e.g. in ;

Dp^Il'vSl (' your God ') the accent is on the ultimate ; but
the open two places in front, has in pronunciation a
*
,

secondary stress, and may be called a counter-tone (cp. in

English a word like anti-vivisectionist). (

The sign of Metheg is the same as that of Silluq (— )

but it does not throw a word into a pause form.
Its chief uses are as follows

(1) to lay stress on a vowel in an open syllable

standing two places 2 from the tone e.g. ;

.. T| ..J •
T |...

(2) to lay stress on a long vowel separated by vocal

She wa from the tone; '
e.g.
& iTTttp.
t : 'it
Hence it is

possible to distinguish rHDN (a-klah), *

she ate,'

from fl^N (ok-lah), 'food'; or ^fcTfn (for

WTpl
from W1J), and they feared,' from *Tp1 <

(from HNn), and they saw.' '

(3) to emphasise any vowel before a hateph vowel ;

e.g. 1$}^ D^5$.

* Remark.
Metheg is found wherever a prefix comes before the
sacred name t
e.g. 7V\7Vh
7V\TP,:'<-> |- T ;
>
2
and in all parts of TVT\
1 TT
1
Or if this syllable is closed, on any vowel in an open syllable farther from
the tone ; e.g. tfJEnKH.
2 Chap.
It will be remembered that this is pronounced "OIK? (for ^'"IX}5 ), see

X. § 3. (a).
 —

ACCENTS AND PAUSE FORMS, ETC. 1

19

(' to be ') and HTT (' to live '), in which the first H or Jl has
quiescent Sh e wa e.g. TVtJf he will be.'
;
mi
'

§ 6. Note on the Massoretic terms Q e re and K e

thiv.

The Massoretes, in their marginal notes, frequently give

alternative readings, which they mark as *HjJ to be read '),

preferring them to the 2.^05, *•*• what is ' written ' in the
text. In such cases they attach the vowels, which belong
to the *3p, to the consonants written in the text, just as

they point the sacred name ITirP with the vowels of ^"TN,

or occasionally with those of D^PwN (HiPP). Another

e e
similar '
Q re perpetuum ' {i.e. constant Q re, which needs
no marginal note) is '
Jerusalem/ which appears in the
text as DSttftT ; here the K thive
is DbtfTV, but the Q e
re
e
D'JvtfWj. For an example of a Q re given in the margin,
cp. Gen. xxxiv. 3, where we have "}JJ5lJ> with the note
Hp m^n (i.e. fTJgjn is to be read, and not "WH, which
is the K thiv). e

*§ 7. Raphe (HD^, '

weak ') is a horizontal line placed
over a letter to call attention to the omission of a Dagesh
or Mappiq.

EXERCISE.
1. Read through the Hebrew extract given after the
last chapter marking Metheg, 'Athnah, and Silluq,
(p. 1 1 3),
and put down any words that change their forms in pause.
2. Give the pause forms of
n^pg— *V?3— *%£?— W38— ™?«— TT5. TTT
•sjjA— nwj—^P—Atpp—uVeap
 : :

120 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV.

NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV.

The beginner is advised at this point to read some
chapters of the Hebrew Bible, in order to familiarise
himself, not only with what he has already learnt, but also
with the chief forms of the weak verbs, before he proceeds
to commit these to memory. He should carefully parse
every verb, with the aid of the Grammar and Dictionary.
He should carefully note the following points

A. In | D 1 verbs, when the 2

e
has quiescent Sh wa, it is

assimilated to the following consonant ; e.g. vD2 ; Impf.

(SsjP =) bfr (with Dagesh forte).

B. In *•
D verbs, the Impf. has usually two £eres ; e.g.

nUT 1

; Impf. Itt5\ The Infin. Constr. with b is nitf(S), a

e
S gholate noun.
C. In H v verbs
(i) the H disappears before vowel afformatives ; e.g.

HyJ, 3rd pers. plur. t?Z.

(2) the Impfs. of all voices end in 71— ; e.g. Impf.

Qal n ?^.1

(3) in the 2nd and 1st pers. of the Perfects, the

Jl — becomes ^ ; e.g. 2nd masc. sing. Perf. Qal

T ' T

D. In 1 y verbs, if we take Wp (Inf. Constr.) as a type,

the Impf. Qal is D^, which with Waw consec. appears as

<

Dp*5 (way-yaqom). (These verbs are given in dictionaries

under the form of the Infin. Constr.)

Hiph'il Perf. D^j?!!, Impf. D^ (long vowel in pen-
ultimate). (Akin to these verbs are the ^ V verbs.)

E. In "D guttural verbs, the guttural usually takes a

compound Sh e wa in place of a quiescent and the previous ;

1
For the meaning of f"s verbs, etc., see above, Chap. XV. B. § 2,

Rem. 1.
 ;

NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV. 121

vowel is assimilated to the vowel in the compound Sh e wa

e.g. 15^, Impf. Qal ifrgT
F. The direct object to the verb, if a pronoun, is usually
attached to it as a suffix ; e.g. TF)T>TP|7?, '
they will kill thee.'
In order to help the beginner, grammatical notes on
Gen. xl.-xliv. are appended.
(1V.B. —(£) attached to the number of a chapter denotes
that the reference is to a chapter in this Grammar.)

Chap. XL.
i. ilpttto. Constr. of iTjHjfo Hiph. Part. (plur. D^tfo,
ver. 2).

2. VD^ID, '
his eunuchs '
; here the — is ' fixed,' i.e.
e
not thinned to vocal Sh wa : contrast the con-
struct in ver. 7.

3. ]JW- From J]1J

(see Paradigm of ]
Q verbs).
Dlpft. Construct : the following relative clause
stands for the Absolute.

4 . m, 3rd piur. of r^rv,

6. Nijl. Impf. Qal of NflSL.

M151 = ilfcf^l. In ft"b verbs the ft— of the Impf.

is cut off after Waw consec.

10. M1J1. (K e thiv

NVT, Q e re fcOJl) is usually of
common gender in the Pentateuch.
nm.35. Fern. Part. Qal HID (with prep. D).

nn?^. 3rd fern. sing. Perf. Qal ftb% (note the

n). Transl. ' its-blossom went-up ').

11. nj?M1. Impf. Qal of 11)27, which in this tense

behaves as if it were Pip J (see note A above).
]Jl$1. See note on ver. 3.

13. ?|51tprj1 = ^tpTT) (see note D above), with pronoun

suffix (see note F).

n^ll. See note C. (3) above.

 . . :

[22 NOTES ON GENESIS XL. XLIV.

^ilptpft. Nouns and participles in H— take ^H—

for 3rd masc. sing, suffix.

14. ^OlrT- i.e. ^—.TH5J (^— 1st pers. sing, pronoun

suffix).

^0«?im. In the Hiph. of *"b verbs, the — "•

appears as i.

15. toto. From D^ (see Paradigm of l"y and ^>

verbs).

1 7. iTtoJflD. Constr. of Htt^E (noun from fifoy).

1 8.
J^Q. Apocopated (z>. shortened) form of HJg *1
' '

See note on ver. 6 above, and note is.

20. JTVpil. Anomalous Hoph'al Infin. Constr. of i?\
Note that it takes an Accus. though it is

Passive.

tojfflp Cp. J5?51

in ver. 18.
^n(^L). Constr. of TpR
21. ItW.
V T_
i.e. l^tl? 1
• T
with Waw consec. See note D.
23. ^HTOW. Note that (1) the Impf. Qal of TOU? is

UStt^, not TOtt^ ; so with all 7 guttural verbs

(2) the pronoun suffix causes the preceding —

to be lengthened to —

Chap. XLI.
2. fh$\ Fern. plur. of rh^ (Partic. Qal).

n^JHiT). From H^"J : see Paradigm of T\h verbs.

4. rrj^D^m Impf. Qal of *??N. Cp. 1B«\ 'he

will say.'

5. Jtf^\ Pause form of ]tt5—

rV*3tf. Fern, of tJttJ.

6. rfiDVTttft. Constr. fern. plur. Passive Partic. Qal.

7. Jljybliill- See note (1.) on xl. 23.

9. 'Wtpn. From NtpH (note plural of 2nd declension

form).
 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV. 123

11. n^?n2\ Note Cohortative used with Waw

consec. in the 1st person.
fr^PP. 1 is frequently pointed with — , when a
disjunctive accent falls on the next syllable.

12. s
0vJlJnp^1. The ultimate syllable of the verb is

it is joined to the next word

shortened, because
by Maqqeph, and therefore has no accent.

13. l^tfn. See note D. This is the so-called 'Im-

personal' use of the 3rd person (cp. French
1
on ') ; i.e. the subject is indefinite.

14. VT^TJl. U. VTWW. See note D.

H ?5^1 = n?3*!l (— and furtive Pathah contract into
— in / guttural verbs, except in the Part,
and Inf.).

18. Cp. ver. 2.

19. V]?. Prep. 7 with — . See note on 1 in ver. 1 1.

21. rfcfaffl.
T T -
See xl. 6.

nn-]p. Rare form of \1f$.

ft

V*T\1. In the Niph. of ^ D verbs (as in all parts

where the *] follows a preformative), the *•

appears as \ Cp. Hiph. in xl. 14.

irrW"55. From nwp ( J n*rp.

22. N^NT 'Apocopated' for iHJ*jMJ.

24. TDfol. "V2N' n

in the 1st pers. sing, gives "V3N
(with only one N). In the 1st pers. with Waw
consec. the accent is not drawn back on to

the penultimate (hence Metheg) ; hence the —

remains and does not become — (contrast
<

T§Q. See note A.

26. JT1D. We should probably read filBH.

28. n^H. Hiph. — due to \

29. n^SL. Fern. Partic. fctfSL.
 .

124 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV.

30. V2,Tl, Perf. Qal Dip. Note that the Partic. and
Perf. are the same in form.

31. JTW. See notes on vv. 21 and 14.

s
32. Hi2lL n. The Infin. Constr. of all voices of H 7
verbs ends in Hi —
JttJ. Part. Niph. of p3.

^POJ- Note that, though the guttural refuses

Dagesh forte, the previous — is not lengthened
to - before H, Jl, or V ; it is before N and "1

(cp. rules for the article).

33- N"V. Apocopated for )W^ (see note on ver. 22).
The Jussive is usually apocopated.
plj. Cp. ]"ta in ver. 32.
^nJTttn. Hiph. of IVttJ (see Paradigm of W and
*•
V verbs), with suffix VI—. Note that when
the verb ends in a consonant, the pronoun
suffix takes a helping vowel ; this is — or —
in the Perfect (see xl. 14); — in the Impf.
34. iftejj \ Jussive, yet not apocopated ; this is rare.

36. n^^nn. See note on ver. 2.

7.S. nt3. For the — , see notes on vv. 19 and 11.

ynin. Seexl. 14.

40. T9- From r\B (see Chap. XXXIII. (£))•

pff[. See note A.

41. nb»n. Impera. Qal.
42. "10*1.
~ T~ For "1D^,
T"
cp. xl. 21.
" J'
DW. Qal ; see Paradigm of 1 V and ^ V verbs.

43. Jink See Chap. XX. § 3. (d) (G).

45. MJ*J. See note B.

46. n^ip. Numerals over twenty take the noun in the

singular (lit. '

thirty times a year ').

47. to^m Cp. xl. 20.

49. n^n. See Chap. XX. § 3. 00 (£)•

 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV. 125

50. *7vJ. Anomalous pause form (Massoretic note =

1
Lamedh with Qamee '). Note the sing, before
a plur. subject. The verb, when it comes first,
is frequently put in the 3rd masc. sing., though
the subject be fern, or plur. (see Appendix A).

51. OBJJ. Anomalous for WJ, i.e. ^— !"»#? ; cp.

^Ipll, ver. 52.

53- »"^0 = ' there was.'

54. nj^n^l. Hiph. of bbri (see Paradigm of VV

verbs).

D)17. Pause for CHS.

55. ^yp. Imperat. The Impf. is ^7\
Chap. XLII.
1. W)51. See xl. 6. (Cp. xli. 22.)

2. Vn. Plur. of TJ (Impera.). See note Z?.

rfitoj. See note D,

3.

TIN. See Chap. XXXIII. (6).

4

6. YinriW. From HllttJ; see Chap. XXVI. Rem.

6(G).
7. D^551 See note A, and last note on xli. 33.

9. tDJlS = '
about them.'

n. ^5. From hi (verbal root 775).

13. WJM. See Chap. XXXIII. (£)•

14. NIPT = i/cecvo.

15. DM in oaths is equivalent to a negative, 'ye

'

shall not . .
.'
See Appendix B (6), where

TT is also explained.

16. nj^\ See on xl. II.

^5 (or ttS ON) in oaths is equivalent to a strong

affirmative.

19. t£f»m. See Chap. XXXIII. ((7).

 .

126 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV.

21. "PnN *?N ttJ^M. Lit. 'each to his brother'; i.e.

to one another.

nil*.
~ T
Note that the —T
is fixed because the root

is "Ttt and the noun (ITlS = ) PP2 and a ;

which is due to compensation is usually fixed.

23. "T^D- Hiph. Partic. ^h or \*b.

24. abn. impf. Qai mo.

;jl351. Apocopated from PT55*1.

lOT.
T T—
See note D.
25. TJE1 Apocopated for iTJf^
INT^I Note that ft, 5, and S often omit Dagesh
forte, as \ does. Cp. iwjnjini in ver. 2 1

nrb. Infin. Constr. of Jfti ( = HjnS).

tl?3?5\ Impersonal; see on xli. 13.

26. *lfc^l. Dagesh forte is not written in a sibilant

with vocal Sh e wa, when a guttural follows.

27. ipljL. See Chap. XXXIII. (67).

28. ntL^n. Hoph'al of rtttf. Cp. Hiph'il (note Z>).

2Q. nSHN. z>. the Construct with the locative H—

(which is unaccented),
nipn. Partic. Qal TT$).

33- SHN. See note B, and note on xli. 14.

^rnn. Special form of Hiph. of TO ; see

dictionary.

^)lp. Imperat. (Impf. is HjT).

35. D^jTHE. Partic. Hiph. p"H. Cp. note on ver. 23.

tt^N = each ' ; note its position.

36. IHpn. Pause form.

H2 v5 = 175 (iravTa ravra).

37. rTOfi. See note D.

13MX1D. ^— (like ^H—) = '
him,' with Impf.

mn. Cohortative Impera. (Impf. is ]1V).

 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV. 127
//

38. r\Q. Note stativc form of 1 V verb.

1
ill ?. J 111.

Chap. XLIII.

3. iyn. Hiph. Inf. Absol. of Tiy.

6. lift
T X
7 with accent on ultimate and therefore no
Dagesh in the ft so found before ; gutturals, to
emphasise the ultimate.
E^^lJ- See Paradigm of VV verbs.

Note use of Impf. were we to know

'

7. yjl. ;
'
?

9. ^3tt?j?2Jl. J?
usually does Dagesh forte not take
(here the line over it is Raphe (see Chap. XXIII.

§ 7 (£))• Cp. notes on xlii. 25 and 26.

VJlN^in. Note the •
— before 2nd and 1st pers.

1
Perf.Hiph. of
him with Perfects.
'
verbs. W 1— ( = *lH—) =

VJ^&rTl. J ^\ Verbs beginning with ^ are

often conjugated like ]
D verbs in the Hiph.
10. ^n?^n^r\n from PTntt ( 7 guttural verb, because
final PI is not quiescent). Note reduplication
of ft in Hithpa'el, marked by calling the form a
Hithpalpel.
^3 (the second) = '
surely.'

Jit. Note this idiomatic use of T\\ indeclinable be-

fore definitions of time (' this twenty years/ etc.).

1 2. atthorr. Anomalous for l^Efi

(Hoph'al Partic).
Massoretic note = '
the Shin with Pathah.'

14. 'Httf. Traditional derivation is — tt) with Dagesh

forte = HtTN, and *H, ' sufficiency '
Al-
; i.e. *

mighty.' This is unlikely ;

perhaps the root is
lit!?, and the word = ' destroyer,' '
waster.'

^HN. Perhaps read ^HNiT

VTOttJ.
• it t
:
Note pause
L
form of 'Wittf.
t • :

15. inj?*!. See note on ver. 9.

 .,

128 NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV.

1 6. nip^). The only case of a 7 guttural verb with

an Impf. or Impera. in *

1 8. ring"?. j*D verbs mostly take a S e gholate Infin.

Constr., dropping the 2 ; e.g. ttJjJ, Inf. Constr.
ntl^(^). So n\h makes Inf. Constr. HlTg.
19. nriQ is used prepositionally ; see Chap. XIII. § 3.

Iff) (G).

22. Dto.
T
JffiD.
26. WJ{3#1. See xlii. 6.

28. *nj?*l. Impf. Qal TTj? (not common form in yV

verbs).

29. teM. From DM ( J DOM).

^?n\ Anomalous for ^JIT*; £4 |Hj (pll) with
suffix. The ] naturally takes Dagesh forte
where possible hence the preceding vowel must
;

be shortened, being in an unaccented syllable.

32. p7DV. 75V is the form used as Impf. of b^P
(perhaps a Hoph'al form). Note the ]1 —
usually only found for 1 — in emphatic utter-
ances or a lofty style.

33. in^il^. From PTtt.fi. Notice it is not JlDfi with

quiescent H — ; i.e. it is a v guttural verb, not a
H 7 verb and does not drop
; the H before 1 —
1i"TJH. From iT^I. For the form, see note on
xl. 13 ; and for the phrase, see xlii. 21.

34. ^TjJrn. Apocopated form of n3f]fi1.

Chap. XLIV.
1. riMtp. Inf. Constr. ssftfctiD; see note on xliii. 18.

3. TIN. Perf. Qal (stative). Note the two circum-

stantial clauses,beginning with 1 and the
subject; see Appendix D. This construction
emphasises the simultaneity of the two clauses,
 . ;.

NOTES ON GENESIS XL.-XLIV. 129

4. Again we have two clauses almost simultaneous

they had just gone out
1
. .
.'

^rnrj ^ '> is another circumstantial clause (with-

out the Copula), used adverbially.
5. nfltp\ Frequentative Impf.
Dilinn. See xliii. 6.

6. DJJRl Hiph. with suffix.

7. ^!H\ Impf. gives tone of politeness.

8. ^l^tpn. See note on xliii. 9.

9. tyty). Notice 1 introducing the apodosis. (For

IT'
—
see on xli. 11.)'
,

10. "T?y. Pause form.

12. /ftH. J 77^ ; not ce i tne two circumstantial
clauses without the copula (cp. *lp*rntl N7 in
ver. 4) ; transl. '
beginning at the eldest . .
.'

1 3. Dii/^ip. D— for Drr— , as often in plurals in Hi—

16. |7TO??.
J |TTC (see Chap. XV. B. § 3. (b) (£)).

Notice p — for p —
18. ^H\ Apocopated form of iTJtJJ.

22. 1UT). Notice this way of putting a conditional

sentence but :
'
if he leaves his father, then he
will die.'

23. pDpn. Hiph. *p\

26. r\TY7. See note Z?. This S e gholate form of Infin.

Constr. is practically confined to ] D and **

D
verbs.

27. VllfJN. See Chap. XXXIII. (6).

28. *pTD. Note the Inf. Absol. Qal to add emphasis
to a Pu'al.

29. VTljT). PHf? drops its ultimate syllable before a

pronoun suffix, and adds VT— (
c
him ').

3 1 . ri^HI = '
then it will happen.'

33- ')?!• Apocopated form (Jussive).

 ;

130

CHAPTER XXIV.
PE NUN VERBS.

(See Paradigm C.)

e.g. ttfoj, '

draw near '
; 7B3, fall.'

§ I. We have already seen instances of the dropping

out of J after a full vowel, where its Sh e wa is quiescent : e.g.

Dttf"]p becoming D^?, etc.

Similarly in 13 D verbs, when a preform ative is added to

the root and the 2 does not carry a full vowel, the latter is

assimilated to the second root-letter

e.g. Impf. Qal W^T becomes tttiP.
1

Perf. Niph. #§3? „ #3? ; but Impf. ttgl be-

cause the 3 here carries a full vowel.
Perf. Hiph. ttton ; Impf. ttJigj; Jussive, #£.
Perf. Hoph. t2)5H (always — D, not — II, in these
verbs).
I
§ 2. In the Imperative Qal, Stative verbs and others
which take —
in the Imperfect drop the 2 eg. ttJjJ ;

becomes tij. But verbs which take '

— in the Impf.
usually retain the 2 ; e.g. v ^.
5

§ 3. In the Infinitive Construct Qal those verbs drop

the — 2 which do so in the Imperative ; they then add T\—
to the stem ; eg. toj gives iy0%, and this behaves like the

S e gholates (e.g. p*l?)> becoming fitf 31.

1
This assimilation is almost invariable except before J"l; e.g. !in3\ *
he will

drive.'
 PE NUN VERBS 131

h (to) before this S e gholate Infin. is always pointed with

— (the accent being on the penultimate of the Infin.) ; e.g.

ntpSS, ' to draw nigh.' (But ^nt#j7, ' for my drawing nigh.')

Verbs which have

'

— in the Imperf. make the Infin.

Constr. in the ordinary way ; e.g. vE57> '

to fall.' Note
that 2 is retained.

§ 4. Two verbs call for special mention, T\\T), '

take,'

and ]0J> 'give.'

(a) Tip; in the Impf, Impera., and Infin. Constr. Qal,

and in the I mpf. H oph al, is treated as if it were
nj2J ; eg. Impf. Qal H^*J; Impera. fig; Infin.

Constr. r\nj7(v), where the two pathahs are due

to the guttural H (cp. "W)- ' My taking ' is

ijni$. Impf. Hoph. rig*.

(3) ]r0 assimilates its final }, where it is pointed with

e
quiescent Sh wa ; e.g. P&T& becomes jHHJ.
In the Impf. and Impera. Qal it takes — in the
final syllable ; JJ^V '
he will give.' Impera. ]£).

The Infin. Constr. P&P* becomes fiQ)£l = T\T\ ; with

Suff. Wl, etc. '
To give '
is nrh.
Note. — NtoJ, Infin. Constr. UNto becomes JlNltp, but
with h nxtihi
t
1
T ..

VOCABULARY.
t0 give, set, put per- 1012 (Hiph.), to gaze on, a/#£
V?3, ;

mit (with Accus. Accus. ; to show regard

and Infin.). to, with 7N.
$212, to draw near. 3tr>2 (Hiph.), to overtake.

^35, to smite. 7^2 (Hiph.), to deliver.

Nt"2, to lift up. Impf. "02 (Hiph.), to tell, announce.
Nti7\ VU?B (m.), transgression (i).

7 Mttj to forgive. ViNtjJ ( m .) f Sheol, the grave.,

1
3rd and 2nd p. fern. plur. n3fln. 2
After 2 (and D), riKB>3.
132 PE NUN VERBS

EXERCISE.
A. i. Translate into English :

•*nh ]F> (2) :^^V nn^rn-nN Witt bx (1)

nnpn
- I- •
wrt t : i
wv : it
(3) :on^«iv •• -:
ntfcta
v T
•.•

•^-ywi
v vlT
I
tfaw
- v It
ink
A
^tz?«i
• - it
(4)
VTV :teD2rnn
- 1 :

oytiB-na onb Mtw

W
75^1
....

t t
, t:

"WN-riN
v -: v
aSn (6) :onN
"Oint> -ran
-

*)DgDn-nN v? ^05 Tt*\ (7) :on^ ^5 TJ33?

. ...

• 1-
T

••.
(5)

-: \
jfiMrr-riN
VIT .
.

/ it

ogj5 (8) ipr*n DtDrrnN "ebb M 3"^0i? "19*9

•• t '
: t : •
••
t - 1- a- - t ••

wp\ ^bgn rrawM r?j?;n 9 pSv ^i7T *risi ( )

nf5 pisn ^ Sbt^i (10) n^n-*?y "info :

n&N
t
nnpS
_ '-t
•
^n nriN
t- ^ ^yA*-
nton :• '•• •

1
Pause form of "IDN S V

2. Translate into Hebrew :

(t) Deliver me. I will deliver thee from the hand

of enemy.
thine Thou shalt be delivered.
(2) Give ye glory to the Lord. (3) I will not
give you that which is mine. (4) And it came
to pass, when I gave the book to him, that he
took from me, without (use pN) hearing my
it

words. (5) Draw ye nigh, that I may tell you

that which happened in my days. (6) They
went down to the grave, for their transgression
overtook them. (7) They were afraid to draw
nigh and to look upon him. (8) And he said
to him, Pray give me thy son as (7) a servant.'
'

And he said, Far be it from me to give him to '

thee. (9) And he showed regard unto us, and

was gracious unto us ( = lifted up our faces).
 — « '
.

PE NUN VERBS 133

(10) And he ground before him and

fell to the
said, '
Where are thine enemies, my Lord the
king ? Did they not purpose (say in their heart)
to smite thee ? and lo ! they are not (use ^N).'

EXERCISE.
# B. i. Translate into English:

: onn« aw^N "nriN inn^-n« iron vttfa m

^ n^Sn (3) !Tn« ntf« d^i rrry nsn

: \~/ 'it - -: - -: 1- v ... T :l

..

CrtpBH
T -
^ Ifhn
'av -
Sy&
- T^W v t
^- (5)
^ J/
nsnan-
nm wy
i • :
•• ' : It : •

wn
'-- (6)
\ /
j win
i
trip
v' - :
- t t
"roy *•
nnN
t
^tf - •• -:

fir to (7)
I
.. \/ /
nnyo nam
. T T
nsn
T
wr*i
T
aTOn-na
- - :
1 -: l
•• •• ••— .

onsn xnNn iN t*l mirai i^mn mm 1

nnnt?»i ^nn n^np? urajn (8) Dtp ttttjtps, :

v •• - V-7 ' it: •• •• :

•-::•- t - •-

p? torn *ryya asp mm ijs^n-nN ]irwn

J^D nnitan ? ]in^n-n^ ttpan
1

^i tjign
Ski m^na toajn-^M Tftt^-Sy vhizn (10)
ntt^n
2. Translate into Hebrew :

(i) O that this people (were) in my hand !

(2) And
he wept, and thus he said in his going, My son, '

my son, would that I had died instead of thee !

(3) And they smote each his neighbour, and

their enemies fled. (4) And he said, Take '

(fern.), I prithee, a little water that I may drink '

1
Note this way of expressing O '
that . . . ,' following by an Accusative of
the noun or Inf. Constr., rarely by a Perf. or Impf.
134 PE NUN VERBS
and she went to take it. (5) And he said to
his father, 'My head! my head!' And he said
to the lad, 'Bear him (NftE) to his mother.'
(6) And he said to one of the young men, '
Go
near, fall upon him
and he smote him, and he
' ;

died. (7) he And

caused (it) to touch on my

mouth, and he said, Lo, this hath touched on '

thy lips, and thine iniquity shall depart. (8) And

he planted a tree there, and he called on the
name of the Lord. (9) Let there be taken
(Pu'al) now a little water, and wash your feet.
(10) My giving her to thee is better than my
giving her to another man. (11) And he asked
of (at) the Lord, saying, '
If I pursue after him,
shall I overtake him ? ' And he said to him,
1
Pursue, for thou shalt verily overtake, and shalt
verily deliver.' (12) Is it (too) little thy taking
my husband, and wilt thou take also the things
of my son? (13) And she vowed a vow and
said, O Lord, if thou wilt indeed look on the
'

affliction of Thine handmaid and wilt give unto

me a son, then I will give him unto Thee all the
days of his life.'
 : ; ;

'35

CHAPTER XXV.
^Q VERBS.

(See Paradigm /.)

A. Verbs originally V'd.

§ I. The majority of ^ D verbs in Hebrew began

originally with a —\ which, however, is very rarely found
except in those voices which take preformatives. The "•

when initial, is retained ; i.e. in the Qal, Pi'el, and Pu'al.

§ Those which originally began with 1 are divided

2.

into two classes according to the way in which the Im-

perfect Qal is formed.
(a) Verbs which have in the Impf. wholly rejected the
initial Waw : they have in the penultimate an
unchangeable £ere ; and in the ultimate a change-
able £ere, or, before a final guttural, Pathah
e.g. 1^, !#», 3rd fern. pi. PEJttJll ; Impera. itf

The commonest of these are

ltT\ to sit, dwell. }TP, to know.
Tt\ to go down. N!£, to go out.
T?\
— ft to beget,
O bear.
'

^?71, '
to go,' is treated as one of these verbs except in
the Perf. and Inf. Absol. Qal, and in the Hithpa'el.
A-V- ,
(b) Verbs which in the Impf. change 1 to *•
; these are
mostly stative verbs, and the Impf. is formed
just like the Impf. of strong stative verbs
 : :

136 * B VKRBS

&& tth*!; Impera. tth (the second •»

of the [mpf,
being vocalic).
N"!^, N"V? (long vowel necessary before quiescent
M— )•

The commonest of these are

UTP, to inherit, possess. F|}T, to be weary.
NT, to fear. )t£, to fall asleep.

YJP, to take counsel.

§ 3. Outside the Impf. and Impera.
two Qal, these
classes coalesce. The Infin. Construct Qal has the form
e
of a S gholate noun, as in ] D verbs : the initial *•
is dropped,
and the fern, suffix Jt — is added ;

e.g. Ittfy (J^Ltf = ) mtf

031 (##"! = ) rieh

jn\ (run = ) nm
T> with the Infin. takes — (cf. Chap. XXIV. § 3); £.£-.

1
H^ttfr, '
to dwell.' But V^UP ?, '
for my dwelling.'

Remarks.
1. The Infin. Constr. of N!T\
,TT
J1N2
V V
contracts to nN2
(with suff. ifiNS, etc.).

2. The Infin. T?n. ^ ^D ls rare and

Constr. of >

n57(v) is much more common. With suff. ^5/ (not

3. 70^, '
be able,' is irregular. The only Impf. used
is 75^, which is a Hoph'al in form. Infin. Constr. iT?b^.
# 4. The Infin. Constr. of NT is occas. NT, but more
often HNT (see Chap. XX.
Remark). § 1,
e

§ 4. Niph'al, Hiptril, Hoph al. These voices show

the original 1 after the verbal preform atives
Niplial. The original lUT}? 1 appears as Sttfa (from Ittfj).

1
It will be remembered that the first vowel of the NipKal, as of the Pi'el and
Hiph'il, was originally a, which has been thinned down to 1 : so ?pp3 is more
original than fy?j?J. For 1— becoming i— , cp. 1D lD ! = 1D1D (inpiD).
 ; ; ;

1 D VERBS 137

The Impf, Impera., and In fin. Constr. all have the 1 as

a consonant with Dagesh forte
e.g. atfy

#*>#*/. The original l^H (Ittfjil) appears as l^tt.

impf. rrtrhr
HopHal.
Itpin appears as Ittftn, etc.
§ 5. It should be noticed that in the Impf. Qal and
Hiph. of these verbs, the penultimate has a long vowel
and is open therefore after Waw consecutive the accent
;

is drawn back on to it, and the last vowel shortened (see

Chap. XVIII. § 3. (*));

< <

e.g. aft ; but 1$55

< <

niTP (Jussive Hiph.) ; but iti^l

B. Verbs originally ^D.

These verbs are not very numerous : the commonest
are p5^, to suck ; 77 Hiph., to howl ;
ift, to be right
1
Yl2^, to awake ; and 110^, to be good also in the Qal,

ttfcij, to be dry..
The Impf. Qal. has long Hireq and Pathah (as those
1

given above in A. § 2. (£)) ; £.£*. atO "..

The Inf. Constr. Qal does not suffer elision of the 1 but
is regular.

The Hiph'il preserves the original ^ ; e.g. p?\ pWj.

Remark.
l^n (Perf. Hiph. ITO^) is used with the Infinitive to
express the adverb '
well ' ; e.g. ^1? ^^P^ lit. '
they
have done well as regards speaking '
= ' they have spoken
well.'

1
For the Perf. Qal of this verb, the form 2)D (l' V verb) is used.
138 * D VERBS

* C. There is a further class of ^ D verb which, outside

the Perf. Qal, is treated in the same way D verbs as
as ]

regards the assimilation of the first root-letter with the

second. Such verbs are

stand/ pT,
JHSJ, '
burn/ ^ }
'
place/ and, for
the most part, 32P, * *
pour.'
1
The Impf. Qal is formed like pZT, the Niph. Perf. like
TO?, the Hiph. Perf. like X*pJ t
etc.

It will be noticed that nearly all these verbs have ^ as

their second letter, and the only verbs beginning with !T

which are not thus treated are ")T\
_ T»
*
fashion/ '
and N!£\
TT>
1
go out/

VOCABULARY.
N!£, to go out. Infin. PM%. «
ttJT, to possess. Hiph. to

VJl, to know. dispossess, drive out.

1% to bear, beget. L,^

j f>
L,^ tQ be able>
Hiph. to beget.
to slee P'
*p\ Hiph. to add (with Inf. '
I#J»
Constr. = to do again). yj£, to awake.

38J, to
be good.
in Impf.)
(Qal only
Hiph. to do
Q .^ D ^a ''
before that (of

time > With Impf.

well, benefit (with Ace.
or Dat.).

EXERCISE.
A. I. Translate into English :

*hn a^ts ijBy rm ^n 1

? tih : via in (i)

:ntta D^tzft ma p. wi (2) jipfi ton

jDttfp fcw wn-nN 5n;3 Ygwj jttfti (3)

:^Sy nN!& nDDin dm "E mt^n fcA ^ (4)

irnh rrtrr "spwi ^tt5« Tnn-nN iron (5)

1
There is another form p]T which is intransitive (i Kings xxii. 35).
 :

•»*D VERBS 139

1§S> T3B ^ (
6) :
^^ 'Mftf^HJ °nn^
6S m^n £7*1 (7) ^fffl y^cy? 1? s

jYTJD v:n rrtpti'j} (8) W?? S?t5

V"i:

^ (9) Vjttffl ™
*tn*i tt 7 ^*0
1
S5j]
^
i

^
: nnaV
JT
2
ra*
~
ttasi
T'
D^tf ^ r^w (10)

= Benjamin. a Note this pause form of nn« (— before PI).

2. Translate into Hebrew :

(1) And he made him go with him thither. (2)

And we went down thither again. (3) Go out
against him, before he dispossesses thee, and do
not be afraid. (4) Know me. I shall not be able
to know thee. (5) And it came to pass, when
he went thither, that he dispossessed the dwellers-
of that city. (6) Thou hast well said, ' I will

again forgive his trespass.' (7) The Lord keep

thee in thy going out and in thy sitting down.
(8) And she again bore a son,
and the child
was good He said to her,
in his eyes. (9)
1
Wilt thou go with me And she said, I will ? ' '

not go down thither.' (10) And he was afraid

and said, How terrible (Part. Niph. NT) is this
'
' '

(11) And he lay down and slept and

!
place '

woke up (again), for the Lord preserved him.

EXERCISE.
* B. I. Translate into English

rran (2) \r\i/\ iffihs ^ib *otopn (0

bwyzrb nirp twi ( 3 ) :oa£n« BWp
\ \vn-r\x totjto nro jgj tryjfcjrj (4) \
Wf^
Tt\tr\ & p« ^g***3 iragp np?£ yiw (5)
 :

140 *»
S VERBS

Jtttf p&5 (6) :^ri^ ^ ^Ul rrtn trtpBJ

feWTi DlpDH Dtf-nN wSfffi jign tf*n ?j
wsgn n^ |V^-nN waji (7) :^N-rva
^' :
roftfeti
t v it :
(8)
\
:bn^n
' v t
ipra ioipm iriN i
'
: ' : •

i^-rrna
v
^:n : iv • -:
r
9
v-'/)
ii-Epai
Ti" t 1
nam
t •• t
$ '
:
n^oi^i
t •

irwm -: i- :
ntfN
v -:
vib
l<y- :
w?r wm
• v : i* :
naS
T :

sja,
'
:
•
dvttw a»* v(io) jvnroim
Dtf-n«
v •• - • •••: •• •• s i* : i :

natsn *?#& iT-nN TjSttn n ?^ (n) :Tj^n 1

rwtfrn
t
byt tib*) Vft trrrm
• - -
-: i-
^ntoDn ^bxb : • a'-. : • ••

tirwrrbN
t v •
my an t -: 1- - *qn
-:
•
TOti*i
v ~ :t^n (12)
\ / it ••

: Dtf \b^ atfn rinS

It Itt- t t- '<>•.••
nt^i r^ N>^Nin
-•:(•: x v 1

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) I will verily dwell with the king. (2) And he
lay down and slept under a (the) tree. (3) O
God, save Thy people that trusteth in Thee.
(4) Thou hast well spoken that which thou hast
spoken. (5) Go out and dwell in a land which
thou hast not known. (6) I lay down, I slept,
and God awakened me. (7) Know ye that the
Lord, He is God, and that there is none else (Tl^).

(8) Do ye not-yet (D*UD) know that ye shall

possess the land which you ? (9) I I will give
will no more save you from the hand of the
Philistines. 1 (10) God shall do so to me and
2
more also if thou shalt not be captain of the
host before me all the (11) days. From the
Lord the matter proceeded (was) ; we cannot
speak unto thee (12) evil or good. And it came
to pass after their going, that they came up out
of the well and went and told the king. (13)
1 2
DTlKvSj used without the article. See Appendix B.
 1 D VERBS 141

The children of Israel have killed Thy prophets

with the sword, and I alone am left, and they
have sought my life to take it. (14) Arise,
possess the vineyard, which he refused to give
thee for (1) silver. (15) The Lord did it, in
order that all the peoples of the earth might
know (Infin. Constr.) the hand of the Lord, that
it is strong.
 : .

142

CHAPTER XXVI.
Tl'h VERBS.

(See Paradigm H.)

§ 1. In the majority of cases the final Jl represents an

original x
\ and this ^ appears in various forms of the verb,
but never (except in the case of the Pass. Part. Qal) as the
last letter of the word. Wherever the third root-letter is

final, it is always (except in the case mentioned above) a

quiescent H.
It must be remembered that, wherever the final H has
a Mappiq (as in TTftF), '
wonder '), the verb belongs to the v
guttural class.
§ 2. The following table of terminations will be found
useful

3 m. s. Perf. ends in H—
3 m. s. lmpf.
2 m. s. Impera. n—
* Inf. Abs. 2 n—
Inf. Constr. ni—
Partic. n—
§ 3. Perfects. In the Perfects the final 1! disappears
outside the 3 m. s. Vowel afformatives are added simply to
the first syllable ; e.g.
^/J, 3rd pers. masc. plur., from HvJ.
1
The analogy of Arabic would suggest that some 7\"s verbs ended originally
in \ Cp. W, ' quiet,' from root \hw.
* 2
The Pi 'el Inf. Abs. may also end in H —
*
 .:

ri'b VERBS 143

Before consonantal afTormatives the original reappears ^

as *— in the Active voices (Qal, Pi., and Hiph.), and as *'—

in the Passive voices (Niph., Pu., Hoph., and Hithpa.);

e.g. r\bz, rvbn.

Occasionally ^— appears in the Pi. and Hiph., and ^-7-

in the Hithpa. Both *— and

"
,
— represent an original ^—
The 3rd p. fern. sing, has apparently a double afformative.
With the old afformative Jl — attached, it would be FOZ ;

the ordinary (later) afformative Jl— is added to this ; and

we get Qal ilJl7|, Niph. nn^5, etc. 1

§ 4. Imperfects. The 3rd masc. sing, in each voice

ends in Jl— e.g. Jl;W. This Jl— disappears before vowel
;

afformatives ; e.g. vJJH, ^7^, 2 but appears as an accented

^— before JlJ — in the 3rd and 2nd p. fern. pi. ; e.g.

T v '

—
The Cohortative Jl T is never attached to H 7 verbs.
//:

Very occasionally there is a Jussive form in Jl— (but

see below, § 6).

§ 5. Participles. All end in Jl — (except the Passive

Qal).

This 11— is dropped before suffixes ; e.g. TQ\ TpS,

etc.; with 3rd pers. sing, suff., masc. IH^i, fern. J173;

plur. D^lL
The Construct sing, ends in H— ; e.g. V"\ Jlfc^, *
a doer
of evil.'

The Passive Part. Qal shows the original ^

— ; *^TO
(fern. rW??, etc.).

§ 6. Apocopated forms. In the Jussive and con-

sequently with Waw consecutive, the final Jl— is dropped

1
In pause nJ"P3) rtD^l Once or twice we find the 3rd fem. sing, in Jl—
alone ; e.g. nV^n, Lev. xxvi. 34.

* 2
In poetry a * occasionally slips in before the 3rd p. masc. pi. ; e.g. Vv3\
 ; ; ' ;

144 fV? VERBS

the shortened form of the verb is called ' Apocopated

( = cut off).

Qal ??! becomes bf_ Niph. b$\

pi b& Pu. bp
Hiph. b}\ „ b& or bp_ Hoph. b?T becomes b^
HitJipa. 7jrP
Remarks.
# I. When the second root-letter is a mute (1, H, 3, or

p), the apocopated form is frequently monosyllabic

e.g. Hltp, he took captive ;
^.tl^l

n^tpn (Hiph.), he watered, gave drink to : plT^H

f nntp, he drank :
fl#!Q
I TO2L, he wept
r : ^1
...
:
...

2. Notice the apocopated forms of Jl 7 verbs which

are also Pe gutturals : Hv^, '
to go up,' makes Imperf.
rn>5£ both Qal and Hiph.
in Hence 7^1 = 'and he
went up/ or and he made to go up (offered up).
' '

i
rnrr, jussive "iir

rr^rrr;. „ ^it 2

3. Hfrn ('see'), Impf. JIN")? : Jussive N*V; but with

Waw consec. M*l51 the final N being quiescent.
The 3rd f. sing, with Waw consec. is always fc^fil.

The 1st p. „ „ „ „ „ generally PTbpMJ

sometimes N"^N\
* 4. The apocopated forms of H7 verbs which are also

] D should be noted
e.g. TVQ^ '
stretch,' has Imperf. Qal nt2*| Jussive form t5^

Hoph. rro; „ „ »;
[H!^] 'smite/ „ „ Hiph. HIP „ „ *!£

nn 'spurt/ „ „ Qal Hf. „ „ t\

1
The n, being now in the final syllable, asserts its right to an a sound ; and
11
has now its usual vowel.
* 2
For the form, cp. F\TVW (? guttural verb).
 rrt VERBS 145

5. Two verbs call for special notice.

Til, «
be,' has Imperf. TlTiy Jussive VT (^) 2

rrn, 3 '
live/ „ mm * „ yp 2

6. nntL\ '
bow down/ is generally used in the Hithpa'lel.*
The final root-letter appears first as 1 (its original form),
5
and then as 71. Hence we get
O Perf. mnntOT, he bowed '

T— — ; ; . >

himself down.' Imperf. mnjnttA Apocopated form ^nriip.

* 7. The Pfel Impcra. (2 m. s.) can always be apoco-
pated ; e.g. TNI or 1?, command.' '

Sometimes the Hiph. Impera. is apocopated ; e.g. HSpP

or n"?.rTi
'
^t loose/ This is found chiefly in the phrase
^Eft fpn, '
let me alone.'

VOCABULARY.
PPy, to go up H^D (Niph.), to appear (to a
(Imp.QairHj^). person).

Htoy, todo(Imp.Qainto^). TX21 (Hiph.), to smite, kill

7h\ to reveal, uncover. h Y smiting.

T T ' '

Hithp. to reveal one- HI*}, to be many, multiply.

se "- Hiph. to make
rOjl, to weep. many, multiply
nn, to build. (trans.).

nntp, to drink. JlfTO (Hithpa'lel),to bow one-

rhl (Pi.), to finish self down (to), wor-
(with Infin.). ship (with Dative).
ITD3 (Pi.), to cover, conceal. (See Remark 6
ms (Pi.), to command. above.)
1
Notice Metheg in these two verbs wherever the first root-letter is at the end
of a syllable ; cp. p. 118.
< <
»L
2
Fausal forms (from false analogy with nouns from n ? stems) \T, TV.
* J
The 3 m. s. Qal is regularly "Tl (from root "'Tl). Also the Part. ; e.g.

V)X *H, 'as I live.' PI. D^n.

4
i.e. with the third root-letter reduplicated.
5
The v) of the root and the T) of the prefix have, as usual, been transposed.

JO
i 46
^ VERBS

EXERCISE.

A. I. Translate into English:

•tiafci (2) :p. *>2?J.1 v:a-n« rnyV hy\ (i)

«^5 "(
3) :in'« *ir$ "i#$ n KP n ?2 ^l 1

li-wiTj ( 4)
':^tprri« d?j? ^ "^n1? ^*
nrii (5) Jl3r^ ™~b TO^a 'TO
nVs? hot (6) Tfk am nVw *n0}3
J9
asm irfii ( 7)
«M?h ^ v ?-^= "W??J
:ojp o ll?J>
rr% rtok 'naVa to* nj (8)

bw rf?"«^ rv» W J^a 1

? Vr hVj

i Drvorn
~It '•

2
See Rem *
i
See Rem. 2. "

2. Translate into Hebrew :

smite him. Thou

(i) I commanded them to (2)
will build
wast commanded to do this. (3) I

thine altar, and will dothat thou shalt com-

all

mand (4) And he said, Smite him/ and he

<

smote him with his sword. (5) And thou didst

evil in and thou sawest thy transgres-

my sight,

sion and didst multiply it,

and couldst not cover
made a revelation to thy
it. (6) Thou hast
ears of .".]
servant. [Say, " uncovered the .

finished speaking to him,

and he bowed
(7) He
himself down to him ; and he went up to his
Let him be unto thee as a servant
house (8)
all his days. thou shalt appear unto
(9) And
unto thee. (10)
him; and I will reveal myself 1
And he went weeping-continually.
(Infin, Absolute see p. IOI, § 3- (*))
» Say, 'going and weeping' ;
 : :

PiS VERBS 147

EXERCISE.
# B. 1. Translate into English

Dip ji^ (2) jvtoin hyn bvnxp] bw\ (1)

T »
:
. _ . .

im*i :
T)B :
a)
\w»/
simna
t
DYONrr ^a 1 : : • v: it ••
v»7n
t ••

-n« rrttto 1^1 (4) jd^s d^itmm w?^

ttta ^bN
1
;nnN DiroTn v^nit^n
It VT T V A
? Dynt t
••'
S * 4* I ••

iti»
v
DmiNn
t t -
-on no^^n
-: v -
ien- t
rrirm
t w/
(5) : !•• • -: : i- i-

*rmim n^y avt

rrrrN
v •
^Sm (6)
l
\ :
:ntoy ^n •
: iv it / iv •
-:

«oV*i D ?3t^ TOO (7) :!)

^£ "^N-riN o?0^
wipet ibQt (8) jd^d::- ^nm webs *b&
• :'- > At > / iv : : • : : • ••

nvi (9) ^j*'

jD^sna
:!••-
dt?
v r
^toyn-n«i
t v
D^na
v v • it: • : iv : :

rijrr nSh y>2N *ns&>i tir^ &pb\$ ntpStp

t't - T

wi
* ° • * •
i l

-73
t
yrtbn ibN?
n^••':-: •• ••- :— (10)
\ t :«eft
It

dm rrjrrj ^Sgn-7N njn? nnn^n •nrrr

it: t t : - it : '
v v - : v -: i-

nmN t : -
rD3N
^t v —^
TV±>
t t
nHMtt
At -: 1-
1]7 ' ••
TlD (n)
\ /

rim
t
TpSTT • ' •.•••— >
1 2)' J THM-7N
t'v
^s
— t
n&n
tv I*
T^ ' •• :

2
an*i
v.- (13) srrnrrN
T v ~* '" '
rlDi*i
T
T^rrT nttfw
T
» «

sinnn rraN ^$*$p d^| 7b^7 njw

^B7 ' v v -
Wlfttifr')
— - : •
DiSltt
At ^tt*?
v v —'
nn^l
v — (14)
n ~/

rotim "irnpttfn?
a':-: bin)
-:- (15)
\ J/ :nnN
t : it
d^qn •

rrv trari TO&n (16) :i«tp« T^?f? d?

!••- - '
v : 1 v v - v - a-
1 '
What is this (that) . .
.' 2
See Chap. XX. § 3. (b).
148 PI? VERBS

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(i) And he drank of the water, and lo it (they) was !

hitter. (2) Build me a house wherein I may

dwell. (3)And he covered his face and wept,
and the woman wept
also. (4) The Lord caused
him to see His glory, and he worshipped before
the Lord. (5) He said unto him, 'Stretch forth
thy hand/ and he stretched forth his hand. (6)
I will be to him for a God, and he shall be to me

for a people. (7) And it came to pass, when he

had finished worshipping, that he went to his
place. (8)Have I not commanded thee (fern.)

saying, '
Thou shalt not drink wine ? '
(9) And
he said, Smite the city with the edge of the
' 1

sword, that it be no more built.' (10) And he

was angry, and cried unto the Lord all the night.
(11) Let not thy wrath be hot against me, and
let me
speak just this (the) time. (12) And he
turned behind (after) him and saw me and called
to me, and I said, Here am I (behold me).' (13)
'

And he lifted up his eyes and saw, and behold

three men, and he ran to meet them, and bowed
himself to the ground. (14) And they said,
'May the king live for ever!' (15) And he
shall reign instead of me, and him I have com-
manded to be a prince over (16) my people.
And they came to meet him, and they bowed
down to (17) Was I indeed re-
the ground.
vealed unto the house of thy father when they
were in Egypt ?

1
'at (J>)
the mouth of . .
,'
 — —

149

CHATTER XXVII.

VERBAL SUFFIXES.
(See Paradigm B.)

A. The Suffixes themselves.

§ I. The pronoun (unless it is reflexive)
accusative
is most often attached to a verbal form by means of a
suffix. These suffixes differ somewhat according as the
verbal form ends in a vowel or consonant and in the ;

latter case they differ also in the Perfect and Imperfect.

The verbal stem in many instances requires modification
(for which see below, B).

§ 2. When the verbal form ends in a vowel, the

suffixes both to the Perf. and Impf. are as follows:

me ^? us ^
thee, m. Tj you, m. M
f. ^ — f. (wanting)
him *1H them, m. D —
her H — f. ] —
§ 3. When the verbal form ends in a consonant, a
helping vowel is required before the suffix can be attached,
except in the case of 7J and — M— • The characteristic
helping vowel is a in the Perf, and i in the Impf. The
a appears as — except in the 1st sing. ; the z as — except
before the 3rd sing. fern. We arrive, therefore, at this
table.
 ; —

150 VERBAL SUFFIXES

Verbal Suffixes after Consonantal Stems.

Per/. Imperf.
< <

me "J—
<
thee, m.
f.

him *-(-*»-) «4-

her nT —
<
us T

you, m. 03— D ?—
f. 15- 15-
them, m. D— T

f.
1-T (wanting)

§ 4. The Imperative takes the same suffixes as the

Imperfect.
The Inf. Constr. takes noun except that the
suffixes,
1st sing, pronoun, when it is the direct object, is expressed
by *0— not *•—
e.g. ylpi?, my killing (some one else).

^7ip|J, the killing of me.

* The Imperfect has another set of suffixes which
§ 5.

give special emphasis to the verb. Their characteristic is

a Nun inserted after the helping vowel. Compare Chap.

XXII. The suffixes are

1st p. s. ^3—
2nd m. s. ^
3rd m. s. ^2—
3rd f. s.
^J—
These forms are used principally in pause.
 : : ; ;

VERBAL SUFFIXES 151

B. Modification of the Stem before

Suffixes.

§ 1. The general rules as to the vowel in the ultimate

syllable of the verb are as follows

— becomes — ; eg. 'WEltf, 'he heard me.' ^im<\

1
he will hear me.'
— and '
— are replaced by vocal Sh e wa
<

e.g. ^l?-?^ (Pi.)>

'
ne w iU honour me.'
^ipf??, '
he will kill me.'
<
*•— remains unaffected ; e.g. ^Tptp^, '
he will destroy
me.'

8 2. Verbs before suffixes revert to their more primitive

forms

(a) Perfects.

rfopj? = rbup_ ;
with suff. —rhup
=
r?ttpr r?Ej2 „ —^i?
DJ^ttj? = DwVttfi » —W^ttjp (dropping
final D— ).

Similarly »~Ht£p appears before suff. as — ri7tpj?, etc.

(b) Imperfects and Imperatives.

Wp$ = WD$ ; before —W}t{h.

suff.

But *l/tP|7] does ;^r become — *)vtDj7] before suff.

WBttJ = W3tt5 ; before —

suff. W&ttJ.

§ 3. Remarks.

1. Before G3 — an # sound in the ultimate syllable of

the verb is not lengthened ; e.g. DD^P> '
ne killed you/
2.
e
Before TJ — and D5 — ~ and — cannot be >
'

replaced
by Sh wa, as this would leave two vocal Sh was together e
 ;

152 VERBAL SUFFIXES

e.g. TfTtpj?? IS impossible. In such cases the original short

and — (6) are introduced ;

e.g. /t£p — TT7 t?p

,
(penultimate half-open).

Similarly with Imperatives in '

—
btOj?—
e.g. ^^tPlJ,
'
kill me '
(not ^t?|?).
3. In the 2nd pers. masc. sing, of Perfects, the last

is dropped before *0— ; e.g. ^{^PT — ^rHtOp, thou

didst kill me.'

Similarly, thou didst kill him '

is "ifi^ttj? (or Vin — ).

no
4. In the 3rd per. fern. sing, of Perfects, there is

helping vowel introduced before the suff. ; eg. ^rOISp,

1
she killed me.' Accent on penultimate throughout.
* The forms are in four cases abnormal, and must be
carefully learned :

<
she killed him
'
is ^H^tpp (or Vl-^)
'she killed her' is tirfcvp (or TIF)- )

'she killed thee' (fern.) is *!jrntpp) ; i.e. with the pen-

'
1
she killed them is Dn^I0p\ ultimate vowel
lengthened, and the ultimate shortened.
5. Notice carefully the Hiph. Impera. with suff. It

will be remembered that in the Jussive and Impera. Hiph.

the ultimate vowel is —
when the syllable is closed ; but
this appears as ^— when the syllable is open : cp. vtppH,

but ^hippn (see Chap. XVI. £. (d)). As the addition

of a suff. necessarily opens the syllable in question, 7l0p>l

appears as — /ptppH before a suffix.

§ 4. Suffixes to H b Stems.
Before suffixes, 71 7 verbs drop the final 71 with the

preceding vowel ; eg. H7J, with suff. WJ, ^?J ;

"^f!,
VTJJP, etc. But the suff. of the 3rd pers. masc. sing,

appears in the Perfect as ^H— ; e.g.

^7J (not T?$).

(For suffixes to V"V verbs, see Chap. XXVIII.)

 VERBAL SUFFIXES I 53

(The beginner is advised to spend time in mastering

the verbal suffixes. Two sets of sentences are given below
in Exercise A, the first set being simpler).

VOCABULARY.
TOtl? (Imperf. in a), to forget. E"Tfc}, human being, man.
IpH (m.), mercy, kindness (a). (tt^N = man, opp.
(pV Ipn n'VV = he to woman.)
showed mercy to.)

EXERCISE.
A. 1. Add the suffixes for '
me,' '
him,' and '
them ' to

b*Ui? ,

—bw—' hw—F\bvp !

2. Translate into Hebrew :

(1) He will lift thee up, and will deliver thee from
thine enemy. (2) And it came to pass, when I

went down there, that ye did not see me. (3)

I have commanded them saying, Destroy all the

doers of transgression. (4) I have showed mercy

to thee, and do not thou forget me. (5) Make
me to go in the way of thy commandments.
(6) Thou hast sent me to this evil people. (7)
He remembered me in affliction. (8) I will surely
justify thee. (9) We killed him, and there was
none to rescue (rescuing) him, (10) If thy sons
shall forget me, I will give them to their enemies.

3. Add the suffixes for '

thee ' (masc. and fern.), '
her,'
and '
us '
to

"te^—nfcO—- (Impera.) lit—iTDt- rOtf*

154 VERBAL SUFFIXES

4. Translate into Hebrew :

(1) I will kill thee — Do not smite (TOS) me. (2)

He sent them to inquire of (tiTH) me. (3) And
it came to pass, when I inquired of them, that
they sought to smite me. They remembered (4)
thee (fern.), to do as thou didst command them.
(5) And he commanded them, saying, Ye shall '

take him from his house ; and if he will not go

with you, then (1 ye shall smite
consecutive)
him.' (6) Make me to see thy mercy, and let
me not forget it. (7) What is man that thou
shouldst remember him ? (8) Hear me and save
me from all that persecute (^"H) me. (9) And
behold I but if they do more
will rescue them ;

1
and more evil, I will smite them again. (10)
He commanded me to kill them, and I killed
them with my sword.

EXERCISE.
# B. 1. Translate into English:

vnira ij^n ^dsn xyrh nyn m^i (o

._;_.. \n (3)
^fitiha \*j/ 1 ..
nn«
- -
:rwm
T |v- :-
mp
t't
itia
v -:
ruup
t - ':

:^x\rv ^b-^D mm nmxn *ae byn D^n

rn^3 mm ^7-7$ 15,77 rnoN die ^n 4 ) (

:d^ toya -
•
N3-^ptt5n
t
It -
m*?N
tv" nohi
-
:
n^irS
a
na^ • '• : |t : •

t^N-TOT win T r?Ni BQto 'Wto^E

1

—
y^in-l
VATT ..... ro
'
\J/
^
•• t I •• .

ant ipyw
t
nnyi
t -
' ••
(6) ::m iV-mm
c v
i^n
• : : >• ' l* : v -:
i*

Birp2 ^T^ )&H (7) s^|l??3"JTO ^TOi ng#

^tiw ink wVsffl (8) :
H^ &#5 q1
?^.1
D^p-tn nsy-riN ato^i (o) i^bten ^m ^n^i
l(? nann.
 :

VERBAL SUFFIXES I
55

ttfan (10) jd'hVtttin vw\ vrayi ntfa

N2
At
von- rryr^N
....... ...
"ton
- T
ownan tab in«
• • : - •• : • x v

rojartg ntfrn (n) Jirvonp tfwn jmoji

• : - - T :
••• -: i- t •• -'. i — Ax :

ft ^iin-nN
Ax x - v
nbx lan (12) jnrtm-rtp
IT I" :
t

ntpsi xim (13) :rray vjy? TSffl ^ n ^i??D

nm^ It t :
irrarr«
v t t -:
'

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) And behold I am
keep thee with thee, and will
whithersoever thou goest, and will bring thee
back to this land, and will not forsake thee. (2)
And she said to the King, Behold they rose up '

against me and said, " Give thou the smiter-of

his brother, that we may put him to death."
And the King said, He that speaketh unto thee, '

why (1 consec.) thou shalt bring him unto me.'

(3) If there is (any) iniquity in me, then he shall
put me to death. (4) Haste ye to go, lest he
hasten and overtake us. (5) He did evil to the
two chieftains of the hosts of Israel, and he
killed them. (6) Make me to hear thy voice.
(7) Bring him back with thee to thy house,
that he may eat bread and drink water. (8) I
have exalted thee out of the midst of the people,
and have set (given) thee as a prince over my
people. (9) And he said to her, Give me thy '

son '
; and he took him and brought him up
to his house. (10) And it shall be, I will go
from with thee to tell the King, and he will not
find thee and will kill me. (11) I hate him, for
he doth not prophesy good upon me, but evil.
(12) As the Lord liveth and as thy soul liveth,
I will
1
not forsake thee. (13) And they sought
1
Use DN : see Appendix B.
150" VERBAL SUFITXKS
him for three days rind did not find him.
(14)
If thou shalt meet (find) a man, thou shalt not
bless and if a man shall bless thee, thou
him ;

shalt not answer him. (15) Thy hand hath

saved me. (16) If ye be come peaceably unto
me to help me, good. (17) He did not know
that his daughter had stolen them.
 *57

CHAPTER XXVIII.

VV AND i'V VERBS.

(See Paradigm J.)

§ I. In these verbs the three root-letters do not appear

in the Perf. Qal : hence they are usually cited in the form
of the Inf. Constr. Qal. i V verbs x
are commoner than **
V ;

but their conjugation is identical, except in the Qal Impf.,

Impera., and Infin.
The middle letter, being weak, disappears after vowel
sounds ; e.g. Perf. Qal Dl£ becomes D£. 2
After preformatives, 1, standing at the beginning of the
ultimate syllable, absorbed into the succeeding vowel
is ;

and the penultimate syllable, being now left open and being
unaccented, requires a long vowel thus we get in the Perf. ;

Niph. of trtp, GipJ ( = Dip?).

§ The QaL
2.

Perfect. Dp becomes — ftp before consonantal afiforma-

<
tives. This syllable is always accented, e.g. <"Tftp, Hftp
<
(except in the 2nd pi. DJTOp).
Imperfect. The original D*)p^ (cp. vtpp^j the original

1
Gesenius K. (§ 72) calls these verbs s/'y, denying the consonantal character
of the middle root-letter.
2
In l"y verbs which are also n"?, the middle root-letter retains its con-
sonantal character, e.g. rfiV,
'
command these verbs do not fall under the
' :

rules given in this chapter. So also with some verbs which have a guttural for
the third root-letter ; e.g. yia, '
expire ' ; Impf. pir.
 158 Y'jr AND i"y VERBS

form) becomes D^ ; the second syllable

<
is accented before
all aflbrmatives ; eg. V21p\
This has a Jussive form Dp^
with Waw consecutive, the ultimate vowel is shortened ;

1
DI5J1 (see Chap. XVIII. § 3. (6)).

In the 3rd and 2nd fern. pi. an accented **

- is inserted

before HJ— 2
and the 1st — disappears, being now two
<

places from the tone ; e.g. nj^tftp]?.

In **
V verbs, the Impf. Qal has **—, not 1
\, and is thus
identical in form with the Impf. Hiph ; e.g. D^fc? ; Impf.
D^feP ; Tussive Dfe^ ; with Waw consec. DOT.
The Imperative D*)p is quite regular, except that the
<

2nd pers. fern. plur. is HJPp (not TOTOp).

Infinitives. Absolute Dip. Construct 0*)p : with v,

Participle. The Partic. is of the same form as the 3rd

pers. masc. sing. Perf. ; but the fern, differs from the fern.
<

Perf. in being accented on the ultimate ; e.g. HOp 3 (not Htop

as Perf.).

§ 3. Stative forms of V V verbs.

There are two forms of stative verbs from 1 $ stems
(a) Those with — in the 3rd pers. masc. sing, of the
Perfect; e.g. Ffo, '
he died' (stem TWO). The
vowel becomes — before consonantal afforma-
tives ; e.g. JHE (for ftfl?), DJTO, etc. Impf. filD^
Part. MP.
1
In "? gutturals, the last vowel shortens into —- ; e.g. "HD ; Jussive Qal ")D\
< <
l* Waw consec. "1D 5 V Similarly in the Hiph. we have
with "1D S 1- (for ")D s l) ; but
" T" " T V T-

with suff. the ^

— returns; e.g. "OI^D^j 'and he made me turn aside.'
2
Probably in order to make the preceding syllable open, and so let it retain

its characteristic } sound. But side by side with n^^tJ'M (from 2V&), we have

t : t
3
The first Qamec is unchangeable (as the 1 is absorbed in it). So the
Construct fern. sing, is riftp ; masc. plur. "'Op-
 1 V AND 1 V VERBS 159

* (b) Those with i in the Perf. They retain it except

before DPi , when it necessarily becomes

Ml, — ;

e.o- ttfiSi.
'
he was ashamed (stem ttfiSl) fitjfei, '
;

DUtpSl, etc. Impf. tri2^

x
(3rd and 2nd pers.

fern. plur. HJ^in).

Remark.
NlSl, ' to come/ keeps i where Dip has \ but otherwise
conjugates like Dip ; *£-. Impf. KtoJ Inf. Constr. ^1(7).
§ 4. («) We can now proceed to the other Voices, which
will be clear enough in the light of the general

principle given in § 1.

Niph. Perf. (originally DJJ??), WpJ

Impf. ( „ 03123^), Dip:

Hiph. Perf. ( „ D^.pH), tPgn

Impf. ( „ tSTja D^ T
2

Hoph. Perf. ( „ DljftT), DgVl

(£) In the Perfects Niph. and Hiph. an 3
accented i is

inserted before the Consonantal afformatives of

the 2nd and 1st persons; and in the Niph. the
preceding i becomes \ ;

eg. Qip5, ni^p?

N.B. —Thisprobably inserted in order to

i is make
the preceding syllable open and so enable it to
keep its long vowel.
(c) The Participle Hiph. is D^pD (with changeable
--) ; not D^pfc, which we should have expected.
1
So from I'lS, '
to grow light ' (of the day) : nitf, ' to be willing.'
2
In the 3rd and 2nd pi. fem. we usually have nOD^D) but sometimes
<
nyo^pn (with ^ — inserted, as in Impf. Qal).

3
In the 2nd pers. plur. the accent is on the ultimate (UTYl — )•

4
If the first root-letter is a guttural, the —- becomes _^ ; e.g. from Ity we
get Hiph. rriTJjn. From 603 we have both nifcOan and nN3n in the Hiph.
r
t •
r T • -; t
i6o 1 V AND 1 V VHRBS

§ 5. Intensive forms. The Pi'el is rare ; instead of it,

we usually have either a Polel {i.e. with the third root-

letter appearing twice), e.g. Q^pip, Impf. DTpip"?, or (some-

times) a Pllpel ; e.g. vO^?> 'sustain, feed,' from 7^3.

VOCABULARY.
O^p, to arise. Hiph. set up. ] v> to pass the night.

fctfSi, to come. Hiph. bring. D^tp, to place, set.

rfiD, to die. Hiph. put to 11^2, to rest. Hiph. give rest

death. to (with Dative),

l^to return. Hiph.restore. There is a secondary form

n??Wn Itrn = and he again of the Hiph. IT3PT =

sa id #
set down, place.

"YlD, to turn aside. Hiph. Y*n, to run. Hiph. take

remove. quickly.

Dtt, to flee. ]?*?, (f.) stone (a). Plur.

yO, Hiph. to establish. in D1 —

Niph. be established.

EXERCISE.
A. 1. Translate into English:

to^ni n^pM jnrvaS ^yn

.... mtf
x

«MttJn
D^nMh-nM np
: i" : t t

(3)
'
(2)
\ /

nrnn-riN
(4) tv hw\
It

itr^-
:rn>iNttj
••

w :

onto
T T

to
(o
\ /

m t v

•
•

:-
-: it

w/
(s) :Dti
it
'-

It
vtv

fni^pm
— inn
t t- t'•
-

nnam mnn
.1-
t 1 :
••••

: - • :
:

T
a

<v-
:

inn^'n— A«* • J
ttfwn-riN
T V•
rforh "* '.
id^
- T_
1^ T
dtd
\ / it :'• : vt- •••••—: t : • v "t-
prh^
- t
: : :
rfbto
' •- ••
mtiNt nittf ^ •
nati
t At
^Tfi • :
^p • '

why mtn n^n-riM nod ^::n

•«•:• it?

D3?i
^i^pn
'
|V T

* 13
~

(9)
T T T

*nin
V

:T9r?5 31979Q
to (10) jtodVd
(?)
^' '

Jtoii

vwjt-
(8)
ll"

'• -: • at t - I t > / |tt : •

jink 1
 :

1 V AND 1 V VERBS 161

2. Translate into Hebrew

(i) Return to him, lest thou die. I will not return,

and I will die. (2) I will put him to death.

Why should he be put to death? (3) Run to
him, and thou shalt restore to him his sword.
(4) He fought with them, and he turned them
aside out of their way, and they fled and he ;

smote them and put to death many. (5) The

Lord will establish you in the land, and will give
you rest there. (6) And I placed there the
things which I had brought. (7) And they
(fern.) arose, saying, '
Turn aside, and, thou shalt
dwell with us, and thou shalt again be king x
over
us.' (8) And
he took-quickly to the king the
things which he had brought. (9) Lo, I shall
put to flight all my enemies, for he will rescue
me. (10) And he said to him, 'Turn in and
pass the night here (ntSL), and to-morrow thou
shalt arise and return to thy house.'

EXERCISE.
* B. I. Translate into English:

•.DipBPr-^N
'it- v
^1
'.....-
tip**)
Itt-
ip&a
A -
'v
DmiN t t : - D3ttJ*»1
•• : — (1)
\ /

mr>
t •• •
*rn .
cnna
Av : •
vrna-nNv vrtoprn
• • '• -; 1-
(2)J
V

i.tt byv
•n^n D^n >iw
t— \
r
3 y)
v •*
nrj 1
^vn-bs
rTT -

ntf« TVpIP ^05 DJPTJD (4) jaMjJj lyi^n

*h*n to ra to jgji (5) jojmjn niir mi
:np mpti*i T?;n npn Mjy^N TOwn
:tjS ^nrp:rn igj^y onpipW yws
(6)
^iiMavrj tI^m -»fcja -ry nto ton mAw ^
-n« p^ayj (8) t^|)7 ^D?rn ^TOp-nsi

1
Use 21^ and 7]^D with 3.

II
162 1 V AND 1 V VERBS

TV" T T - T T V - \ -' / •.•

It : I

t t I • • - : it - : T T T - A*

wi t
nam T
jini uto^m
v ' :
1
(10) nn^i
p ll
'*

l
•l
ton »$ 7A7iT? ^ W$n (ii) JT^rrny
ptS
At
inn^i
-
nnfcop
t
? ifrtan
v -
Dp*
:»TT- (12)
•-
:nirp t':
1

• '
v
1

.
^ ' It :

5i?7$n D«7 nd? DW ^p? 7>y ittto '

Miltt
N!F nn ^Sib nnnn-nN At t
•• v
n*n- (13)
J •• • • It v • \ /
t : I

D^bi btrifcr-riN
t: v
wniT (14)
\ *t/ iTvt$v ijW?
•• : • . .
(T . 1 ... ... j

(15) *njh nrib pj *i$*$ jNk? Dnnn-S^

tpi nitoh_ nMn-So-nN
,.. _ T r
D^rrsn _ rratr-^rm
T 1 ...... ... . _. , .
(T
.

smote
T v t
pn- niS-Sy
At - : '
•
nwn wm v v - : " »*
(16)
»
trrtm
It :

: jw«
5 I"t« «7 nbipi
t J :
rrtjft
T

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) And they brought him back to his city, and he
died. (2) Turn aside unto me, my lord, and
I will prepare for thee bread. (3) Know and
understand that ye shall surely die. (4) And he
passed the night there and he rose early and fled ;

from the face of the king. (5) Be not ashamed ;

for I will bring thee back to thy land, and thou

shalt die there. (6) Our feet shall not turn
aside out of the way, neither will we run after
other gods. (7) Thy throne shall be established 2

for ever. (8) If we indeed flee, they will not set 3

(their) heart upon us ; and if the half of us (our
half) die, they will not set (their) heart upon us.

(9) can do nothing until thy coming thither.

I

(10) He sat on the throne of his father, and his

kingdom was exceedingly established. (11) And
he found him sitting under a (the) tree, and he
1
Note this method of expressing contemporaneity by two parallel clauses in
which the noun stands first.
2 8
Niph. Part, of p3. D S
B>.
 1 V AND 1 V VERBS 163

said, '
It is thou, man
of God, who didst come
from Judah ? (12) '
She was just coming in * to
the house, when the lad died. (13) And he
hasted and removed 2
the garment from on his
eyes, and the king knew him. (14) And the
runners stood, each man with his weapons of war
in hand, on (|p) the right hand of (v) the
his
house. (15) And the people murmured and said,
'
Why hast thou brought us out of the land of
Egypt, to die in the wilderness?' (16) Behold,
I will bring back my people and give them rest
in their land. (17) Why should he be put to
death ? What hath he done ?
1
See on Chap. XXI. C. 2
§ 2. Hiph. of TiD.
 164

CHAPTER XXIX.
y"y verbs.

(See Paradigm K.)

§ I. The weakness of these verbs consists in the fact

that the second and third root-letters, being identical, are in
many cases written only as one letter 1
e.g. s vp, Perf. Qal

7jp. Where this occurs, the second root-letter must bear

Dagesh forte when it can, i.e. before afformatives ; e.g. ^7j2.

§ 2. The Perfect Qal has therefore two possible forms,

21D 2 (conjugated like •££), and ID, 3 which is conjugated
as follows
3rd masc. sing. ID
fern. „ Hip
2nd masc. „ i^^P, etc.
<
Notice that
inserted before the
a 1 (accented
consonantal afformatives of the
except before DJl — 2nd
) is

and 1st persons. This happens in the Perfect of every

voice.
The vowel afformatives do not bear the accent as in

the strong verb ; but we have Tlv\) t

etc.

§ 3. Imperfect Qal. Three forms are possible.

(a) The commonest is 2D\ This shows the original

a sound of the preformative (cp. vtppl), which
1
It is an open question whether these verbs have not biliteral, rather than
triliteral stems ; see Gesenius K. § 67.
2
The full form is rare except in the 3rd p. sing, and plur.
* 3
In a few cases the vowel is
'

— ; e.g. !£n (Gen. xlix. 23). These may

belong to a passive conjugation.
 ;

V V VERBS 165

must be lengthened, because it stands in an open

unaccented syllable. The second root-letter is

doubled before all afformatives ; e.g. ^SLDA In

the 3rd and 2nd pers. fern. plur. an accented
t|
— inserted before HJ —
is ; hence the preceding
'
— must be shortened, and the — two syllables
<

away must be dropped ; e.g. nj^2pri. The same

thing happens in the Impfs. Niph., Hiph., and
Hoph.
* (p) A second form is peculiar to stative verbs ; it

takes the form h\X? (with a changeable m

— ) from
yypt and is conjugated like 2D^, except that
the second vowel does not need to be shortened
before the suffixes of the 2nd and 3rd f. pi.

* (c) A third form is lb*], in which the first root-

letter is doubled instead of the second. It is

conjugated as if from 2D2 {e.g. plur. ^QD^ ). 1

Stative verbs in this form take — in the ultimate;

e.g. DJT from

DEfi plur. ^toW (or TOJT). ;

These forms with Dagesh forte in the first root-

letter are called Aramaising, as they resemble
those found in Aramaic.
§ 4. Infinitive Construct Qal is 2D (for 22D) ; with
b, 2D7.
§5. Niph'al. The Perfect 2DJ shows the original
a sound of the preformative (7tpp3 is for T>t?p2). Fern.
nipj 2nd p. masc. sing. iTQDJ, etc.
;

The Imperfect is 2D? (for 22D?), which is conjugated

like the Imperf. Qal.

§ 6. Hiph'il. The Perfect has two Qeres ;

* e.g. 2DH.
It conjugates like the Perf. Niph.

* l
Except when the second root-letter is a guttural or "l, in which case the ,

second — often becomes — ; e.g. "l»n (TllD). This _ is occasionally found

before other consonants; e.g. pin, 2 Kings xxiii. 15 ; bp7\, Isa. viii. 23.
[66 y"y VERBS

e.g. 3rd p. fern. sing. n£pn

2nd p. in. „ Pizpn, etc.

The Imperfect is 1D^; 2nd p. f. sing. ^D]J; 2nd p. f.

pi. nrion.
The Participle is ID?? (not IDE), fern. Hipp ; cp. the

Hiph. Part, of 1 V stems.

* There is also an Aramaising form of the Imperf.
Hiph. as in the Qal ; e.g. 1D^_ CQtpn, nj^DJPI, etc.).

Hoph'al has 1 in the preformative ; its conjugation

presents no difficulties.
*
Intensive forms. Besides the Pi'el, Pu'al, and
§ 7.

Hithpa'el, other forms found are the Po'el, Po'al, and

Hithpo'el ; e.g. Po'el lliD. We rarely find a Pilpel, e.g.

hh-k (hbx), and Hithpalpel, e.g. h£}%m.

§ 8. Verbal Suffixes. Wherever the stem appears in
1
a biliteral form, the second root-letter doubled 2 before is

suffixes the preceding long vowel must then be shortened

;

e.g. ifrj with suff. NW! 3

npn •
„ ijapq
p » ^.0
Note. — The following rules sum up the main peculiari-
ties of these verbs
(1) The last root-letter does not appear when in the
e
strong verb the first root-letter has
( vTDp) Sh wa ;

e.g. Oal Imperf., Impera., and Infin. Constr. ; Niph.

Perf. and Partic. ; all parts of the Hiph. and Hoph.
(2) Where in the strong verb the first root-letter has
— or — , there in Vy verbs the first root-letter
has the second vowel of the strong verb form
cp. *?ttg with ID ; hl$$ with lp^.
* l
Except in Aramaising forms.
* 2
Sometimes the second root-letter is written without Dagesh forte when
standing above vocal Sh e wa ; e.g. ^t>7DK. The form ^pIT (Gen. xliii. 29) is

anomalous for ^prp.

3 *
— is shortened sometimes to —
T
, sometimes — V
n seems to prefer —
T
 VV VERBS 167

(3) When the last root-letter does not appear, the

vowel of a preformative is lengthened; e.g. Hiph.
non, nor
" T
•• •• *

and in the Imperf. ^— (both bearing

—
'

(4) In the Perf. ,

the accent) are inserted before consonantal

afformatives, in all stems which are apparently
biiiteral.

VOCABULARY.
vjx, to be light, of no
VM,
— T '
to curse. account. Imperf.
25D, to surround, circle vJA Pi'el, curse.
round. Hiph. turn
round (Trans.). Dil, to finish (with Intrans.

DDtt, Niph. to be melted. verbs). Imperf. OJT.

Imperf. Dft] m Hiph. complete, finish
hhx
— T to roll. (with Trans, verbs).
nrttl, to be dismayed.
01_, to be silent.
Imperf. NT.
Imperf. DT 1

in, to be evil. Imperf.

yyi Hiph. Qiyii ^7?> Hi P h - to be s in -

do evil to (with Dat.).

EXERCISE.
A. I. Translate into English:

rrn-riN
It v
rvorh
t
n^jn
:
- ntivb
x t
nijnn
t —
nth
t t • : f> • »• :
m
v. /

jnbS v?nn (3) :n^u? l^Nn-nN to (2)

rd?7 nrg^jpijn (5) tii-iN -)^rb yizn ( 4)
sYrorra TiiVp *wi rrtm "oarr (6) stirW?
Mitin bx (8) srt3^7 rrpnrp njn (7)
niVnn 1
(10) pV^n DV* ntoa (9) jDrhsBB
: why win nriN ittiNTiN THny-nN rntnn 1
?
1
See note on next page.
168 V V VERBS

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(i) Pity me and do kindness with me. (2) And
they going-round the land of Egypt
finished

(3) To-day (the day) I have rolled this evil thing

from on thee. (4) And their heart melted in
them, and they were dismayed and fled. (5)
And the thing was-evil in his eyes. (6) And
it came to pass, when all the people had finished
going up, that the waters of the river began to
return. (7) And he answered, saying Speak, '

and thou shalt verily curse this people.' And he

was silent, and did not begin to curse them. (8)
Their enemy shall evilly entreat them, for they
have forgotten me. (9) Let me run now and
tell my lord that thou hast finished smiting his

enemies. (10) They have surrounded thee; but

be not frightened before them, because they think
to do thee evil.

EXERCISE.
# B. 1 . Translate into English :

, Djn'N ryp\ ]nji (2) t^PD? ^p\ ^C (0 1

nnst d^q ^$n ova ^yrr-rw sabjj (3)

xt : tt : - •- vT/ iv-: 1- - Vt-

]iro (6) ivryn nj-^n (5) itrr] liy on
rrtrr; (7) i*h xjflra ^i ? 1
yy* Atj "h jjjip

nym
t t
(8) jpm-nN rmrb
: ^t
ni*nn
t '
n^y
t It: v • :
••—: •

(9)
v -^ /
:-wrp
t
^yyb oyn-^
t
oft ^ — D'nijr I
•
-: 1- t t • :
i* 1

1
-r\N tHI^-mm
' -: v
ni^in^
: -
ni^nn
t : : • i-
nnN
t —
rhrr
t :

•tonS rrtm
t
isn
v : •
vn^w m^i• t v — (10)*
v.
\?ihnz
iv'
t :

(11)
\ /
JYTTN
T I"
D*l*l
•- TEN
A"T V
D^H-^
T T T
^Q"Sv
"
:
—
1
Note full pathah because of following guttural.
 :

VV VERBS 169

ntr (12)
\ /
nfoN
it ^pm
':•.•'-: flp^ao
'Av It I
rtrpNi
t it- I II—

^ • '— • \ >-' / iv I
• — t A •• v

npv ) -:|-
tn^i
x •- (14)
V ~' iw
It •• :
^DttS
t t
VY^m m.n
• A • It :
•

:ni:ntt
-: 1-
1
imb DyrrnN
•• t t
: v •
y^ ^ "^
I v- ™n a :

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) I no more curse the earth for the sake of
will
man. (2) And he said unto them, Encompass '

the land (by) the way of the sea.' (3) And he

said unto her, Wherefore hast thou come hither ?
'
'

and the woman was silent and could not speak.

(4) And they began to flee before the enemy,
and the thing was-evil in the eyes of Moses.
(5) And they rolled a great stone to the door,
and they upon it. (6) And the heart of the
sat
people melted, and they feared to go down. (7)
Cursed be those that curse thee, and blessed be
those that bless thee. (8) In that day 1 will
establish for him that which I have spoken to his
house, beginning and finishing. 1 (9) In the
place where the dogs licked his blood, shall the
dogs lick thy blood, even thine. 2 (10) Thy
father made-hard and do thou his yoke, make
(11) And thou hast done more evil
3
it light.

than all who were before thee. (12) And the

people went out, and they spoiled the camp of
their enemies. (13) And she began to afflict
him, and his strength departed from on him.

1
Use Infin. Absol. (Finish, rfe).
2
See on Chap. IX. A § 3. 1.
8
Say '
hast-made-evil to do . .
.'
\JO

CHAPTER XXX.
"a guttural and n"d verbs.

(See Paradigm D.)

A. Pe Gutturals.
§ I. The peculiarities of D guttural verbs arise from the
fact that the gutturals
i. cannot be doubled.
ii. prefer an a to an e or i sound.
iii. cannot take vocal Sh e vva.
iv. often prefer a hateph vowel to a quiescent
Sh e wa.
All these pecularities are illustrated by a verb like
1T2V, '
stand '

e.g. i. Impf. Niph. TQJ£ cp. St?g^

ii. Impf. Qal IfajJ „ htetf] (origin-

ally —j£)
iii. 2 m. pi. Perf. Qal OJT]^ „ DJl^jp
iv. Imperf. Qal lbJ£ „ ^b,^.
§ 2. Remarks. The following further points on these
peculiarities may be noted :

on (i.) The Niph. Impf. Impera. and Inf. Constr. are

the only parts in which the guttural would nat-
urally be doubled. There is no question as to
strong or weak gutturals : all alike require a
vowel long by compensation in the first syllable,
because it bears the counter-tone (Metheg).
 ; — ;

D GUTTURAL AND N D VERBS 171

on (ii.) With regard to the vowel sound preferred, the

general rule is that the guttural prefers a vowel
of a different class to the ultimate vowel. So
in the Impf. Qal if the second vowel is *

the first is — : if — , the first is — ;

* e.g. lfo3£,

but pT\\ But notice

(a) the 1st pers. sing. Impf. Qal regularly prefers —
e.g. ib^N.
(J?)
in the Impera. the hateph vowel is usually of the
a class ; e.g. pVn.
on (iv.) In the Impf. Qal, the first root-letter nearly
always has a hateph vowel, unless it is H ; e.g.

301
but Vntr,, lifirv.
Tfogi,
It must be remembered that a hateph vowel becomes
a full vowel before any kind of Sh e wa ; e.g. nt?5?3, '
he was
made '
;
'
fern. iinttfttt.
t v v

—
:

N.B. In the verbs PPl!,

T T
and IT)!,
'
be, become,'
TT
live,'
' ' '
'
'

the first root-letter hardly ever takes a hateph vowel after a

prefix or preformative 2
e.g. »"PIT, HYO, H^nSl (contrast
nVPf), ^iTl (contrast VH). Note that 1 before these two
verbs is pointed 1 not ^ when the first root-letter has
e
Sh wa; e.g. DJl^lTJ (contrast DJl^il). And notice that
when the H or H has quiescent Sh e wa, the previous vowel
e
is pointed with Metheg to emphasise the quiescent Sh wa.

B. M*B Verbs.

Six verbs beginning with N have certain peculiarities

in the Qal. They are "V2N, 'say'; S5N, 'eat'; 11N,

* x
But when the last vowel is — the first is frequently the same ; e.g. iTUT.
Notice that the apocopated form of this is in% for an accented S ghol never c

comes before a pathah. So also Impf. of Tin is Tin\ but 3 m. pi. is UTinS
the disappearance of the pathah rendering the S e ghol unnecessary.
2
The chief exception is the Hiph. of iTn» i.e. iTTirij '
he saved alive.'
 172 D GUTTURAL AND SD VERBS
•
perish '
; H2N, '
be willing ' ; HCN, '
bake '
; and, in some
cases. "MIN,
-
'
seize.'
T '

The Imperf. Qal has •

for its first vowel, and — for

its second l
(except in the two which are al.^o 71 7) ; e.g.

"V?N\ 'he will say/ 2

In the first pers. sing, only one N is

written ; e.g. "T?N, I will say ' (not "V3NN).

The Impera. has either — or — under the N ; e.g.

The Infin. Constr. has regularly — . ifaN/ contracts

to "ifobv ; but this does not happen with other N D
verbs.

Note. — * is occasionally found also in the preforma-

tives of the Niph. and Hiph. ; e.g. v^N, I will give to
eat . .
.'

VOCABULARY.

11V, to cross over, transgress. v^n, to cease. Impf. THJT.

n^JJ, to answer. *"^0> to encam P-

3JP, to leave. nrTN, to love. Impf. IH^O.

Itjb, to help. bite, to eat.

"11V, to serve. Niph. be tilled. "TIN, to perish.

pXn }
to be strong. Hiph. HP*?, to gather. Impf. ^D^.
take hold of (1). arfo (m.), bread (a.).

1
This — usually becomes — in pause ; e.g. vpK*. But ")ftN*l in pause is

2
In this word alone the final — becomes — > when the addition of Waw
consec. necessitates the drawing back of the accent to the long and open pen-

I ultimate : — is then easier to pronounce before 1 than — • But in the first

< _

person we have "IDfefl.

 :

D GUTTURAL AND ND VERBS 173

EXERCISE.
A. 1. Translate into English:

-: 1- : : — \ / v It t • v: iv ^ /

vw*]
..5,-- ro
VJ/ : Dtt?
it
niN3 tE3
|v
view
it I
13 •
iron
Att -

*rvri
T
h\*
- •
iewi- onyan
A t - • :
wist : -i-
Sn ^baS
y? ^tffcf7|-riN n'tyn (4) :?$## ^ ^
^ (6) tffib nsw Jji?5;i
(<,)
S?^! (5) :ii T 5

insnpa it :'• :
M^fo nay
•••••:! : -i-
dm •
•£
•
D^na myn
fiv: : - •• t i««

t*n 13 n«j vrtpy rj£ "rotta hx (7)

nnxni ^-rra ^S^n nh t»tf*3 (8) tfljtjj

!•• : 1 : '• : v • : - t • It • t : it

Av t • t • :
••••- x : i- • :- \^/

jd^o *tjn*i ^3075 d^7 r>>nji onn ptrrn

1^921 tn ^nin^i
: (10)
(«) See Chap. XXVI. § 6, Rem. I.

2. Translate into Hebrew

(i) I will not leave you, for ye have served me, and
ye shall be before me all the days. (2) This
shallbe done in thy days. (3) Let them eat
bread and drink water. (4) Lay hold on thy
sword and stand (up) to help us. (5) I will
serve him, and let him show mercy to me. (6)
Be strong, to stand up against them. (7) He
will not cease going up against them, for his men
are gathered unto him. (8) And I said, Shall
we cross over the river?' And he answered me
saying, '
Make the people cross over before thee,
and them camp there.' (9) And the king
let

loved me, and said to me, If thou wilt serve me, '

I will gather thy seed unto me that they may eat

in my house all the days.' (10) And he offered
174 D GUTTURAL AND N £ VERBS
up (made to go up) upon his altar,
his son (i i)
And he said, '
Go thou up, eat and drink '
; and
he went up to his house and ate and drank.

EXERCISE.
* B. I . Translate into English :

rrjn oyn-nN ^n:n nn& •»? y^sn ptn (i)

:iTi
n: <h "iira-So
v -: t
atyvi
-:i —
(2)
\ /
:*pNn-nN
vitt
I

Tpgn ^en n± ( 4) :nirr :

vyy :
ftxyny ( 3)

TOti*i— ira-riN
A v *
inwi
- v: Iv™
(5)
\ / •'
:oiStrn
It: n*i iy—
•

TOn ^« nan (6) :wnjL cratf ynttf Taw

It : : v iv : -At - - "t : v -: •.• - -

(8) srrjrj? W 0?#73 Ti*

1
^ PWD (7)
n^^n in^i (9) j-vyn ^39-^? jrw wton
I* t— t v •• v • v -: •• T |A" V • -

nro rtjjp^ ri^nS ^ dvt'S^i (10)

bin
- -• (11)y
V
:t^to
t i :
••
tfw •
pidmS
v: iv
'
^n
- ••
nStr
- ••

-: t • • At :
•
v t : - 1- v •

rr-jan
t it •
bom ...... (12)
\ /
nsnaa
T _
wibe
•••.•
,
ons^-nw
- . . • : •

ppftm yhbb njaijj TSTiyi T^«7 -^ "E

i^DN dm ngn^a^ n«^ iiy tpptap (13)

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) I will not eat, until (if) I have said my say

(words). (2) I did not believe the words, until
that I came and mine eyes saw. (3) Cease to
do evil, learn to do good. (4) If thou wilt love
the Lord with all thine heart, then He will help
thee; but thou forsake Him, then thou shalt
if

surely perish.. (5) Ye shall cross over the river

 D GUTTURAL AND N D VERBS 175

and encamp before the city. (6) Let your feet

turn back from the evil way in which ye are
going. (7) And his heart was strong, and he
forsook God and ceased to worship Him. (8)
As for the man who announced (Partic.) to me
saying, Saul is dead/ thinking that he brought-
*

good-news, why I laid hold on him and killed

him. (9) And his mother used to make for him
a small garment, and used to take it up to him
from time to time (days to-days), at her going up
with her husband to sacrifice. (10) Their gods
are gods of the mountains, therefore they are
stronger than we and let us fight with them in
:

the plain, (to see) if we shall not be stronger than

they. (11) And the king said to the prophets,
*
Shall I go against this place to battle, or shall I
forbear?' And they said, '
Go up.' (12) And
they rose up and left their tents and their camp
as it was, and they fled for (vN) their lives.
 176

CHAPTER XXXI.

V GUTTURAL AND h GUTTURAL VERBS.

(See Paradigms E and F.)

A. V Guttural Verbs (with YV Verbs).

The following general rules follow from the peculiarities
of the gutturals :

i. A
vocal Sh e wa is replaced ' by a hateph pathah
e.g. ^rina,, not *ntyi.
This — generally influences a preceding short
vowel, by turning it into a vowel of its own class ;

eg. ^tDfJttJ, not It^Htp (Imperative).

"1 may take a vocal She wa, but sometimes it has a
hateph pathah e.g. *Ol!l. ;

ii. Pathah usually replaces holem in the Impf. and

Impera. Qal eg. tontp\ ;

Sometimes pathah replaces £ere in the Perf. Pi'el

eg. nn; but nnti.

f
iii. The guttural cannot be doubled in the Pi el, Pu'al,
and Hithpa'el.
1 requires a short vowel before it to be lengthened
f
by compensation ; * e.g. Pi el ^C% (for T^50 > Pu a l

tni (for T^>

1
The beginner is reminded that — and — , when due to compensatory
lengthening, are fixed ^/.^. unaffected by the accent.
 : ,;

V GUTTURAL AND h GUTTURAL VERBS 177

n, n, V usually require no compensation ; e.g. DH2

(Niph. or Pi'el from Dm), ^ntt (Pi.).

N sometimes requires compensation, sometimes not J

e.g. JNB, but \M.

B. h Guttural Verbs (including verbs ending in PT).

The following rules give all the main peculiarities

(1) The Impf. Qal has — for its second vowel,

p 7 verbs sometimes have .)

'

—
(2) The guttural, when final and preceded by —
n — , i or *), requires a furtive pathah ; e.g. Xy)^T\.

(3) ~ followed by furtive pathah contracts into —

except
(a) in infinitives and participles absolute;

(J?)
in pause forms.
e.g. rhti) (Pi.), in pause nW\ Partic. H Wtt
constr. Hvtpp. Inf. absol. T\vV5 ; constr. Jl7tL\

(4) A helping — slips in before the Jl of the 2nd

pers. fern. sing, in the Perfects, without disturbing

the pointing of the T\ ; e.g. J"!l)T?{p (not £lD7ttJ).

VOCABULARY.

Tto (Pi.)> t0 bless. P??> to cry out.

n? (Pi.), to comfort. Niph. mttf (Pi.), to serve.

repent of (yV). Uhn (Pi.), to drive out.

|*?5 (Pi.), to refuse. *inp (Pi.), to hasten.

SDttS (Niph.), to swear. "ITO., to choose.

• Nttf, to ask, beg, inquire. WP (Hiph.), to save.

12
178 V GUTTURAL AND 7 GUTTURAL VERBS

EXERCISE.
(Before doing this exercise, the beginner should carefully
read Appendix B, on the formulae used in taking oaths.)

A. I. Translate into English:

— ftt •;'. v V -: v t - m
m

p«l yiNnp ttttf$!5 (2) tovni« tin

(a)
\tv trrtm
It :
vntoto
••
it : :
o^mto
t •
1 :
(3)
^J'
sDimtfto
it • i

Nte*l ?i)jtayi ?IWJ?j TIP^T) n5 n : 5J73JR

— : v • •• — x •" \J/ '

\ :• •• tt v

•ray-nN
A- - v
*rarti (6)
-: i- \ /
: D3ttN
v
ijns
-T
ntfw
:v -:• •
rm -ui-na • : -

\v/
(8) s^ab
Itt :
raizjn
- t •
tin V
(?)/ :D^rr'w n^N
iv- t •• i v:

^5 tgwWlfl *h ^|pgg (9) : Tpjnip-TO ^3^

-r»N m?i!i ojii TOton (10) P^pa p^Dtf

2. Translate into Hebrew: \

(1) They fought against them, and were smitten

and they cried unto their God to save them. (2)
And he asked water from them, and they refused
to give it to him. (3) And he asked him, saying,
1
Swear, pray, unto us and he sware unto him, ' ;

saying, As the Lord liveth and as thy soul liveth,

'

I will not drive thee out.' (4) He repented of

his transgression. (5) And he-did-evil to them,
and sent away their sons and daughters. (6)
Thou (fern.) hast cried unto me, and been com-
forted. (7) And it came to pass, »when he had
finished eating bread, that he hasted to go out
thence. (8) Choose ye to-day whom ye will
serve. (9) And I sware unto him, saying, The
Lord shall do so to me and more also, if I do this
evil thing/ ( 1 o) Bless me, even me x also.

1
Use "OX here ; see § 3, note 1, on p. 39.
 : :

V GUTTURAL AND b GUTTURAL VERBS 179

EXERCISE.
* B. I. Translate into English:

tin w-bsn vifc bt&n ^b^n

t^ m
^nnpb ^fc ^bb *b irtoy nn r 2 ) D*nwn :

onr fe&] nin^ yatto (3) jipn raia rrm

- • •.• : v • " It \TV it : I
••
t -

m-Sa nai'n w/
t- (5)
jdmsq
• iv : •
onto
t
charo
"t-!It
D*na&
*At: •

nyn ^^"ii (6) Jttf'pttJ? ^ ^#1 "^n

V S I" V V • • • I" ft ''. — '.
'

-vyn-jiN rrtrr trw nSsm nSy (7) i^yb^

• T • v Av - - • " Fr • x / ' v iv - -

Ytnpa
A
irnis-nN
t
: v '• : :
•
rw (9)
\-'/ jmna.
v v
<niyTiN
- it :

nr\b*\
V T •-
myn-Sy
A T - *
12*1
-T- *w
_--\(10) ito
TT / |
vtqd^
.....

wan -At - nnQ- v

vn tj
D^ttoa
t -:
•
re^nai
t t - (n)
\ / : :
jm it

:--: t -• v • : ,-

:J«^3 nngS 1:21-^29*3 (12) tw^ij?

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) And the child stood before him and ministered
unto him. (2) Whatever he did, the Lord made
him prosper. (3) As the heavens are-high above
the earth, so great His mercy toward them that is

fear Him. (4) Let not thine heart be high,

neither haste thee to do-evil. (5) And he asked
the woman saying, Wherefore didst thou cry '

out ? (6) And she refused to be comforted, for

'

she said, They have driven me out from my

'

land.' (7) And he sware unto him, saying,

1
Surely I will bless thee, and thou shalt be
blessed.' (8) I have repented that I have set
him up to be king; for he hath turned back
from after me. (9) And the king asked how
l8o V GUTTURAL AND 7 GUTTURAL VERBS

the people fared and how the war fared. (10)

1

Hast thou (fem.) not heard that he is king, and

our lord doth not know it? (i i) Ask what I

shall do for thee, before I am taken from with

thee. (12) Nay, but thou shalt verily send me
away. (13) Send away my people, that they
may serve me. (14) Thou shalt not cause thy
voice to be heard with us, lest some of us smite
you. (15) Cause me to hear Thy loving-kind-
ness in the morning cause me to know the way
;

wherein I should walk.

1
Say '
for the peace of the people.'
 i8i

CHAPTER XXXII.
&"b VERBS.

(See Paradigm G.)

§ I. In connexion with these verbs, it is important

to remember that N at the beginning of a syllable, is

a guttural at the end of a syllable, it is quiescent.

;

Where it is quiescent, the preceding vowel is always

long (except in the 3rd and 2nd pers. fern. plur. Impf.);
e.g. Perf. Qal HSID, <
he found '
; Impf. Nfflp?. tihto (stative),

'he is full (pi)'] Impf. vhffi.

§ 2. Perfects. In all other Perfects except the Qal, the u
long vowel before consonantal afformatives is — ; e.g. I
Niph. mvi, rwwsoi ; Hiph. N^n, nNsnn.
In the Perf. Qal, however, the — is retained (except in 1

stative verbs) ; e.g. ftNXfo (but rtNTO).

§ 3. Imperfects. The Impf. Qal has — for its second

vowel e.g. N^pV
; But in the 3rd and 2nd pers. fern.

plur. there is an accented — before the N ; e.g. T\^$luT\.

In the Impf. Hiph'il this — takes the place of — in
<
the corresponding parts of the strong verb ; e.g. njNSftJi.
§ 4. There is frequently a confusion between forms of
N7 and 7\h verbs; e.g. CPNtph (for D^tph), 1 Sam.
xiv. 33.

So the Infin. Constr. of N^tt is Vtihft.

1
This Qame$ is retained before suffixes ; e.g. *JK¥D*i ^K¥D*.
1 82 x"b VERBS

The commonest example of this is in the word riNlp/,

'to meet' (with suff. iriN"}p7, etc.), which strictly comes
from the root tTSp.

VOCABULARY.
N!JO, to find. N7S, Niph., be wonderful.
NTO, to be full be full
;
Nton to sin
of, fill (with Ace).
Pi'el, to fill (with *?0 (
noun m ')'
sin '>
with

two Ace). suff

^rO--
Plur -

toto, to hate. n^ton.

frOp, to call, read. nN"p7, to meet.

EXERCISE.
A. I. Translate into English:

w:ton ih «:-«to mj^ Tit^n (1)

h& (2)

d« (4) t^jfa nrit n«7?3 (3) :fl3$MiH

b*nfcr> ^1 law (c) j^OTift h wipft

toT Tip bnpwT VlT '

1
(6) :ori« y^an
VT T
fcrrom
T - 1
: V / IT I •• '

iv : T* v •• - -: I v v t : it •
mr - it

j ^nwV JNttjp b& h TOfctaj *W*x? n ^5 (7)

^nasto
- • •• :
(9)
V-7/ n^snni
:
t v - nnfc reM^m
nthItt t v - (8)
: \ / : • : •

pin
»T T
*a •
tobe
ATT
^*rv
"T (10)
>
• /
P7 yyrh
- T
itonm
»••- - l* . I

:i2BB
lv
nipt •

1
Cognate Accusative,

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) The earth is full of evil ; but thou hast filled my
hand with good things. (2) Why wast thou not
afraid to lift up thy hand against my life? (3)
Thou hath done wonderful and fearful things
(use Niph. Participles, fern. plur.). (4) And I will
 &"b VERBS 183

be found of 1 you, and will bring you back to

your land. (5) They came to meet him and
brought-back word to him. 2 (6) These are the
sins wherewith he made them to sin. (7) And
she read the book in their ears and they said, ;

1
The Lord shall do so to us and more also, if we
do not hearken unto thee.' (8) Let all my haters
go down to Sheol. (9) Thou hast taken away
(N&O) my and my transgression is no more.
sin,

(10) I caused them to lift up his corpse and

bring it thither. (11) When thou wast but a
boy (use Tty30> thou wast brought to this land
where thou art to-day. (12) And they hastened
to meet them, and they asked them, saying, Why '

did ye hate us, and didst not save us from our

l
enemies ?

EXERCISE.
* B. I. Translate into English:

sD'&itf
It ^\b '
:
afem
t! ••
t^n '
Av ••
tob
xt
nipp
t :
n6p
t •
m
\ /

(3) 5;pfTl HTip-riN NfetfVl TOD Itttfn (2)

ybian
v v -
'
t - Ti^^n
t ' -: : •
tin *a •
N-vn
At
bx- -vs&n
v -•

ip^n-Dy
v Av -
' •
Dttf
t
m-nn vv — :
tw mn
'
t •• •
u)
\TV pinT 1
.

(5) vinVbi TfnnN Nina ^«i

tifniTriN
j niN7S3
it:* DDsnpsi
•••::'•:
nin^
t
nton
v -:i-
nrrn
t t
^ ^ttJ^pnn
:'- :
•
; •

tin*) nb*i inept*. b& nyb& *ir\o& xbn (6)

toyp Nj-^ptfn PP7N ^en*} (7) :D£iyptp

on«sin^
•••••:-:
m a-
n^n
tt t
(s)
n /
: tinesT
• !••
ra d^d
nnnN7
t -: 1- :
rptoy
t T
m-rio
v -
•
(9)
\s / :dwt i*
ntihti
v :
prattf
T t

ns-t]^ dm (10) :TinN-nN tofe&i tTn^tin

N*>n nfcirfo : •
riN^n nn?^n
t - ••
: it
mm t t :
ijrro
a- : - pp^sn
- - • :

vrn
:- •
(11)
\ /
:T7N-pb
Iv
i*
nipp
t
ppsin
- -:
y^n
v
nujNn
t : : • -: •
it
1
7 often = ' by,' after Passive verbs. 2
Use two Accusatives.
1
84 N" ?
1
VERBS

'
v v - t % •
: c v -: • t t

— t •• t : - t': •- /. r : • -

mam nid^d n*np7 t^m (12) :nn« 2

T»y

TV" -t- At • — • -: ~ " T T ••

: nSnfon
t T v: I

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) And they have sinned, but do Thou

said, *
We
take away our sin.' (2) If now I have found
favour in thine eyes, let me go and find the
woman. (3) And she said, Thou hatest me and '

lovest me not, for thou hast not told me this

thing.' (4) My lips shall be full of Thy praise.
(5) How wonderful are Thy works, O Lord I !

cannot find them. (6) The stone was heavy,

and they could not lift it up. (7) Thou hast
walked in the way of thy father, and hast made
my people to sin. (8) Arise, go down to meet
him Lo, he is in the vineyard, which he has
;

gone down to possess (it). (9) And he hasted

to call (for) them, and he said, I have sinned '

against the Lord your God.' (10) Only make

(fern.) for me thence a little bread at the first, and

thou shalt bring it forth to me and for thyself ;

and thy son thou shalt make afterwards. (11)

And when Moses came before the Lord to speak
with Him, he used to remove it (fern.) until his
going out and he used to go out and speak to
;

the children of Israel what he was commanded.

(12) And (if) the Lord is with us, then why has
all this happened to ( = found) us ? and where are
all His wonderful works which our fathers related
to us?
1 2
Translate ' which (ought) to come . .
.' Lit. as to city.
 i85

CHAPTER XXXIII.

IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Many of the commonest nouns in Hebrew are irregular
1
in declension.
2
(a) t2TW, 'man,' has for its plural D^JN, which is

strictly the plural of UJ-N, a rare and poetical

synonym for tt^N ; Constr. ^ttfjN.

(J?)
TW&, woman/ has * Constr. rittJN ; with suffixes
^r\m, etc. Plur. D^J ; Constr. ^?.
(c)j IN, '
father/
I »./. , i .1 > have a Mn & Constr. and before
the sing.
inN. '
brother,

suffixes ; e.g. Constr. ^1N, "TIN ; with suff. VIS?

or VTON, rTTlN, TON, D^fiN, etc.
In the plural they are declined differently.
IN; pi. ntoN; Constr. JTQN ; with suffixes VTilN,
3
etc.

HSl; pi. iDTW; Constr. YW (note the

4
— ) ; with
suffixes nTTN, milK, ^pHN, D^HN, etc'

(rf) niJl^, 'sister/ Plur. (rVPfiN), with suff. V^rjN, etc.

1
Words expressing close blood-relationship are mostly irregular, as in many
other languages.
2
V"& and n$S are often used redundantly before other nouns ; as &033 C^X,
4
a prophet'; PUttta i1$K, 'a widow.' See also Chap. IX. B. § 3. £>:tf

denotes 'man in his frailty, mortal man.'

3
Dni3S is often found for DrfHUS.
4
n virtually reduplicated.
6
Notice the S e ghol, because pathah may never precede n (so TIX in pause
<
becomes TIN). Cp. 1HN, 'one'; Constr. "HIK.
TV T V ." *
I 86 IRREGULAR NOUNS

(e) pi, 'son'; Constr. 1 ]^; with suffixes ^l, i:a, TRa, TJJJ*

etc. PI. D^l.

T

m
•

(/) m, 'daughter' (for £}*) ; Constr. ; with suffixes

vh (for vija), etc pi. ni:i.
(£•) JT^, 'house'; Constr. rPSl; with suffixes TO, etc.

Plur. 2
EPJt|
IT
; Constr. Vft
IT••
;
'
with suffixes DHTO,
T
... .. >

—
,

etc. (fixed ).

(k) DV, ' day ' ;

plur. 3
CWpJ ; Constr. W,
(z) ^75, ' implement, weapon'; Constr. 175 ; with suffixes
vbr), TJ?5, etc. Plur. D^5 ; Constr. ^?.
(/) D^, 'water'; Constr.^ or reduplicated 'WD; with
suffixes Dp^ft, etc.

(£) fy (f.), «
city.' PI. D*ny (fixed — ) ; Constr. ^V.
(/) HS, mouth
'
'
; Constr. ^B ; with suffixes Y*S or ^B }

ITS), ?pS, etc. Plur. ni>D.

(**) tftfl, 'head.' Plur. tN#HT\ (fixed — ); Constr.

"^N*}. (The sing, was originally tt?N1)

(») Dtf, ' name' ; Constr. DttJ or 4

DttJ ; with suffixes ^tT,
Tftptf, etc. Plur. rtottf ; Constr. rfoty

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into Hebrew:

(i) These are the heads of their fathers' houses.

(2)
He is my brother, for he doeth the will of God.
(3) And he said to his daughter, '
Do not refuse
to do this.' (4) And his brethren came before
1
Or |2, esp. in phrase }13"}Sl WliT, 'Joshua the son of Nun.'
2
The Qamec is almost certainly a not 6. So it seems to violate the rule that
a long vowel cannot stand in a closed syllable unless it bears the accent. But
Wright {Comparative Grammar, p. 88) thinks that it is contracted from DW3
and the Dagesh is D. lene. The Metheg perhaps supports this view.
3
Perhaps for D^DV. But if so the derivation has been forgotten in the

Constr., which should be ^D\

" T
4
DK> only with Maqqeph following.
 : ;

IRREGULAR NOUNS 187

him, with their weapons of war in their hands.

(5) What is thy name? And he answered, My c

name is David, and I am the son of thy father's

sister.' (6) And it came to pass in the days of
his grandfather, that he built many houses. (7)
And he saw the cities of the land, that they were
very strong. (8) Lo his wife and his brother's !

wife are coming to comfort thee. (9) And

he smote them with (T>) the edge (HB) of the
sword. (10) Hearken to the words of his mouth.
(11) These are the names of my brethren and of
their father. (12) And her brother dwelt by the
river, and drank of its waters. (13) And your
fathers did not trust in x
his word ; and he
stretched out his hand, and the waters of the
river were turned 2 to blood. (14) And his father
said to him, Let us hasten to go down to Egypt
'

for the thing is sure. 3 Behold, my son was dead

4
and is alive again.'

2. Translate (using the vocabulary at the end of the

book)

pjton nypS ^vnrji njn m,%a wnb%

an •
w•
Dmaa tow (2)
:
ns-^n
t - e^-Snv t t :
- - \ /

n« (3)
w' j^ton d^hn cttoM — ^ Tpa*i to : it-: • - • t .
'
Av •• • ••

(4)
\-t/
:n^to^
tivt: -
n&N7
t
mn
v-
timSx ^ro
-t
^a
^
• : • •

:on^an
It:
ant^ai
t t •• : Hv'
M v •• :
"GOT
v v t
NSfa ••

vsa
A- :
Dnain-nw
t•- v :
MEfen
t - : :
nw mrn t •• t :- • :
ro
VJ/
nana
v v
Tinim *irr»0 o*n ^a oy mrr**
: v •
^abwi k :
• • : ' •
•
: iv • it :

wo unrnv -
in^a
: t v
•
5
(6)
\
sttwi ittJM
v
n« : ' » -: 1- -:

a'p^ -hy ^Dtf *n,^ to (7) :onnn itfto

1
Use Hiph. of p« with 2.
2
*lDn Niph.
3
Use Niph. Part. ptf.
4 6
Say, 'has lived.' ='on the first (day) of . .
.'
iSS IRREGULAR NOUNS

int ttW
t
1
v
(8)
v / iTOtf
iv '
:
mm v : i-
S»«^fer
t •• : •
dm >S

•.tana
-:
i
••
vnto r :
rra ••
vnw
• t :
nop
IAt't
tragi
•''.:
"TTn tpt
i'-t

•.ms-nt*
t v i
•
rrotitfn
t — . : •
view 9
:
rrw?
t-:i--
tops t': • : i- ( )
-J J

iTCEn-nN
t — :v •
mom
t t
nti rrim
: - At
^d nno (10)
t t : : • • ^ /

itf«
v -:
wn t t -
mm rttit (n)
v : c
;rnm ^2 -utn \ / it : ' :
• •.• -:

ittjM
v -:
ntoarr
t -
^ra-Twy
t
••-
nim
t
-u-q
-
it : : •
*np
t' t
 189

CHAPTER XXXIV.
NOUNS FROM SlS, VV, AND VV STEMS.

§ i. n7 Stems. Nouns from these stems may belong-

to the first, second, or third declension.

(a) Type JTTO, field.'

First declension. '

The Construct ends in Jl— e.g. TVVD. ;

With suffixes, the Jl— is dropped ; e.g. TTTO> etc.

But the suffix of the 3rd pers. masc. sing, is

*in— . and fern. H— ; e.g. *tmto, mto. Plural

• T

(So also verbal adjectives like HD^, '

pretty, hand-

some.' Constr. riD^ ; fern. HsD\)

(£) Second declension. Type "HS), '

fruit.' (In pause

"HBO
The Construct is the same. Suffixes are added to
the monosyllabic stem *HQ ; e.g. VHD, etc.
e
The plural is formed as from a S gholate noun ; e.g.

0^5) ; but the Construct is irregular in not

dropping i.e. — ; it is
^"J3 (not ^5).
Other forms are seen in

WT, half '

;
with sufif. V?n, etc.
ijg, '
affliction '
„ Vjy, etc.
; „

(c) Third declension. Type njJl, ' shepherd ' (really

a Partic. from H^H). Constr. Jl}H ; with suff.

*V\ W\ etc. Plur. D^Jh.

190 NOUNS FROM 7l"b } fy AND v"V STEMS

§ 2. l'V and **j> Stems.

(a) Monosyllables.
e.g. D^D, '
horse '
;
plur. O^D.
TUL\ 'ox'; plur. D'Hltf ; Constr. 'nW.
(£) Disyllables are more numerous,
mtt, '
death '
; Constr. Jlto. With suff. iiTltt, etc.
1
T^ 'eye/; Constr. p#. With suff. tt^, etc.

Dual D^?? ;
plur. rh^3J (meaning springs of
water ').

byi, * might/ ' army '

; Constr. TH ; with suff.

i^H, etc. Plur. d^tJ. Constr. plur. ^TT.

§ 3. VV Stems.
The final vowel of these nouns takes a Dagesh forte
when suffixes are added this necessitates the shortening ;

of the previous vowel.

(a) Disyllabic nouns, bearing a prefix.

e.g. IDE?, *
surrounding ' (v 11D) ; Constr. IDE ; with
suff. "»2Lp?5, etc.

'
shield ' (V'p) with suff. i -Dp, etc. (with
J3&, ;

fixed — ).

(b) More often they are monosyllables, with a, e or u y

vowels
e & [
D 5? > ' people.' With suff. te^, etc. Plur. D^V.
^11, 'hill, mountain.' With suff. ilil, etc.

Plur. D^n.
fc
jn, evil.' Plur. D^JTV
1 1
l ?, '
heart.' With suff. "ft ?, etc. Plur. fifa?.

ph, statute.' With suff ij?H, etc. Plur. D^ty

1
The — is a helping vowel ;
primitive form ]))}>
 NOUNS FROM ft\ W, AND VV STEMS 191

VOCABULARY.

HtoJJQ (m.), doing, work. H5 (£)> palm (of hand), sole

nitf^to (
m 0» appearance. (of foot). Dual QiQ5.
HD^, beautiful, fair. piur. rrts|.

PJJTj (m.), neighbour. DJ (m.), sea. Plur. D^.

fltfW TY^M, they HEP, to the sea.
said each one to 17 (m.), heart _, ~
v ]

This neighbour,
' •. The Cere
*
ON (f.), mother]
[his brother,
is *
fixed ' ; z.£. cannot
i.e. one another. be shortened in the
rtinD (m.), encampment. Construct.
'

(f.), eye. t!tf (m.), strength.

flg
v^n (m.), might, army, ph (m.), statute.
substance. 7i), all; with suffixes ^75,
^Jl (m.), midst. etc.

jTfito (m.), death. 11, separation, 'fal? = by

T?, living ( ^H). himself, alone.

EXERCISE.

i. Translate into English:

lab flag (2) idsw? *itf*} vgi? hVn (0

nbsi (3) :mjn n^n-n« nitey ^pi*?
jd^3 D^n OTiyn ( 4) :^to^ ron ^snS
\'~. : • • t •
-: a •• - : vt- \->/

mm (7) tra? n^ yv>i ^rer-ran n^ (6)

ly vijn-nNV .. ••
tf*N •
inwT- (8) vt
• \ *
:
|TT
ibs-••
^ en - T

pr&r» no'n
' t —: • t—
di-tdk
At t -
nto
:
nna vm •<{ |- • :— (9)
v-7 /
: dm | T \

i^rtao rr^nn rtf^ nan (10) :otra

192 NOUNS FROM iVS, iV, AND y"? STEMS

2. Translate into 1 Icbrcw :

(i) And they spake to one another, saying, '

He shall
surely go in our midst.' (2) This is her doing,
and it does not please us (say, ' is not good in our
eyes'). (3) And lo a man came out of their
camp to meet us ; and he stood alone, and cried
out, Ye are all of you as dead men.' (4) And
'

his men of might returned to the house of their

master, and said to him, She is still '
alive.' (5)
And his heart was uplifted, and he said to his
soul, '
I shall not die, for my strength is as the
strength of God.' (6) And it shall come to pass
after my death, that the children of Israel shall
turn aside from thee and shall do what is good in

their(own) eyes. (7) My heart is heavy upon

me, O my mother, and I cannot be silent. (8)
And it came to pass, when the soles of the feet of

the priests, bearers of the ark (p^Nll) rested upon

that place, that the waters returned. (9) And
he said, '
Go down to the sea, through the midst
of which ye passed over '
; and they said, As
the Lord liveth, and as thy soul liveth, we will
not go down.' (10) This is his work, for he
hath established the mountains in his strength.

EXERCISE.
* B. I. Translate into English :

rivnoi Vrtrfs* ^m m| twt^fij tfw (0

ibnn- :
tab (2)
\ /
:*7to1 :
*ni:3
t
D^rnNn yvbn
- - • v: it '
:

fc^m (3) :Tpn rrcto nhnn tib*) Tpn rrci

ntfStf nyn-riN
t t v :
otw
v t- (4)
\~/ :ntrto
- iv ;
r\sn
- :
nrrn
t : it

"spilttjpryi (5) jngrjgri ^yim ntaji o^fcrj

W^ *Crfl 'TIS (6) : D^n ora DN IpJTOfe?)

rbm - : •- •abisin-bto
'- v Av v
ynti*\
- •- (7)
\' /
:
: wwi D^n-n«1 • • - v
 *

NOUNS FROM T}'h i

Vtf, AND v"V STEMS 193

I- t :
• •• t - v -: * t— .
1- •• t

ntf«3
v -: 1-
D^stfei
A- t
D^pn : • J- •.
Mn^•••
: v
^mraS
-
n*n
• : • •• •
(8)/
\

rran^Brr *»nm (9) :niti^7 *ton rrim ^2

T?ft 1171 TH n^ P3* ' w # n^ P3 n?!$
yn (10) so^^t) Q^'n ^wtf nrcp pjm
(n)
\ /
:mto ^dn itfa o^nn-nN
iv
- • ix v -: • • i v
n^-nse
x x :

ybyn
j
X
ip*-nN ^on
' • T
^sntrSn
IT - •• '" •• V * • 'AX I *
^n^-iy
- T ~

2. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) Knowye that the Lord, He is God alone. (2)

In the midst of life we are in death therefore ;

to whom shall we flee but to Thee, O Lord ?

(3) Thou art fair, O my daughter; thine eyes
are as the stars of heaven. (4) Great is the
Lord, and terrible is His strength yea His ;

works are wonderful. (5) Remember what the

Lord did to all the host of Egypt. (6) Because
ye have done this, know that ye are dead men
all of you. (7) And they said one to another,
'
Was not our heart uplifted when He spake unto
us ? '
(8) Thou hast borne me, O my mother, a
man of affliction in the midst of my people, and
my strength hath departed from me. (9) Is this
thy kindness with thy friend ? Wherefore didst
thou not go with thy friend? (10) I will come
upon him when he is weary and slack-of hands,
and I will smite him alone, (n) And he was
sick of his sickness wherewith he was to die.

(12) And I saw that thou art not saving (us);

so I took (D^tp) my life in my hands (palms) and

I went out against them. (13) The dead that

he slew in his death were more than (those) that
he slew in his life.

1
See p. 55, § 5.
2
=was going on growing stronger.
r3
 194

CHAPTER XXXV.
NUMERALS.

§ I. The numerals i — 19 have different forms with

masc. and fern, nouns; and 1 — 10 have two states, Absolute
and Construct. In the case of the numerals 3-9, there is the
apparent anomaly of a seemingly feminine numeral agreeing
with a masculine noun, and vice versa. The number of
nouns after numerals also presents some difficulty.
§ 2. The numerals as far as 10 are as follows:

With masc. nouns. With fern, nouns.

Abs. Constr. Abs. Constr.

T V
2
nn« nrrN
3 Dvnp
T '
T

t t :
- SETJM yar$
rrofcn ntrpn ttton
••T
Eton
new tt)tt5 ttJtf

1
The n is virtually reduplicated, the form being like Pl3p. For — instead
of — before l"l, cf. p. 185, note 5.

2
The pausal form is DIIX.
3
The anomalous Dagesh m the vocal Sh e wa is to be noticed. Possibly the
s
original form was D PO£\
4
The root is JD"1; the fc< being prosthetic, i.e. prefixed to make pronunciation
easy. Compare the French esperer, from sperarc,
 : : ^

195
With masc. nouns. With fern, nouns.
r —
Abs. Constr. Abs. Constr.
7- t : •
n^tp
8.
t :
rgbtp rxp$ 2
rratp
9- JWjtfi
10.
t t — J"QM
V V

Of these, <?«* is an ordinary adjective; the rest are

substantives. The latter are more often used in the
Construct; OTJ&fc} fitt&#, 'a triad of men'; but they
e.g.

are also found in the Absolute, in apposition

to the noun ;

e-g. OTJ&IJ ntpbtp or n^tp mjJjft '

a triad (consisting of)
men/ or men, three (of them).'
'

The numerals 3-10 were themselves feminine nouns.

When it was thought desirable
to have different forms
for these numerals when used before feminine nouns,
a secondary form was apparently invented which
itself
looks masculine noun.
like a Thus we get the pheno-
menon of feminine forms of numerals used before masculine
nouns, and apparently-masculine forms used
before femi-
nine nouns.
§3. H-19.
In these numerals, 10 appears

before masc. nouns as *WV

T T
before fern. „ iTjSpJJ
The unit, which is in the Construct, always precedes the
ten. Hence the forms are as follows

With masc. nouns. With fern, nouns.

11. *)toy *rn«8 rryyy nn«3
1
V2V and JJBfrl are anomalous Constructs from S^gholate nouns.
2
One would expect fUbtf, but this is never found.
8
For both nriN and DriK in n, there is another form Mty from a root
011
^ agafn nly ASSyrian rCrhapS U WaS ^"
t^Exik
° ^ '
borro at Ae time of
196 NUMERALS
With masc. nouns. With fern, nouns.

12. ntey ^tf 1 mtog vtoJ 1

13.
**
*ripy
t t
ntt?7ttJ
v 1
nii:^
••:•.• ttptf
:

§ 4. 20-90.
20 is Q^^lTV, a plural from *lt?^. 30-90 are the
corresponding units with plural terminations ; e.g. D^lLvtf,
^•TlN, etc. 2

These numerals are indeclinable, and may precede or

follow the nouns. In compound numerals the unit (used
in the Absolute) must be in the proper gender it is joined ;

to the ten by a copula, and may either precede or follow

it; e.g. 22 is mjtjft tJH^ or D^JT) D?3#.
3
§5. 100 is a fern, noun 11N?P; 200 is D^ilNtt (for
DWft?) 300, ;
rriN?? trStp, etc.
The noun following is regularly in the singular. In
composite numbers the unit comes first, then the ten, then
the hundred, all joined by the copula. The noun may be
repeated with each.
1000 is a masc. noun *)7N ; 2000, D^QTN ; 3000,
d^n nu&ttf, etc.; 10,000, mm.
§ 6. Age is expressed by the use of ]5>j
'
son of,' or
Jill, 'daughter of;

e.g. a man of thirty TWb D^ttfotf \1 ttfW

a girl D^ttJ TO.

of twelve D^ttJ mtoy W3
§ 7. The number
nouns with numerals. of
After the numerals 2-10, the noun is used in the plural.
After the numerals 11— 19, the noun is usually in the

plural, except in the case of such common words as IL^N,

'man'; DV\ '

day '
; PCtt?, '
year '
; 7j?tt>, '
shekel,' etc. (cp. our
five foot).

1
In 12, we find masc. D s 3^ six times, and fern. D^fi^ four times.
2 Notice that the S e gholate numerals njD£>, tiyWR have not their proper

plural ; i.e. the plural is not D s yn^, DWfl, but tP?30j D^fi-
3
The Constr. DNp is found only in the Hexateuch in the Priestly source.
 .

NUMERALS 197

After numerals above 20, the noun is usually in the

singular, though the plural is occasionally found. 1
A
§8. Ordinals. These are only found up to 10. After
that, cardinals are used for ordinals.
The ordinals 3rd, 4th, 7th, 8th, 9th, and 10th are formed
by inserting ^— between the second and third root-letters,

and adding the suffix *•— fern.

, i"P—

First, jWtn Fein. reWfcT|

Second, *y$ Fern. tVyfi
Third, ^755 etc.

Fourth, lySl (note disappearance of prosthetic N)

Fifth, i#prj (or nj^Xj)
Sixth, 'tpttJ

Seventh, ^Itp
Eighth, ^tjj
Ninth, ^#£1
Tenth, ^'W.
* Remark.
In giving the number of a year, ]"£$ (Constr. of njtf,
*
year ') is often used before the cardinal number ; e.g.

D'nipj? riJtjSSL, ' in the twentieth year.'

Sometimes cardinals are used instead of ordinals below
10; e.g. ttfrtf rOtpSL/in the third year.' Eft* inNJ, 'in
the first day.'

9. Nouns of multiple. '

Double '
is Q^75? (dual of

Other multiples are sometimes expressed by the fern.

1
Always when the noun precedes the numeral. t^N D^jnflX, * forty times

a man' ; but D^ySTlX D^tJON, 'men, forty in number.'

" ~:
• t :
•
t

Possibly the explanation of the variety in the number of nouns after numerals
is this : we have and therefore have separate names for each numeral
ten fingers,
up to 10. Arithmetic proper begins at 10 ; therefore in primitive times it would
be natural to say 'nine men,' but '
ten times a man.'
 iy8 NUMERALS

dual D^iiyi^N,
; four times.'
e.g. Multiples are often '

expressed by the fern, form of the ordinals or cardinals

(understanding D^D (fern.), time,' or D^pVB) ; e.g. rinSt,
1
once ' ; rP2tt?, '
a second time.'
# 10. Distributives may be expressed either by repeat-
ing the cardinal ; e.g. Q^ip D?2$» '
two by two,' or by the
preposition 7 ; e.g. D^tT/, '
by twos.'
# II. Figures are expressed by consonants

1 *»- p-P, 100-400.

N-tt, 1-9. 2, 10-90.

500 is pH; 900 is priH, etc. N-*> = 1000-10,000.

EXERCISE.
I. Translate into Hebrew:

(1) She is five years old. (2) He is eleven years

old. (3) And it came to pass in the twentieth
year, on the eighteenth day of (to) the ninth
month, that his brother died. (4) And he com-
manded the second and the third, and they
passed before him. (5) He had with him
ninety-four men and sixty-seven women. (6)
And there were born to him two daughters and
five sons and the five sons were all men of
:

might. (7) And it shall be that, if he shall take

a horse from his neighbour, he shall restore 2 it
fourfold. (8) We be twelve men, sons of one
father and the youngest 3 is this day with our
;

father. (9) He had with him four thousand

horses, and a hundred mares. (10) And he
4
called to him the second time.

1
15 is 10, not H\ as the latter stands for the sacred name Jah. So 16 is

Tl2, not V, as the latter is also connected with the Divine name.
2 8 4
DJ?B*. jlttp. See above, § 9.
 :

NUMERALS 199

2. Translate into Hebrew

(1) And the man was very honourable among the
sons of his people, and he had three sons and
seven daughters. And
he had three thousand
sheep and two thousand and two hundred asses
and five hundred oxen, and he had twenty-nine
servants and sixteen maids. And when his
eldest son was eighteen years old he took him a
wife of the daughters of the land, and she bore
him five sons. And he said unto his father, Give '

me, I pray thee, the half of thy goods, 1

for I am
thy first-born.' And his father said, '
Remain
here till I die, and thou shalt have the half; but
he would not consent. But he grew very angry,
and he went away into a far country with his
wife and his five sons : and it came to pass in
the third year after this that he died in the sixth
month, on the fourteenth day of the month. And
his wife buriedhim and mourned for him forty
days. And when the days of her mourning were
ended she returned to the land whence he had
gone forth.
1
Say, 'all that which is thine.'
200

APPENDICES.
A. On the Agreement in Gender and Number
between Subject and Predicate.
Clauses expressing Oaths.
B.
C. Clauses expressing Wishes.
D. Further Note on Circumstantial Clauses (see
Chap. XXI. § C).
E. Conditional Sentences.
F. On some Idiomatic Uses of the Prepositions
H> b, and ]tt.

G. On the Work of the Massoretes and their

Notes.
H. On Remains of old Case Endings.
/. On some Uses of the Accusative.
/. Some Notes on the Hebrew Vowel System.

A. On the Agreement Gender and Number

in
between Subject and Predicate.
Not infrequently in Hebrew the Predicate does not
agree with the Subject in Gender and Number. This is

largely due to the fact that the predicate usually precedes

the subject : the sentence often begins with a verb in the
3rd pers. masc. sing., irrespective of the fact that the subject
is fern, or plur. ; e.g. 1 Sam. i. 2, O^TT! n^9? n
»Tl, '
And
there were (born) to Peninnah children/
xxv. 27, ^nJ? TjrirjQtp N^<7, '
tn y handmaid brought
to my lord.'

In such cases, however, when the subject of the first

verb is also the subject of a following verb, the latter

 '

APPENDICES • 201

appears in its right number and gender, because it follows

c
the subject; e.g. Gen. i. 14, ^IT] . . . rftfoQ *TX\> let there
be luminaries . . . and they shall be ...
Special cases.
{a) Names of things or animals in the plural fre-

quently take the verb in the fern, sing., whether

the subject precedes or follows the predicate,
(cp. the neuter plural with the singular verb in

Greek) ; e.g. Mtf Pitt? ^? Ni^nn, '

shall there
'
come to thee seven years . . . ?

(J?)
Collective nouns are frequently used with a plural
verb; Kings i. 40, D^^r?? ^3^1, 'and
e.g. 1

all the people went up (cp. 1 Sam. iv. 5). '

ynWil-^l W*p., 'and let all the earth know.'

N.B. — When the predicate precedes two or more
subjects, it may be put in the plural ; but if the nearest
subject is singular, it often agrees with it in gender and
number ; cp. Gen. vii. 7, VJil tP Nl^H, '
and Noah and
his sons came in.'
Remark.
The Hebrews very frequently put the verb in the 3rd
pers. masc. sing, or plur. when the subject is indefinite and
is not expressed. This is often, but inaccurately, called the
'Impersonal' use of the verb. We may compare verbs
with on in French, and man
* ' ' '
in German ; cp. Gen. xi. 9,

713.
v t
PTDttf fcOp,
x t't :
' men called its name Babel/ 2 Sam. xi. "^
i.

ID&H, 'and people said.' Gen. xxix. 2, D^TTJ^J Spt£

(' out of that well) people were wont to water the flocks.'

B. On the Method of expressing Oaths in

Hebrew.
Oaths and asseverations are introduced by ON, meaning
1
certainly not '
; and N7 QN (sometimes ^3), meaning
1
Verily, of a surety.'
The origin of this usage is probably seen in those cases
202 APPENDICES

where a phrase like '

God will do so to you and mure also/
precedes the particle DN then = if you do this/
: ' i.e. you
are not to do this ; while N Ob* = if you do not do
v>
(
this/

i.e. you are to do this; e.g. I Sam. xxv. 22, HC>^ 111) 1

TNtpN-DN Ppp"V Tl'y\ TH ijjlj^ DW^g, 'so shall God

do to the enemies of David, and so shall He add {i.e. and
more also), if I shall leave a remnant '
; i.e. I swear, I will
not leave a remnant.
N.B. — In the mouth of a heathen the phrase is slightly

altered ;
O^PON is treated as a plural, and the verbs are
plural ; cp. 1 Kings xix. 2.
But the origin of the usage was probably soon forgotten,
and the particles soon came to have merely an asseverative
sense. Thus they are very frequently used after the phrase
^tp?5 TH JTj'T ^D> lit. '
Jehovah is alive, and thy soul is

alive.' (The use in this phrase of ^H for God, and ^Jl for
the human soul, was probably due to the desire for rever-

ence. "'H is not the Construct plural of O^n, '

life/ but
another form of TT) ; e.g. TlWN-DN ^tfM TC\ tf\TP *TT
1
as the Lord liveth and as thy soul liveth, I will not leave
thee.' So N7 GN in Num. xiv. 28.
But the particles are used in all forms of oaths ; e.g.

QN ^JEltpil, '* swear there shall not . . ./ 1 Sam. iii. 14.

So 2 Sam. xx. 20, DN ^ ; HT^Pf, '

far be it from me, I

will not . .
.'

(For a literal translation in Septuagint Greek, see the

quotation in Heb. iii. 11.)

C. On the Method of expressing Wishes in

Hebrew.
A wish may be expressed simply by the Imperfect or
Jussive. But the following ways of introducing it are
noteworthy :

1
It is important to notice that in this phrase they used the ordinary Impf.
(^DV • . • n^'J^), where we might expect the Jussive (' may He do').
 : ' :

APPENDICES 203

(a) ]rf* # ^P, lit. '

who will give ?
' followed by an accusa-
tive of the thing desired ; cp. Judg. ix. 29,

^5 iTjn oyn-nN UP.

into my hand ?
^ '
who
O that
wil1 P ut
some one
this

people ' i.e.

would ... Ex. xvi. 3, KXft& JW; "tj, lit. who will

give our dying ? i.e. would that we had died

l
!

(Occasionally the Perf. or Imperf. follows this phrase,

instead of the substantival accusative.)
Other verbs may be used with an interrogative to express
a wish ; cp. 2 Sam. xv. 4, ttDttf ^MpJ 'V?, '
O that I were
appointed judge.' Ps. iv. 4, litO ^N'V ^ft, ' O for a glimpse
of good.'
(b) ^O is the commonest particle to introduce a wish
it is usually followed by the Perfect, denoting a
wish now impossible of fulfilment. But it is also
used with the Imperfect and Jussive to denote
possible wishes.
(DM, with the Imperfect, is used occasionally in the same
way.)

D. Further Note on Circumstantial Clauses.

The general principle of Circumstantial Clauses has been
given in Chap. XXI. They express a fact 'subordinate to
the main course of the narrative (Driver), giving the '

circumstances which attended it. In English we subordi-

nate these clauses, and introduce them by such words as
'
when, since, though,' etc. In Hebrew they are inserted
independently in the narrative, sometimes with no connect-
ing particle sometimes introduced by
; 1 (never consecu- —
tive). The subject nearly always stands first.
A few examples will make the usage of these clauses
clear
(a) Noun Clauses.

Gen. xxiv. 29, \h

STjJF)^, now Rebekah
totjfr HN '

had a brother, whose name was Laban.'

Gen. xviii. 1 2, ]jpt
^J i^JL
'
my lord being old also/
 J04 APPENDICES

Gen. xii. 8 (' and he pitched

DJE 'N-fVSi his tent '),

D*Tj?E ^ni, having Bethel on the west and Ai

'

on the east.'

Gen. xiiv. 26, ^n^n tr^n ^:q rfwtrh hx tih+5

^fiN I^N Jtoj?n, for we shall not be able to
'

see the man's face, unless our youngest brother

be with us.'

josh. v. 13, nD^tr i-nro ii^ ? toS> ttfw nim 1

Yl^l, '
and lo a man stood over against him,
!

having his sword drawn in his hand.'

(b) Verbal Clauses.
It has already been said in Chap. XVIII. § 4 that
such an English clause as for he had killed,' '

1
after having killed,' appears in Hebrew as NirT)

'^£> tne copula being separated from the verb.

This is the commonest form of verbal circum-
stantial clause. Cp. Judg. iii. 26, IO7P? THlMI
nh&\ . . . "ay fc^m . . .
;
= and <
as for Ehud,
he escaped, having passed over (the quarries), and
so he escaped (to Seirah).'
Further examples in verbal clauses are
Gen. xxvii. 30, ^53 r\NE SbS^ NST 1
fc*!P ^N VTn
N3. VHN 1t?V1
l
Vn« = •
and it came to pass, when
Jacob had barely left his father's presence, that
Esau his brother came in.'

Gen. xiiv. 4, tp*p) nj^mn tih "wr-fiN ww an

"l^fcj = ' they had gone out of the city, without
going very far, when Joseph . .
.'

Gen. xiiv. 12, rfe JbpS* bftn ^ll-Q toBim = and '

he searched, beginning at the eldest and ending

with the youngest.' [Note omission of pronoun.]

1
Where two parallel clauses are joined by a simple Waw attached to the
nominative (as here), the simultaneity of the two actions is emphasised. So
in the next example the effect is, ' They had only just gone out . . . when
.'
Joseph . .
 : ' '

APPENDICES 205

E. On the Method of expressing Conditional

Sentences in Hebrew.

Hebrew a primitive language, in which syntactical

is

constructions and subordinate clauses are comparatively

rare. Circumstantial clauses are a good example of this
preference for co-ordinating two clauses where we should
subordinate one to the other. The same characteristic
appears in conditional sentences in these ;

(a) the protasis and apodosis (as they would appear

in a modern language) are frequently co-
ordinated ;

(£) even where a particle used to introduce the

is

protasis, still the apodosis is (usually) introduced

by Waw (Cp. Greek
consecutive. conditional
sentences in Homer.)
(a) Typical examples of co-ordination are :

Gen. xliv. 22, npi VIM-JIN 2Vl = and ' if he shall

leave his father, then he will die.'
2
' Kings vii. 2, D^ttf-L JTiinN nfefr HiPP PUn
H$n W»?
HJTjrj = behold, if the Lord should
'

make windows in heaven, will this thing be ?

Gen. xxxi. 27, SRjWfcJJ ^ $!$? & (
n ?/0
nn^tp5- = 'why
thou not tell me, and
didst I

would have sent thee away with joy ?

1 Sam. ii. 13, jni)P! TgJ N2*l PQ| nit tf»*|-f?3 =
if a man sacrificed a sacrifice (nomin. pendens),
then the priest's servant used to come.
(J?)
The particles used to introduce the protasis, = ' if/
are
DN (frO DN), to introduce conditions which have
actually occurred or will possibly occur in the
future.

Y? (Nv^v), to introduce conditions which have not

occurred in the past, or (rarely) are thought to
be impossible suppositions in the future. In
20(5 APPENDICES

these, thealways follows the

Perfect nearly
particle, as the Imperfect would denote a possible
supposition (the action being incomplete).
Typical cases are
2 Sam. xv. U U NiroS
33, T _. _ T rf*m
*hy T T
vin
..
'
T ._ T
= .
;
rmy 0N
1
if thou shalt have crossed over with me, then
thou wilt be a burden to me.'
judg. xiii. 23, *irj*E tljh tib cpwjj? rrtrr? yon A
PH^ =T
' if the Lord had wished to kill us,' He
would not have accepted a burnt-offering from
our hand.'

F. On some Idiomatic Uses of the Prepositions

1, 7, AND |p.

(a) 1 i. expressing character : the so-called '

Beth essen-
tia^'

Ex. vi. 3, *«mJ htil . . . DmiN ? 1

fcnkO, 'and
appeared unto Abraham
I ... as El Shaddai';
cf. Gen. vii. 21.

ii. expressing the instrument

cf. 1 Sam. xi. 7, D^^^H 1% <
by the hand
of messengers.'
iii. expressing accompaniment
Num. xx. 20, "T15 ^J^' '
w * tn much people.'

Gen. xxxii. 11, iTtJl FWT-riM ^ptt-1, ^S^

with my staff I crossed this Jordan.'
'

iv. expressing price or cost

Deut. xxi. 14, ^D51 ftT$p\ tib, 'thou shalt
not sell her for money.'
i Kings ii. 23, "imn-nN ttrtfw isn tatoaa

•^JO)
'
at the cost of his life Adonijah hath
spoken this word.'

The idiomatic uses of 2 after verbs ^O,

- T
HfcO,
T T
13JJ must be learned with
- T
1 • •

the aid of a good lexicon.

 ——— — —— — —

APPENDICES 207

(J?)
7 i. expressing relation

Gen. xx. 13, V *1?Wi 'say with regard to

me.'
ii. expressing the ethic dative, but with the limita-
tion that the pronoun must be in the same
person as the verb

Num. xxii. 34, ^7 i"Q^N, ' I will get me back.'

Gen. xii. 1, ^I/"T?, '

get thee gone/
iii. according to
Gen. i. 1 1, l^ft/, '
after its kind.'

Ps. lxxiii. 14, D^j^Ly, 'morning by morning.'

iv. of time
Gen. iii. 8, D^PT HVv, '
at the breathing time
of the day.'
v. with a secondary predicate = as
Gen. i. 29, rhltib JlVf Dlh, 'it shall be to
you for food.'
vi. denoting possession
^h ]i, ' a son of Jesse.' Contrast ^;\1 }
the
son of Jesse.'
—
vii.

b M
of direction after a preceding word with

=
on the east of
'
= 'within.' b
.
byft
.
.'
= 'above. b 5
V(2

DljPE

viii. to express the personal agent after a passive

verb. Cp. the common rnrPT* ^V^Si,

1
blessed by J"
'—
Cp. 2 Sam. xix. 43, MteJ DM, W . . .
<
or
has anything been taken away by us ? '

(c) ]tt i. of place

Gen. tTTpB
xii. 8, 0>tt Wl ^Nm, ' Bethel
on the west and Ai on the east.'
ii. = after
Gen. xxxviii. 24, D^ttnn IL^tTM, * after about
three months/
208 APPENDICES

iii. expressing change of relation

I Sam. 23, ^799 "HP^l, 'and he hath
xv.
rejected thee from being king.'

Gen. xxvii. 1, ftl^E WJ? PTjVfjrn, 'and his

eyes were dim, so that he could not sec'
iv. Partitive = some '
of . .
.' Often as either object
or subject of a verb

e.g. I Kings xviii. 5, H^H^n?? JtnjJ tib\

1
and we shall not lose any of the cattle.'

G. On the Work of the Massoretes and their

Notes.
has been said in the introduction that the Massoretes
It

were a body of Jewish scholars who laboured in the 5 th and

6th centuries A.D. to ensure the accuracy of the Hebrew-
text. Their work dealt with (a) the consonants, (b) the
vowels, (c) the accents, etc., (d) the divisions of the
text:
(a) They carefully counted the consonants in each book
and marked the middle consonant of the book,
and also of such larger divisions as the Pentateuch
and the Psalms. They also drew attention to any
abnormalities of writing, eg. 2 is written large
£T$£\ V) in Gen. i. 1 ; N is small (fcfyjft "«) in
Lev. i. 1 ; 3 is written above the line of the
other consonants (PP*) /ft 2 = suspended) in Judg.
xviii. 30 :
x
Ms inverted (PCfiDPT j) in Num. x. 35.
Some letters or words had dots above them
(Tip? = dotted)
probably to draw attention to
some abnormality in them, e.g. Gen. xvi. 5.
Occasionally a letter is added which is strictly
superfluous p*W), or omitted pp)l = defective)
e.g. Gen. xxv. 24.
1
Probably pointing to a more original reading T]$D, which has been altered,

out of respect to Moses' name, to n$3D.

 APPENDICES 209

(b) They added vowels according to the best tradition.

Sometimes they found the consonantal text at
fault, and corrected it by means of putting the

vowels of another word. So in the Pentateuch

fr^ll and *"^5 (young person) were probably
common in gender but when they refer to
:

feminines the Massoretes write them NlfT and

"Wl
T _._7
i.e. with the vowels of bOH and m^Ii.
t-:-
.
A
note at the bottom of the page calls attention

to the proper way of reading them (^Hp N* *?, 1

etc.). An instance like this is called a Q

e
re per-
petuum examples, see page 119, § 6.
; for other
Occasionally the Massoretes insert a word by
putting its vowels by themselves in the text
h
(1^3 NT) ^j?; cf. 2 Kings xix. 37), or miss
out a word CHjJ NT} l^H? cf. 2 Kings v. 1 8). ;

Sometimes they venture on a suggested emenda-

1

tion of the text : such emendations are called

j^^lp = opinions ; cf. Ex. xxv. 39 (ntpjttl for

ntpj?^). When the text presents a difficulty that

admits of no ready solution, they leave it with
the note 72ft = pDl 7 (THS p3, thus it is neces-
2
sary to say) Gen. ix. 29. ; e.g.

(c) The accentual system was perfected though prob-

ably not invented by the Massoretes :

i. Attention is drawn to the position of the accent

in a word : IH?P, lit. ' down = oxytone '
; cp.

JTVlD, 3 Judg. iv. 18. W?P, lit. 'up' = par-

oxytone ; cp. tlNS.il, Gen. xviii. 21.
ii. The addition or omission of Dagesh forte is

1
Occasionally they give a variant reading, denoting it by the sign n"}
(=WHnS Knp13, another exemplar) ; e.g. Josh. viii. 13 (jjpl for *(}*)).

2
Note also T\Fti '& = quiescent ; cp. Gen. iv. 23, where HUTKn is written for

t" - :i-
3
The position of the accent is due to the following guttural in 'OHX.

14
2 10 APPENDICES

noted ; e.g. Ex. xv. I , HIT^H 3, i.e. dageshed.

Gen. xviii. 6, T\tf\ vf^l^n = smooth,
iii. Unusual pausal forms are carefully marked.

Gen. pIDD tfiD TllQNfy

iii. 6, nm pathah with
'Athnah and with Soph pasuq (silluq).

Gen. xi. 3, jfoj? fjpfa yEjJ, qamec with Z. qaton.

Gen. xix. 4, NJTH'tiplL ^ftp, qame9 with

e
S gholta.
e
Gen. xxii. 6, HjlpHS. *7Up, S ghol with 'Athnah.
(d) The division of the text was not strictly the work
of the Massoretes, but it will be most conveniently
considered here.
The Pentateuch was divided into 54 larger sec-
tions for reading on the Sabbath days, and
669 smaller sections (TfitJrjQ). The latter were
marked by the letter D (nJTlfiE), 'open') when
the next section began on the following line, or
D (il^fip = ' shut ') when it began on the same
line. Other divisions are marked by the letters

S'V (p 12, up to here).

H. Remains of old Case Endings.

Arabic has preserved the terminations u{n) for the

nominative, i(n) for the genitive, and a{n) for the accusative.
It is probable that Hebrew had the same terminations, for
traces of them occur, especially in proper names

(1) Nom. termination ^ — in TWttftrift, lit. man of

God.
(2) Gen. termination
^
— in p"7^-*07^ (Melchisedek),
lit. king of righteousness.
The two vowels 1 —
and *•— (called literae compaginis ') '

are found fairly often in Hebrew, especially in constructs

they seem to be relics of the old nom. and gen. termina-
tions but all sense of their being so has clearly been lost,
;
 APPENDICES 211

and they are retained as archaisms, to attach a word closely

to the following word (esp. in poetry, for the sake of
rhythm) ;

e.g. Gen. i. 24, Y^N"irPn, '

beasts of the earth.'
Gen. xxxi. 39, nV£ "TO^ EV **??$> '
that
which was stolen by day and by night.'
(Cp. Ps. cxiii. 5-9, where several cases occur not in the
Construct.)

(3) Accus. termination H— remains in H— = ' motion

towards,' and in a locative sense in nV]7>
(' night '), a strengthened form of ;y.

/. Some Uses of the Accusative.

i. Internal, 1 Kings i. 12, XT±V \X1 'JpttPN, 'let me

now counsel thee counsel.'
Cp. TTO Tip pJJt, ' he cried out (in)a loud voice.'
ii. Of Respect ( = in relation to . . ., with regard to .); . .

e.g. Gen. 40, ^tttt

xli. o3$ NOSH Pl» '
only as
to the throne will I be greater than thou.'

I Kings xv. 23,

"""
VT^TVJIN
It — V
TOTl.
T T
'he was diseased
:
'

in his feet.'
iii. after verbs expressing fullness or the reverse ; e.g.

M7D, 'be full of; JJlto, 'be satisfied with';

1DH, 'to be in want of . .
.'

(When these verbs are causative, they take two

accus. ; e.g. ngtpn, '
he gave to drink.')
iv. expressing (a) direction towards, 1 Sam. xx. 11,
rritell N£5, 'let us go out to the field.'

(b) place where, Gen. iv. 16, Mjf'JlDTj?, 'on the

east of Eden.' Cp. ItL^ with accus.
(c) time when, Gen. xxvii. 45, *7HN GV 1
, 'on one
and the same day.' Cp. 517^7, '
by night.'
212 APPENDICES

(d) to define extent, Gen. vii. 20, ITjtoJJ

;
tl pn
D^n TOS n^D^Q
• - - :, T T . _ . .
HSN,
t-'
' fifteen cubits up- I

wards did the waters prevail.' Gen. iii. 14,

^pn W-^|, '
all the days of thy life.'

v. denoting
o material, Gen. >
ii. 7,7
/
~)ZV
T T
DlNrvriN
tt lr v
^W v •-

T?"J$V7 V?>
'
anc* He formed man (of) the dust
of the earth.'
vi. after a passive verb, 1 Kings ii. 21, "TIN NJ"|rP
VTOtoji? • • • *#?*$ 0it let there be a giving
made of Abishag ... to Adonijah).

/. Some Notes on the Hebrew Vowel System

by Professor Kennett. 1
In order to understand the somewhat startling changes
which, in the latest stage of the Hebrew language, take
place in the vocalisation of nouns, it is necessary to discover
the principles underlying, not only the Massoretic, but also
the original pointing. It is, indeed, impossible to determine
exactly the nuances of early Hebrew phonetics, but a
comparison of Hebrew with the cognate languages, particu-
larly Arabic, enables the student of Hebrew grammar to
determine the original form of Hebrew nouns with sufficient
accuracy for his purpose.
In primitive Semitic speech there would appear to have
been three primary vowels only, which, however, might be
either long or short, thus in effect making six 2 i.e. d, i u, }

and a, i, u.

In addition to these simple vowels there were the

diphthongs au, ai> and zu.

In the opinion of the Semites, indeed, these latter sounds

were not diphthongs i.e. their final element was regarded
;

as consonantal rather than vocalic. Since, however, at any

1
[This Appendix comes from some lecture-notes of which Prof. Kennett
kindly allowed us the use.]
2
This must not be understood to mean that in actual speech only these six
sounds were audible, but that whereas we divide our vowels into five classes, a
Semite would have divided his into three.
 APPENDICES 213

rate in the case of the two of these sounds, they tended

first

to become simple vowels {au becoming 6 and ai becoming

e), it is more convenient to speak of them as diphthongs.

The primitive long vowels have come down to us un-

changed, except that in every case original long a has been
modified into 6} The general principle of pre-Massoretic
spelling (though uniformity had by no means been reached
when Hebrew became a dead language) is that the long
vowels which are long by nature should be represented by
vowel letters. In certain common words the o which is
derived from an original long a is regularly written without
waw {eg. DYl^N not dW^M ; "V35N not ^N) ; and in
some other cases the scriptio plena and the scriptio defectiva
are used indiscriminately. In the case of long vowels
derived from diphthongs the vowel letters 1 and **
are
regularly written.
Hebrew may be said to possess four long
therefore
vowels which can under no circumstances be shortened,
viz. 6 (whether derived from d or au), e (derived from ai),

i, and u. 2 The original short vowels, however, viz. a, i, and

it, undergo various modifications, according as they stand in

accented or unaccented syllables. In this respect, indeed,

Hebrew is not altogether peculiar. In our own language, for
example, the first three vowels of anatomy undergo consider-
able modification when a change of accent is necessitated
by the lengthening of the word, as in anatomical.
Hebrew, however, exhibits a peculiarity of which our
own language affords no example, inasmuch as the origin-
ally short vowels frequently appear in a lengthened, or to
use Bickell's phraseology, which is preferable (since it avoids

the confusion between long and lengthened vowels), a

heightened form ; a appearing as a (— ), z as e (— and
), it as

1
Cp. English bone, home, stone, from Anglo-Saxon ban, ham, and stan.
- It may be laid down as an absolute rule that the original diphthongal sounds

an and ai are never met with except in syllables which bear the full weight of the
stress. In unaccented syllables always, and in accented syllables frequently, they
appear as simple long vowels. No further change is, however, possible in them
in the course of inflection.
 2 14 APPKNDICES
1
o ('
— ). This heightening of the short vowels is probably
in the main the result of the intoning of the sacred books in
the synagogue. A tendency to heighten vowels in this way
may indeed have already existed while Hebrew was still a
living speech, but there can be little doubt that in themain
this development belongs to the time when it had become
practically a dead language. It will, however, be con-

venient to defer for the present a fuller consideration of the

influences of the synagogue chanting upon the Hebrew
vowels ; merely remarking that in consequence of it a may
2
become a ; i, e ; and &, o.
In many cases the original short vowel has remained
unchanged, and we therefore find in the a class pathah in ;

the i class short hireq and in the u class qibbug or qamec

;

hatiiph. It frequently happens, however, that the original

short vowel, though it has not been heightened, has never-

theless undergone some modification. Thus in the case of
a there is a perpetual tendency (especially in unaccented
syllables) to thin down the sound to e (in pen) or even to l
(in pin) (viz. to s'ghol or hireq). Compare the pronuncia-
tion of the a in many,and the Cockney pronunciation which
changes cab into keb and bank into benk. In the case of
short z, which is already as thin as possible, the reverse
tendency is observable, s'ghol frequently taking the place
of hireq.
In the illustration already given, sc. anatomy and
anatomical, the tendency of full short vowels to lose their
distinct character unaccented open syllables is clearly
in
seen. The first vowel of anatomy, though in writing it is
expressed by the same sign as the second vowel, differs
from it in that it can only be pronounced in an unaccented
open syllable. Hebrew writing, being strictly phonetic,
naturally represents these extremely short vowels by
different signs from those which denote the full short

1
The original class of i probably included not only the sound of i in pin, but
also of e in pen ; similarly the it class included both the u in push and the o in on.
- It is convenient in transliteration to represent a vowel long by nature by a
circumflex accent, and a heightened vowel by the long sign.
 — ;

APPENDICES 215

vowels, i.e. the vowels which can stand in shut syllables.

We accordingly find [uitcpli vowels, of which the essential
characteristic they can only stand in unaccented
is that
1
open syllables, though they are sufficiently clear to leave
us in no doubt as to the classes to which they severally
belong.
But the process by which the full short vowels become
hateph, or as they are commonly called half vowels, may be
carried on to such an extent that the half vowel is pro-
nounced too rapidly and indistinctly to make it possible to
assign it to either of the three classes ; that is to say, it

becomes a stiiva, or, . to use Bickell's phraseology, it is

volatilised. It is usual in transliteration to represent this

volatilised vowel by e (which is the shortest English vowel)
but must be remembered that in reality it does not belong
it

to one class more than another, and may have originated

from a, z, or u accordingly in these notes, in order to avoid
:

confusion, it is here represented in transliteration by an

apostrophe. 2
The foregoing remarks may be summed up in the
following table, in which the changeable vowels are ar-
ranged under the classes to which they severally belong :

v v
aa z ti

Heightened — — —
Full short vowels — — •• T
(and with successive thinings) (and with slight broadening)

Half vowels — —v: t:

Indistinct half vowels — — —-

1
[The student should notice that Prof. Kennett treats a consonant with a
half vowel as constituting a syllable. A nomenclature has previously
different
been adopted in the grammar. So ' rememberance in English might be regarded
'

as three syllables or as four, according to the point of view taken.]

2
It is most unfortunate that the sign —
was also employed to mark the
vowellessness of a consonant in the middle of a word, as it obscures the fact that
vocal stiwa (with some few exceptions) always represents an original short vowel.
216 APPENDICKS

be seen that sghol and hireq

It will may be assigned
respectively to either the first or second class, and vocal
sh'wa to any one of the three classes.
N.B. — The chief defect in the carefully thought out
Massoretic vocalisation is that three of the vowel signs,
(— , — ,
—-) may denote either long or short vowels. In
the case of the —
an additional difficulty in the
there is

fact that the long vowel which it denotes belongs to a

different class from that to which its short equivalent must
be assigned. In actual speech, however, the nearest short
sound to the deep long a is not a in man, but o in on.
It is of the utmost importance that the Hebrew student

should grasp the fact that qdmeg, qere (when not derived
from a diphthong at, in which case it is followed by a yodh),
and holem (when written defectively, except in the cases
noted above) are SHORT BY NATURE. The heightening of
these vowels has taken place through certain exigencies of
the synagogue intoning, and in the absence of such exi-
gencies they naturally appear as short vowels. All the
VOWELS in ""H^' ]•?•!' ^B^» anc* '^ must be considered as
esse7itially short in tJieir origin.

We naturally inquire, therefore, what are the exigencies

through which a short vowel is heightened. Hebrew re-
sembles English in being a sharply accented language,
though, unlike English in which the accent is, as a rule,
placed as early as possible in a word, in Hebrew the accent
is usually on the last syllable, and can never be drawn

farther back than the last syllable but one.

In the latest development of the Massoretic pronuncia-
tion, an accent possessing a musical value is placed on the
accented syllable of each separate word there are, however, ;

indications that this florid method of intoning was preceded

by a much simpler one, in which the stress of the intonation
fell only on the accented syllables of certain words e.g. the :

1
Construct state and following Genitive were pronounced
1
[Prof. Kennett maintains that the Absolute is to be regarded in all respects
as a Genitive.]
 :

APPENDICES 217

together as virtually one word, so that although in the

Construct state one syllable was accented more than the
others, the stress of intonation fell only on the accented
syllable of the following Genitive.
In discussing vowel changes it will therefore be con-
venient to speak of a syllable having the stress, rather than
of an accented syllable, meaning thereby the accented
syllable of a word the vowel of which receives a full

intonation.
That the last vowels in the case of such words as dabar,
zaqin (or zaqen), qatiin (or qaton) should be heightened
respectively into ——
, and
'
— is easily understood when it

is remembered that these syllables received the stress of

intoning. Hebrew, however, presents a further peculiarity
in the fact that a short vowel in an open syllable just before
the stress is also frequently heightened. This latter case,
the heightening of the pretone, as it is called, appears at
first sight utterly contrary to the ordinary principles of
accentuation. In all living languages, such as our own,
the ictus usually falls on every alternate syllable, e.g.

inexactitude though there may be a somewhat greater

;

interval between the syllables which receive it, e.g.

term in logical.
Ordinary English speech, therefore, provides us with no
explanation why the first a in dabar should become qamec
as well as the latter.
But if we are right in supposing that the second vowel
was heightened qameg mainly, if not entirely, through the
to
exigencies of intoning, we must look for illustration of the
heightening in the pretone, not to ordinary English speech,
but rather to the language as chanted or intoned. Now in
the chanting of an English psalm or canticle it is natural to
dwell somewhat on the last accented syllable of the recita-
tive before attacking the new note. In psalters provided
for chanting, this syllable is usually carefully marked ; e.g.

Praise the Lord |

O my |
soul ||

Why do the heathen so furiously |

rage to-gether||.
2i8 APPENDICES

In like manner a Hebrew reader, before adopting a

new note on the syllable which received the stress of the
intoning, would naturally be apt to dwell somewhat on the
preceding syllable. If the latter happened to be one which
could easily be pronounced alone, the fact that the reader
dwelt slightly upon it before attacking his new note would
not affect its pronunciation ; eg. in such a word as mid-bar
the first syllable mid is sufficiently full to allow the cantor
to dwell on it before beginning to intone the last syllable
bar. But in the case of such a word as ddbar, in which
the syllable preceding the stress is open, when through the
exigencies of chanting the last syllable bar is severed from
the first, the short da is insufficient to allow the cantor
to make the slight pause necessitated by the following
change of note. In a case such as this, without any
conscious effort to lengthen the word, it would never-
theless be gradually modified till in actual pronuncia-
tion it differed little from the vowel which bore the full
stress.
The heightening of the pretone therefore is due to the
slight pause which the cantor makes in order that he may
pronounce the tone syllable more effectually. In the case
of a long word all the syllables 'before the pretone follozv the
same rule as in English, i.e. every other syllable receives an
ictus.

The heightening of Hebrew vowels can be reduced to

rule, and. there few
are extremely exceptions. Strictly
speaking there are no declensions in Hebrew nouns, which
are classified by the formation of their stems rather than by
their endings.
In order to illustrate the peculiarities of Hebrew vocali-
sation itbe convenient to consider the first class of
will
Hebrew nouns, after which the rules for the other classes
will occasion little difficulty.
The first and simplest class of Hebrew nouns consists of
those which lie at the base of the perfectQal of the verb.
These nouns may be defined as those which have THREE
STEM CONSONANTS AND TWO SHORT STEM VOWELS THE
 ;

APPENDICES 219

1
FIRST OF WHICH and JtOjJ.
IS It must be
d\ e.g. *\yi, Jp.t,

remembered that all the vowels in these words are heightened

vowels and therefore in order to understand the changes
;

which they undergo, we must first discover their original

form. Since, however, to write such forms as ^5*7, ||?1, and
|!9|2 is to be guilty of monstrosities according to the existing
Hebrew rules, the student will do well when writing the
original forms of Hebrew nouns to use English characters,
viz. ddbar, zdqin, and qdtun.
We have already explained the principles underlying the
heightening of these original vowels in the tone and pretone ;

it now remains changes which these

for us to consider the
original vowels undergo when the word no longer receives
any stress, or when through some addition to the stem the
stress no longer falls on the stem syllable.
In the first place, we may consider the Construct state.
As has already been stated, the Construct state was originally
pronounced as virtually one word with the genitive, and the
stress accordingly fell on the latter word. In the Construct
state, therefore, we find THE SHORTEST POSSIBLE PRO-
NUNCIATION OF THE ORIGINAL STEM. And since in a
strongly accented language short syllables which receive no
ictus are commonly so hurried over that their vowels are
shortened to the uttermost, it is not surprising that the
unaccented syllables of ddbar and zdqin were volatilised,
i.e. reduces to sh'wa.

We
should therefore expect to find *\yj and ]pT or |j?t. 2
In the latter case, however, probably in consequence of the
later, more florid, system of chanting, by which each
separate word received a musical accent, d was substituted
for the thin 1 or e which did not so easily lend itself to a
y

3
musical intonation so that the Construct state of ]|?T is

1
Nouns which have 1 in the first syllable and a in the second, though not,
strictly speaking, belonging to this class, follow precisely the same rules ; e.g.

T "
2
It so happens that we have no Construct state of any word of the form |bp.
3
Compare the English pronunciation of e in clerk.
220 APPENDICES

actually |i^ f
unless it be connected with the following word
by a hyphen {tnaqqepfi), when "tJPt is possible. Similarly
the Construct of llbdb (which in the Absolute becomes
nn^) is nnb.
The same principles regulate the forms of the Absolute
and Construct plural though the addition of an extra;

accented syllable to the stem naturally causes a shifting,

so to speak, of the centre of gravity.
The original forms of the plural Absolute will naturally
have been
dabarim, zaqinim, llbdbim}
in each case the stress being on the plural endings. The
second syllable, however, which in the singular was shut,
is now opened accordingly the short vowel, being
;

unable to bear the slight pause which the cantor makes

before changing his note, is heightened. The first
syllable is naturally hurried over and becomes volatilised ;

thus

In the Construct state instead of the ending tm we

t

find the ending e (originally a£ as in the Absolute dual)

t

thus :

ddbdre, zaqme, libdbe.

Since the chief accent falls on the last syllable and the
tendency in pronunciation is to put an ictus on every
alternate syllable, we should naturally expect to find the
short vowel of the middle syllable reduced to a sliwa and
the first remaining unchanged
syllable just as in the ;

English word anatomical the first a is pronounced more

clearly than the a which immediately follows. We should
1
The usual plural of 2lb is nSllb-
t" t :

2
It is of the utmost importance that the Hebrew student should endeavour to
give proper value to the Hebrew syllables. The pronunciation of many students
is enough to make the Massoretes shudder in their graves ! We must pronounce
the plural of 121 not debarim {i.e. with the same relative quantities which we
T T

have in the English word abasement), but d'ba-rim, i.e. with the relative quantities
'
which we have in the phrase a neiv heart, '
 ;:

APPENDICES 22 1

therefore expect to find in the Construct state plural of these

nouns the forms

Forms of this kind actually occur when the first radical

is a guttural ; thus the Construct state plural of O^O ls

^MH. But, as a rule, the a is thinned

original short
down to a short z, according to the tendency noted above
so that instead of ^351 (the earlier form) we now find

*n:n, and instead of ^3J?t, ^pT, etc.

It is therefore evident that none of the existing forms

of a Hebrew noun is derived from any other existing form,
"ITI, ^yi, D^l^T, "Hl^ being all derived pari passu from
the stem ddbdr.
The common method of forming the feminine was by
the addition of the syllable at to the masculine stem. In
the Absolute state, however, this ending is found only in
a modified form for when the old case endings (which
;

survived much longer in the Construct state than the

Absolute) had 1
fallen away, the syllable at was exposed to
phonetic decay ; the final dental t was first aspirated ath,
then the dental became inaudible, leaving only the final
2
aspirateah ;
finally the aspirate also disappeared, leaving
only a vowel a.

The original form of the feminine Absolute is therefore

dabara, which by the rules given above becomes H^l^
the original form of the Construct is dabarath, which when
hurried over becomes fny? (the intermediate form being
rniTT). In the plural the ending ath is lengthened into

1
This is contrary to what we should have expected, but may be explained
from the fact that the case endings of the Construct state, though no longer used
in their original sense,were employed as connecting vowels to join together the
two words which grammatically formed one idea. It was more euphonious to
say dabarati malki zedeq than dabarat malk zedeq. (On the * literse com-
paginis,' see Appendix H.)
2
A similar tendency first to aspirate and then to elide a dental is found in
other cases also. Thus in some parts of Syria 1V3 was in some cases pronounced
222 APPENDICES

atli,which naturally becomes otli. This termination is found

in the Absolute as well as in the Construct state, which are
therefore identical except for the difference caused by the
presence or absence of the stress thus the Absolute appears
:

as ni^ll
t
the Construct as jTnil.
:
;
• :

The rules for the other classes (' declensions ') of nouns
will occasion little difficulty. In the case of Segholate stems
the student should notice that in the plural the stem itself
undergoes an alteration by the insertion of a short a
between the second and third consonants. The singular
stems malk, sipr buqr become malakim, siparim and
y y

buqarim and these in turn, according to the rules of

;

vocalisation set forth above, become D^D/ft, D^IDD. and

 223

VOCABULARY.
HEBREW-ENGLISH.

T& how?
IN, father p.N (nothing) ; Constr. there
(see p. 185).
is not.
"JIN, to perish.
(T!8) f)Sfe,
whence?
»~QN, to be willing.
ti^N, man (male).
jn« (f.), stone.
^«,
— T to eat.
0*1^ (m.), man (mankind). '

]5^, verily.
nm« (f.), the ground.
]V7N,
7N, not (Jussive, Cohort).
lord (plur. used of
superiors). T>N, unto.

1J1N, to love. Inf. Constr. •17N (c)i these,

pdiin. b^, God, gods.

*?HN (m.), tent. F)7^ (m.), a thousand.
|th (f.), ear. DN, if; or? QN *»$, except;
HN, brother (see p. 185). but (after negative).

~T)1N (m.), one. ON, in oaths = not.

ninSJ, sister (see p. 185). ON, mother.
•nnN (prep.), after. More "jftN, Hiph. to trust, believe.

rarely 1HN. Y?2N, to be strong, bold.

^fiN, other. Plur. D^Hfe}. ^£N, to say, promise, think.

rtflN (f.), one. Pause rUlW. TON,

T T
whither?
'

Ht-^, where then ? •"flD"***, ^m$ (c), we.

whence ? ^n "obN, 1.

1^'N, enemy. ffnj&fcf, plur. of tl^N.

n^Sl, where ? F)DN, to gather, cure.
2 24 VOCABULARY

HN (m.), nose, wrath. Dual, fore the second word (sec

face. p. 65).

rrvsi-iw, four. P^, to understand, discern.

(m.), ark. With art.
Niph. partic, discerning,
J^tJ
prudent.
rPl, house (see p. 186).
•nM, lion.
11^5-, to weep. Apoc.Qal "J5J.
TIN, long. Fem. PrriN.
^72(7), so as not to (with
y^M (f.), land, earth. With
Inf.).
art. Y^n.
n^i, high place.
•"!?"! *?» to the ground.
]1, son (see p. 186).
"*HN, to curse.
•m,
TT '
to build.
tTSt (f.), fire.
rtaa, piur. of ra.
•ItZJN, woman (see p. 185).
^j?3. (m.), morning.
\$N, who, which (rel.).
tlpl, Pi. to seek, search for.
]»», thou (f.).
mSL, to flee.
^^ ("J"^),sign of definite ace.
ffn?. (f.), covenant (rn3, to
UN, with.
make).
nnSl, thou (m.).
*[^1, Pi. to bless. Pass.
ppN, she-ass. partic. Oal, blessed.
D£lN (m.), ye. HD"Q-, a blessing, present.

IVl (m.), flesh. "a-Va = all

1. mankind.
3, (prep.), in, on, among, by Hi, daughter (see p. 186).
(instrum.), consisting of
D^m, plur. of m.
(essence).

^J (f.), a well.
131 (m.), 2, garment. X
("T12) 11, separation "HI?,
;
^5> to redeem.
by himself, alone.
^"^?> great ; old (in com-
Ni!l, to come, go in. parative or superl.).
ITXl, to choose (with 5-).
sT&, to be great, grow up.
ITOiL, to trust (with Si). Pi. bring up (child).

^% between. Repeated be- 7*7^ (m.), greatness.

 VOCABULARY 225

*W, to sojourn. n^n, on, plur. of N*rr.

hi
tlvj, to uncover ;
go into

captivity. With ]TN (ear) n^n, hither, nsmy. thus

= make revelation. far.

77-1, to roll. mm nsn, hither and

03, also, even. thither.

...?... D3, both ™^> ID. behold, lo! (see

. . . and . . . p. no).
•M, to requite ; wean (a Following verb usu. in

child). Partic.

bftX
t t
camel.
'
Plur. D^E*.
— • :
mn. See riv.

^3, sojourner, stranger.

TJCII, to turn, change into
(usu. Trans.).
\IT^, Pi. to drive out.
ftft (m.), hill, mountain. With

ft art. "inn.
T T
Plur. O^ft.
T •

"Q1, ^VT, to kill, slay.

Pi. to speak.
ftDft (m.), word, thing. •"T7 (°^ woman ), to con-
ceive (child).
bl (adj.), weak. ^^TT.
Q^T (m.), blood.
\
- T' to
012ft. be silent.
1, conj. and.
TTVT (m.), a t
wa y> path.

UTH, to seek (usu. with 7N).

t.

n. nat, this (g. n^5, thus.

— ft, article. Pit, this (m.). PrtD, hence.
— n, Interroga. particle. Hjp . . . rip, on this
NVJ, he, that (demons, m.). side, — on that side.
WJl, she, that (demons, f.). H]Q, here.

ft^ft,
T T
to be, become, happen. ant ( m .), gold.

Jussive Oal ^ft\ ^5|i to remember. Hiph.

^7H, to go. Conjugates, make mention of.

exc. Perf. Qal, as if from ]f?t, to be old.

][P|,
adj. old. Noun, old man.
15
226 VOCABULARY
Q^j?t (m. plur.), old age. TOfl, to desire. T2Ji: Niph.
yij (m.), seed, a. (Lit. or Partic. desirable.
metaph.) H?pn (f), wrath.
"^Pf (m.), ass.

n. H&pn, five (see p. 194).

fcOll, Niph. to hide oneself, ""^n> to encamp.

be hidden. |n (m.), grace, favour.
7HJ1,
- T
to cease, leave '
off.
J3PT, to pity.
inn,
T T
new.
'
"IDn (m.), a, mercy, kindness.
tlHh (m.), month. . . . ny "n rwv
T T
=
ptH, to be strong. (Part. pJTT.)
show mercy to.

Hiph. take hold (of, ?l). yn (m.), arrow. Vy^n.

ptP! (adj.), strong. nOT, to halve, divide.

KEPT, to sin, err. ^D, half.

NtpH (m.), sin (see p. 182). pft (m.), statute. Vppn.

Tl (of God), TT (of men). ^"3.0 (Q> ^» sword.
Used in oaths = '
liveth.' 2t^n,
_ T to think, reckon. *

Qal of V^n. l-Hil, father-in-law.

^n (adj.), alive. V^TT. nrTT, to be dismayed. Impf.
nTT, to be alive. Juss. Qal
YTJ, Pi. and Hiph., pre- to.

serve alive, let live. litD, good.

T^n (m.), might, army, sub- "U?, not yet, usually with
stance. Impf.
D2JT,
T T
wise.
'
Also conj. before that

•iSn, to be sick. (or oyft).

Vll (m.), disease, sickness.
\
PH^ll, with Dat. of pers.
tW, Hiph. to be content.
and |P of act (verb in

Inf.) =far be it from (me) XL% to be dry.

to . . . T (f.), hand. (Dual.)

7TT1, Hiph. to begin. }H^, to know. Inf. Constr.

pvPT, Pi. to divide.

 VOCABULARY 227

niTP, the Lord (see note on Part, in use N*V.

p. 44). Niph. Part. «")i^ =
QV (m.), day (see p. 1 86). terrible.

»\ See nioi nfcO? (noun f.), fear.

•' T T

(1BJ), to be well. Perf. Qal ""J"X> S° down.

to Hiph.
bring down.
not used.
Hiph. l^H = to bene- •TV, to shoot. Hiph. shoot,
instruct.
fit, with Ace. or Dat.
(m.), wine. ^"X> to P ossess - Hiph. to
p!
dispossess.
n^, Hiph. to judge, approve,
IP, there is.
reprove.

hh\ to be able. Impf. blV. Ittfj, to sit, dwell, inhabit.

Jtt£, to sleep.
T?J, to bear (child), beget.
Hiph. to beget. W* 1

, Hiph. to save, rescue.

I7?. (
m 0> child, a.

Q^ (m.), sea. Constr. the

3.
same usu. Plur. D^ft\
3, prep. like. . . . 5 • • •
5,
CW, plur. of DY\ as . . . so . . .

?P\ Hiph. to add.

*^^5> when, as.
He added to do = he did
IID, to be heavy, hard. Pi.
again.
honour. Niph. be hon-
t0 ady sei Niph. to
¥3?t> -
oured. Hiph. harden.
take counsel together.
*Q3 (adj.), heavy, grievous.
*\3£ (m.), wood, forest.
1123 (m.), honour, glory.
HD^ (adj.), fair, beauteous.
nto? (f.), ewe-lamb.
NT\
TT
to go
° out. Inf. Constr.
7
H3, thus (of what follows).
HNS.
1PT3 (m.), priest.
IP, Hiph. SWft, to set, place.
pD, Hiph. to establish, set
pT, to pour. Impf. p&\ firm.

YlT, to awake. Niph. passive.

N"V, to fear, usu. with ]?p ^5, for, that, because, when.
and Inf. DN % but, after a
Inf. Constr. HNT negative.
228 VOCABULARY

73, all (noun Constr.). yO!? (

m -)> oppression.
^7?, all of us. riT?7 (m.), night. Notice
73 . . . N7, no one, accent and gender. II -

not hg. old Accus. termination.

NT'S (m.), imprisonment. |^7, to pass the night.

1172), to
X T '
be finished. Pi. to lftT>,
—
X
to learn.
'
Pi. teach.

finish (with Inf.).

•1^7, why? Before gutt.
inf. Absoi. n*??-iy =
completely.
]5^/> m order that, with
^75 (m.), implement, weapon
Inf. or Impf.
(see p. 186).
ItTN "h with Impf.
]5, thus (of what precedes).
n[27, to take (see p. 131).
ND!p (m.), throne, seat. Third
decl.
a
ilDD, Pi. to cover, conceal. INft, = very.
Ht. to excess,
F|D3 (m.), a, silver.
SINE (f.), a hundred.
f]5 (f.), palm (of hand), sole ]Ntt, Pi. to refuse.
(of foot).
llip (m.), wilderness.
m3,
—X to cut, cut off. With
How
' '

HP, what ? !

H'HiL = make covenant.

1H?3, Pi. to hasten. Inf.
1J13, to write. = quickly.
Absol.
ttfaD, to depart.
b. rfitt, to die. Perf. Qal n£.
Hiph. put to death.
7 (prep.), to, for (see also p.
'

207). FN2 (m.), death. Constr.

fc*7, not, no. rra.

I1? (m.), heart. Plur. Pftih. Il5.)?p (m.), altar. Plur. in
1
II ? (m.), heart. Plur. in Hi — ni—
11^. See 11. n^nD (m.), camp.

tT27, to put on (clothes), llltt, to-morrow.

wear (stative). ntD?? (m.), staff.

nnb }
Niph. to fight. lEft (m.), rain.

0117 (m.), a, bread. 1I3E, Hiph. send rain.

 VOCABULARY 229

"•ft, who ? 1
0*75 ( m - plur.), water(s). N3, particle of entreaty
«Se, to be full (of, Ace). (enclitic): MJ-^M, of de-
Qal or Pi. to fill, with precation.
two Ace. 1013, Hiph. to gaze on. With
^[N?ft (m.), messenger, angel.
vN = show regard to.
HttJlSp (f.), war S e gholate.
;
W1J (m.), prophet.
107D, Hiph. deliver. Niph.
H713 (f.), corpse.
Passive.
133, Hiph. to tell, an-
*W?12, to reign (over, 5-).
nounce.
ifa (m.), king.
133 (adv. or prep.), opposite.
e
•157?? (f.), queen ; S gholate. Suff. Yttt.
e
rcfe?? (f.), kingdom; S gho- *]3D, to smite.
Yate.
tl)33, to draw near (stat.).
]P, from, out of, some of,
3H3, to lead.
than (see also p. 207).
1(13 (m.), river.
•Ul3p (f.), offering, present.
TO, to rest. Hiph. IT3n,
DDtt, Niph. be melted (of
give rest (to). rP3tl, set
heart).
down, place : with Dat. of
I3Jft3, a little, some, a few.
pers., to leave alone.
Constr. noun.

nto^S (m.), deed, work.

M, to flee.

Jft3, to move, quiver.

N2tt, to find.
- t' to
TTT3, inherit.
ni^P (f.), command.
DT3?0, Egypt. •vD2 (0> inheritance.
Dipft (c), place. DP13, (Pi.), to comfort. Niph.
nfcOft (m.), appearance. to repent (of, 7JJ).

•lift,
T
to rebel against, with HI33, to stretch out, incline.
Acc. Apoc. Qal tOJ Hiph. to
niTO, to anoint. bend aside.
7$D, to rule (over, |). •113, Hiph. to smite.
t9|0Q (m.), judgment. HD3, Pi. to test, try.

Tift'l^, how long? S^3 (m.), shoe.

230 VOCABULARY

^3 (m.), lad, attendant: nCD (m.), book. Plur. letter,

;holate. books.
n l^ (f.)i maiden :
§
e
gholate. "V)D, Hiph. to hide. Niph.
bz:
—T }
to fall. Pass, and Reflex.
*

tfM (f.), soul, life ( = the

being alive).

22E, Hiph. (T^H), to station. *72V,to serve,till (the ground).

Niph. to take one's stand.
"QV (m.), servant.
v !^, Hiph. to deliver.
5
Pass.,
"QV, to cross over, transgress.
Niph.
IV (prep.), as far as ; until.
Nt?5» to lift up, bear, forgive
nttjTg with finite
(with Ace. of fault, Dat. of
verb, until.
pers.). Inf. nttvh.
Tiy, still, yet, again.
3toi, Hiph. to overtake.
HIV, Hiph. to commit
D^ttfl plur. of niZJN.
iniquity.
7tt?J, to draw off (shoe).
DTH^ (m.), eternity, age
p$}, to kiss (with 7). (alcov).

|Jl2, to give, appoint. Inf. V'ly, for ever.

Constr. nJTl. With Ace. fty (m.), iniquity.
and to allow,
Inf., let.
"W (adj.), blind.

fy (m.), strength. Vfty.

D. 2ty, to leave, forsake.

22D, to go round, surround. ^, to help.

D^D, horse. yV (f.), eye. ^V 1

?, in the
presence of.
HD^D.
T
mare.
""11D, to turn aside (intrans.).
T# (f.), city (see p. 186).

Hiph. remove. W, upon, against, near.

Jussive Qal and Hiph. n^, to go up. Hiph. bring
with Waw consec. up, offer up.

— T~
n?^7y (f.)> young woman,
*7DD, to mourn. damsel.

"13D, to count. Pi. recount, GJJ (m.), people. With art.

relate.
 VOCABULARY 2 3 1

Dy, with, along with. m2,T T '

to be fruitful.
172V,
— X
to stand. *H9 (m.), fruit.

H^y,
T T
to answer.
' yt?B (m.), /, transgression.
my, Pi. to afflict. HPE) (m.), z, doorway, open-
^?^ (m.), poverty, affliction. ing. Used as prep., = at
entrance of.
yj? (m.), tree, wood.
TV2$ (f.), advice.
JllL^, to do.'
T T
make.
]b& (m.), sheep (collect.).
rnti^, ten (see p. 195).
Pl?> to be righteous. Hiph.
D'ntpy, twenty,
acquit, justify.
nj? (f.), time, season,
pl% (m.), z, righteousness.
nriy, now (of time, and
n|71^ (f.), righteousness.
'
hortat.). Pause Tlfty.
p*H2£, righteous.

m!£, Pi. to command.

D. p*)!£, Hiph. to constrain.
HQ (m.), mouth, edge (see ^^, to besiege (with S^).
'p. 186). H72, Hiph. to prosper, make
y\H ^7, with the edge prosperous.
of the sword. N??S, to be thirsty.
nQ, here. P5^?, to cr y ou t.
flB, Qal or Niph. to be ""H2, to be in straits. Im-
scattered. personal y ^?-
N 73, Niph. to be wonderful. y? "^;H = and he was
|Q, lest, with Impf. in distress.

njS, to turn round (intrans.).

p.
D\)B (m. plur.), face. ^V,
in presence of, before. Y5IJ, to collect, assemble
(trans.).
B^B (f.), lit. footfall; time,
occasion. "Dp (m.), grave.

^£3, to press, urge (with 2L UHP, to be holy. Pi. con-

of pers.). secrate.

"TpS, to visit, appoint, muster. tlTjP (m-)> holiness.

Hiph. to set (over). zip (m.), voice.

232 \ uCABULAKV
D^p, to arise. Hiph. set up, 1VH (f.), breath, spirit.
ratify. DV1, to be high iph. lift u

nnp, Inf. ( )onstr. tljh. ^H, to run. [ph. take

?Wp, to kill (poetical and quickly.
late).
rn (Pi.), to have mercy on.
}tD|7, to be small, unworthy. TH, to plead, contend.
]tD)^, small, young (only in TH (m.), a quarrel.
m. sing.).
-J, high.
|tjj"/, small, young. Fern.
H^H (f.), Ramah (high place).
rraop.
t - '

ih, nsn ( Vyjn).

6^P)
little account
%
be Jight, of
also Niph.
to
;
13H
evil ; f.

(m.), famine.

H}H, to shepherd.
Pi. to curse. Hiph. to
lighten. HJH, neighbour, friend.

Hip, to buy, acquire. (Wl) 5H, to be evil; Impf.

(«1p) r»*nipV, to meet (Inf.).

N"0» to read, call.

Hiph. to do evil.
t't
p"5 (adv.), only,
y*\\l, to draw near (stat).
ttn, poor.
Tjp (m.), z, inside, heart.

SHp, to tear, rend.

to.

n«to(^), Inf. Constr. Qal

nN"J, to see. Niph. appear Mtft.

T T

(unto). D^to, to set, place, appoint.

tfrtl (m.), head (see p. 186). «:to, to hate.

JWM1J first. CIBto (f.), lip, edge, bank.

H"5, great. Plur. D^SH, many. Dual, lips.

T121, to be many, multiply. £]^to, to burn (trans.).

Hiph. to multiply nto, a chief, prince (V^TrtD).
(trans.) ; Inf. Abs. =
in quantities, much
(used adv.).
hT) (f.), a, foot. Dual. IfcW, to draw (water).

HI"!' to pursue. hfoXS (m.), Sheol, the grave.

 .

VOCABULARY 233

bwt\ to ask. *h hwfi "Itttp, to watch, keep. Niph.

D'ivttH, he greeted him. to beware,

V2W, Niph. to swear. tttotf (f.), sun.

nyitf, seven (see p. 195).

n^tl? (f.), year ;
plur. in D* 1
—
Hiti (f.), sleep.
I^ty, to return. Hiph. bring
back, restore. He '
re- D?2??, two, with m. nouns.
turned =
and did' he did "0IT, second,
again. ^ti (m.), gate.
nntr, Hithpa'lei, ninntpn, EDtL\ to judge.
to bow oneself down, wor- IDDttf, a judge.
ship. Apoc. impf. ^nntrv TjQtL\ to pour out.
nntf, Pi. to destroy ; Hiph.
^DtT, lowly.
to corrupt.
HpttJ,Hiph. to cause to drink,
DDvP (stat.), to lie down. give drink to (Ace).
POtT, to forget. rnitf, Pi. to serve,
MtoJ, Hiph. to be early. ntptp, six (see p. 194).

^{T,
— T to be drunk. nntt?, to drink. Apoc. Qal
Di/tp (m.), peace, welfare. ##\
n7t!5, to send ; Pi. send away, iTVfttp, two, with f. nouns.
let go.

"pitf, Hiph. to throw. A

JltlHtt?, three (see p. 194). ^Ifl (m.), midst. Constr.

DttJ. there. "tun.

T

ttf (m.), name (see p. 186). rrifa (f.), law.

r\tir) (prep.), under, instead

TStT, Hiph. to destroy, ex-
terminate. of. With plur. suff. p^Dfi).
ntttr, thither. (Dftfl) Qil, to be complete,
T T '

finished, cease (with in-

njbtp, eight (see p. 195).
trans. verbs).
Q^Ott5 (m. plur.), heaven(s). Hiph. to cease (with
JOtf (m.), oil. trans, verbs).

VOW, to hear; with 7, to iTDJn, to seize.

attend to. ("Wrri, nine (see p. 195).

?34

VOCABULARY.
ENGLISH-HEBREW.

A. Alone, "Q7 ( nt - m
'
a state of
Able, to be, Impf. separation). ' He alonel
%J;

Acquit, to. See Justify. Also, D§.

Add, to, HP? (usually Hiph.). Altar, Pgtp (m.). Plur.

Advice, Pre? (f.).

Advise, to, \V\ And, 1.

Afflict, to, n:v (Pi.). Angel. vS*^ Messenger.

Affliction, ^# (m.) (see p.

Anger, F|N. 5^ Angry.
189). Angry, to be, use Tl^Xl (be
Afraid, to be. See Fear. kindled, burn). '
He was
After (prep.), 'nnN (also angiy', either iENf mil, or
with suff.) ; inM. (Impers.) iS PHPf. (Apo-
Afterwards, in« ;
]3"^nSl. cop.in?iO
A ga i n Tl V.
,
'
/fe again did ;
Announce, to. 3>£ Tell.
say either he added to '
Another, "1HN. 'One to
do,' #/' he returned and
'
another say,
'
;
'
a man to
did.' his brother' (^neighbour').
Against (prep.), ;V_ : 5-. Answer, to, T\1V.
All, ^ (-^3), Constr. noun. Any, see p. 40, note 3.
'
All of us,' ^2. Appear, to. Niph. of see.

Allow, to, ]r0> with Ace. and Appearance, nNlft (m.).

Inf. Appoint, to, "Tj^SL

 }

VOCABULARY 23 5

Approach, to. See Near. Beautiful (adj.), PTDJ.

Arise, to. See Rise. Befall, to, N2D.
Ark (of covenant), p^N (m.).
Before (used as prep.), ^£7.
With art. pNH. Before that (of time),
1
'

Army, b*T\ (m.) ; T\IT\12 (m.). D^ttQ), with Impf.

As, itfgl (conj.). Beget, to, lb* Hiph.
As . . . so . . . (with
Begin, 77PJ Hiph.
to,
nouns and pron.),
Behold. See Lo !

Believe, to, pN (Hiph.), with

As far as, 1J? (prep.).
Ascend, to. See Go up.
?. of pers., 7 of thing.
Beneath. See Under.
Ashamed, to be, ttfil (stative).
Between, pSl. '
Between . . .

Impf. tttoj
Aside, to turn. 5^ Turn.
and . .
.' ... JM . . . pa.
With suff., see p. 65.
Ask, to, htoti. ' Ask of God,'
1
Beware lest, . . .
JS^ ?)^^?.
tin"T, with Ace. or Si.

Ass, ntorj (m.). Bitter (adj.), ^72 (V*nE).

Attendant. 5^ Lad, Hand- Bless, to, "pi (Pi.).

maid. Blessed, TpnL

Avenge, to, Dpi Avenge Blessing, TlFfi. (f.).
oneself, Niph.
Blind, ^S? (3rd deck).
Awake, to (in trans.), yp\ Blood, OT (m.). Your b.
Awaken, to (trans.), y^p
O^^n. Plur. = bloodshed.
Hiph.
Book, ^DD (m.).

Both ... and D£

B.
. . . D$.
Bad. 5^ Evil.
1
Both great and small
Bank, HDto (f.), lit. lip. |toj5 "fen blljp.
Be, become, to, HYT (see p. Bow down to, to, iintT
often followed by 7. Hithpa'lel (see p. 145).
145) ;

Bear, to (carry). 5^ Lift Boy, "fa "Xjg.

up. Bread, DnS (m.), a.
Bear, to (children), T?\ Be Breath. See Spirit.
born, Niph. Bring, to, Hiph. of come.
236 VOCABULARY
Bring back, to; Hiph, of Collect, to (trans.),
^JjJ:
return.
*]DN (Impf. *lb*£).
Bring down, to; Hiph. of go
Come, come in, to, Nil (see
dawn.
P- 159).
Bring out, to ; Hiph. oi go out.
Bring up, to ; Hiph. of go up. Comfort, to, DHJ (Pi.) ; Pas-
sive, Niph.
Bring up, to (child), \r& (Pi.).
Command, to, m!£ (Pi.).
Brother, JlN (see p. 185).
Command (noun), HT£?p
Build, to, rm Compassion, to have.
(f.).

.S>£
Burn, to (trans.), ^W. With Pity.
firel ttJ«|L.
Complete, to, DttD Hiph.
Bury, to, "*Qj?. Completely ( = to a
But, usu. say and-, otherwise
finish), rta-iy.
*0 ; after a negative, DN "»$.
Conceal, to. See Cover, Hide.
See also Nevertheless. Consent, be willing, to, PQN
Buy, to, nj,l raw).
(impf.
By (of instrument). 5- ;
(be-
Corpse, HTQJ (f.).
side) by. nnttj Hiph.
Corrupt, to,

Passive, Niph.
c.
Count, to, 1DD.
Call, to, fcng (usu. with Dat. Covenant (noun), W\Z (f.)-

of pers.).
To make a c, 1 rv\3 (cut).
Camp, TllTlft (m.).
Cover, to, HDD (Pi.).
Captain. See Chief.
Cross over, pass by, to, *QV.
Capture, to (a city), ^5^. Cry, to, WlpT ( = call); pjtt
Care, to take, IftttJ Niph. = cry out).
(
Cast, to. See Throw.
Curse, to, T^Nl ; hbp (Pi el).
Cease, to, ^IPT (Impf. ^IT),
Cut, cut down, to, TYS3.
with Infin.

Chief, Ito (Vnito).

Child (m.), "tVj,^; (f.) n lH D.

Choose, to, 1)13. (with 5-). Darkness, ^TtLTT (m.).

'
City, "Vy (f.). Plur. DTl? Daughter, TO (f.) (see p. 186).
(fixed — ). Day, DV (m.). Plur. D^.
 ;

VOCABULARY 237

Constr. E.
Death, HJD (m.).

nto. Each, IPN (see p. 40).

ff\n Hiph. Ear, ]th (f.) ; dual.

7tf/z^ to dfeflAfc,

7"^ £«>£ ^r, ]tN Hiph.

Deed, HtogE (m.).

Deliberate, to, pP Niph. Early, to rise pj£&) tM^ft

Deliver, to, tt7?3 Hiph. Earth, flN (f-)> *• with art
;

Passive, Niph. 722 Hiph.

Depart, to, 11D ( = turn Eat, to,%?*?. Impf. ^3^.
aside). Edge = bank (of river), HDto
Used also of wrath, etc., (np).
ceasing. With Wavv With the edge of the

Consec.
and Hiph.).
1&J5
(Qal
Egypt, d"n?o.
sword, T\H ^
^ W-. £.
(TIB).

Descend, to. See Go down. Elder. 5^ Old (man).

Desert, "^"!P (m.). 0/akr (comp.), say
Destroy, to,' JlTO (Pi.) ;
"Tttttf greater.

(Hiph.). Encamp, to, H^n (Apoc.

Die, to, rfift. Perf. Qal TO. ion).
Part. r\p = dead. End, to, be ended. 6>£
Disease. See Sickness. Finish.

Dismayed, to be, TSTjH ;

End (noun), PEg, ^,7.

impf. nrn. Enemy, l^N. Thine e. Tp^.N.

Dispossess, to, ti"V Hiph. Enter to, fctfa (5, V>N).

Do, to, pftjy. Escape to, LD7ft Niph.

T

Dog, a^a* Establish, to, Dip Hiph.

Door, entrance, HJIQ (m.). pHiph. Passive p3 Niph.
In the door of the tent, Even. See Also.

hrfor\ nns. Evening, TlJJ (m.).

Draw near, to. See Near. Ever, for, DTHy? (to eternity).

Drink, to, i"irW0. Apoc. Qal Every, 73 ; or use IPM.

*$\ Evil (adj.), SK; from JttH,

Drive out, to, ttha (Pi.). See to be evil ; Impf. yV.
also Dispossess. 7# afo £z/z7, Hiph.
Dwell, to, lttJ\ Exalt, to, Din Hiph.
 VOCAIIULARY

Exceedingly, TtttJ, First, plTN-). At the first,

Exterminate, to. See De-
T * T
stroy.
First-born son, Til.
Eye, yV (f.). Constr. p#. Flee, to, Dtt; ml,
Eyes, dual.
Flesh, nto| (m.).

F.
Foe. 5^ Enemy.

Face, D^S (m. pi.).

Foot, WJ (f.)i #, dual.

For (conj.), ^S.

Fair. See Beautiful or say ;

Forbear, to. ^SVtf Cease.

good- of appearance.
Force. 5^ Might, Army.
Fall, to, 7D1 Impf. in 0.
Forget, to, TOtf.
Far (adj.), pttTT
Forgive, to, NJT2, with Ace.
To be far, ptT\
of offence, Dat. of pers.
Far (adv.), Hiph. Inf.
Forsake, to. See Leave.
Absol.
Friend, n3H.
Far be it from me to . . .,

From, out of (prep.), ]J? (see

p "b Tlb^btl, with Inf.
p. no).
Father, IN (see p. 185).
Fruit, 'n? (m.).
Favour, "jll (m.) = grace.
Fruitful, to be, TV>&.
Vpn. Full, to be, MSn. 0/. . .Ace.
Fear, to, NT. Impf. NT\ To filly Pi. with two Ace.
Inf. HHT. Part. NT.
Fear to do, ]ft and Inf. G.
Few, a, t23ft? (Constr. noun). Garment, 133. (m.), £
Fight, to, urh (Niph.), with Gather, PpN (Impf. ?)DW) ;

5. = against. Y5I2- ^ assemble, gather

Fill, to. See Full. themselves together, Niph.
Find, to, NSU Gaze on, to, 1012 Hiph. with

Finished, to be, H73. To 7N or Ace.

finish, Tlbl Pi. (with Inf.). Generation, TT (m.).

Also Dttn (DJ-I), Qal with Girl. See Maid, Child (f.).

intrans., Hiph. with trans. Give, to, ]iT (see p. 131).

verbs. Glad, to be. See Rejoice.
Fire, tr'N (f.). By fire, BJNSl. Glory, TQ1 (m.).
 . ;

VOCABULARY 239

Go, to, ^H ; conjug. exc. Handmaid, iTON, plur.

e
Perf. Qal as from -p\ rhrroN nn?)ip (S gho-

Go down, to, TV (IT). late).

Happen, to. See Be, Be-

Go in, to. See Enter.
come also Befall.
Go out, to, NJP (N?T). Inf.,
;

Hard (adj.), ntfg.

Hard, to be, 11| (stat.).
Go round, to, 1HD.
To harden, Hiph.
Go up,
1 '
to, tiby.
. T T To make hard (difficult^
God, DTT' 7N, with sing, when PTttip Hiph.
used of one God other- ;

Hasten, to, 1)ip (Pi.) ; with

wise plur.: with prep. WO,
Inf.
but "Ntt. Cons.
Hate, to, Mate. Inf.
Gold, in} (m.).

Good (adj.), rrito.

Head, ttfcfrl (m.) (see p. 186).
Good, to be, lt^ (Qal only \r\$?
Hear, to, yfcti. With
in lmpf.).
To do good to, Hi ph. or bip5. = <?<fej/.

(rPzp^n), with Ace. or Heart, llS (m.) ; iS (a/h^)

Dat. (m.). Both have plur. in
Grace. See Favour. ni—
Grave, the. See Sh e ol.
Heaven(s), O^fttf (m. plur.).
Great (adj.), TTtfL Heavy, to be. £V^ (Be) hard.
Too great for,..^T\ Help, to, W.
P -
L
Hence, »"Tftp.

Great, to be, TlJ (stat.).

Here, HS ; HEl.
' '
V T
Ground, HDiy (f.). To the
Hide, to, "IfiD. Pass, or
ground, PETM.
Reflex. Niph.
Grow up, to. See (Be) great.
High (adj.), CTJ.

H. High, to be, Dt\

Hill. .SV^ Mountain.
Half, TLttl
(
m . noun). Suff.
Hither, Di^H ; H2H.
Hand, (f.).T F<w A MT. Hold, to take ... of, pT\
Hands, dual. Hiph. (with %),
240 VOCABULARY

1 loliness, trip. My holy hill Judgment, BQtjftp (m.).

= the hill of my holiness. Just. See Righteous.
Holy, tri"^ (see also pre- Just (adv.), TJN.
vious word).
Justify, to, pi* Hiph.
Honour. See Glory.
Honour, to, "Q3 (Pi.).
K.
Honourable, 123 Niph. part.

Horse, D^lD. Keep, to, IDtf.

Host, Nil* (m.). Plur. in Kill, to, aiH; HIE Hiph

rri— See also Smite.
Hot, to be (of anger). Kindness. See Mercy.
See
Angry. King, ^/ft. (The same in
pause.)
House, JT2 (m.) (see p. 1 86).
At the house of, TVl. Kingdom, ra^&Q (f.).
e
(S gholate.)
How (interrog.), *?pN.
How long ? See Long.
Know, to, V% Impf. }TT\

(Interject.) — H??.
Inf. Constr. n?H.

I.
L.

If, DN. Apodosis usu. with Lad, Hgi (S e gholate).

Waw consec. Land. 5^ Earth.
If not, vhk. Law, rnin (f.).

Implement, v3 (m.) (see Learn, to, TO7 (stat.).

p. 1 86). Leave, to, forsake, 3]V.

In, £. 7i? /^^ over, irP Hiph.
Iniquity, ]ty (m.). Pass, 1ISN2? (Qal).
Innocent, ^pl Left (hand), VtKDip (m.).
Instead of. See Under. Lest, ]Q with Impf.
Into, % ; b&. Let, to. See Allow.
Lick, to, ppv.
J. Lie down, to, Ipttf (stat.).

Joyful, to be. See Rejoice. Life (the being alive). IPD2

Judge, to, tODltf. (f.). «.

Judge (noun), tOpW (m.> Life (lifetime), D^n (m. plur.).

 ;

VOCABULARY 241

Lift up,
1
to, Nfett. Inf. Constr. Mare, HD^D.
' .
'
T T

•• X
Meet, to, Inf. fitOpb >
with
Light (noun), TIN (m.). suff. infropS.
x' :
•

Light, to make, bbp Hiph. Melt, to, metaph., of heart,

Like, 5 (see p. 1 10).

DDD Niph.
Mention, to, Hiph. of re-
Lion, 'nfcj.
member.
Lip, net? (f.). Dual.
Little (adj.). See Small.
Mercy, kindness, ^DH (m.), a.

Little (noun), a l. of, BJftJ.

To show m. to,
'
H T11DV
XX
Live, to, H Tn (see p. 145). ay.
Liveth, in oaths (see Messenger, ^N7to.
p. 202). Midst, IJJfi (m.), Constr.

Living, ^)1 (V^ll). Tin. l^p. (m.), i.

Lo ! r^rr (see p. 1 1 o). Usu. Might, b*T\ (m.). £V<? also

with verb in partic. Strength.

Long, how ? ^HIS^T?. Minister to, to, mttf Pi. with

Look, PTMh $) (on).

to,
Ace.

Lord, human, pTN. Month, ttTTh (m.).

7^ z^ rrtrf. •oVtn.
Morning, ^3. (m.).

Love, to, in«. Impf. IM^ Mother, DM (VdBN).

Inf. Constr. mnN. Mountain, iri (m.). With
art. "inn. Plur. D'nrr.

M. Mourn, to, *7QD (for, b).

Magnify, bl* Hiph. Mourning, IS Dtt (m.).

to,

Maiden, e
iT^
(S gholate).
Mouth, HQ (see p. 186).

See also Handmaid.

Multiply, to. See (Be) many.
Murmur, to, \\b Niph.
Make, '
to,' n'W.
T X
Man, male, ttPN (see p. 185);

mankind, U1&. N.
X T t

Many, to be, HI*). Make Name (noun), Dtf (see p. 186).

many, multiply, Hiph. Near, to draw, I'ljj (stat.)
Many (adj.), TJ (plur.). Bfaj (stat.).

(Vsm). Near (adj.), iV^g.

16
242 VOCABULARY

fghbour, ?V>\ chiefly in Order, in .. . that, yj'lh with

phrase, each ftis neighbour. Inf. or Impf. T£N *b
Nevertheless. D7*)N. with Impf.
T '

News, to bring good, HCD. Or use weak Waw with

(PL). Jussive.

Night, rhf? (m.).

Other, ^HN ;
plur. D^nN.
To pass the n.
Out of, p.
} py*
With Over, upon,
No, not, tih. Juss. /J?.

Not Overtake, to, $D2 Hiph.

and Cohort. 7N. to,

with Inf. ^rh^p. Ox, T)vT; "V3 (with art. 12P»).

Not, in oaths, QN.

There is not, pN. P.
No one did
Palace, b^tl (m.).
(ttr»«) bb rrtoj; tib.
Palm (of hand), ?!5(f.). Dual
Now, of time or hortatory,
( n/P)D3).
nrij? (pause nnv).
Pass by, over, to, "1?V.

Pass the night, to. See

o. Night.
Offer up, to, Tlby Hiph. Path. See Way.

mp Hiph. Peace, Di^tT (m.).

Oh that ! use |£P 1© (with People, DJ? (m.), with art.

Ace. of noun). Would nyn. (Vd^).

Perish, to, TIN (Impf. ~Q^).

Pity, to, J3T1 Dpi (Pi.).

;

Old, to be, ||?t (stat.).

c
(So Pity (noun, plur.), D^ttPn.
many) years old! See Yea r Place, to, tl^Tl (Hiph. ITI2) ,

Old (adj.),
J5J. D^to.
Only (adj.), p\ Place (noun). DipD (m.).
Open, to, nilQ. Plur. in Hi —
Oppress, to. See Afflict. In the place where,
Or, "iN. {Shall we do) or T£N Dlp^SL.
not? fc7 ON. Is it . . ., Place of, in. 5^ Under,
or is it? . , . DN . . , — PT. Plain (noun), 1%hD,
 ;

VOCABULARY 243

Plant, to, yt33. R.

Possess, to, ttJ"Y\ Raise up, to. See Rise.

Pour out, to, TjDtt?. Read, to, top.
Poverty, ^^ (m.). Refuse, to, JNO (Pi.).
Praise, to, T?H Pi'el.
Regard to, to show, 1012,
Praise (noun), rrpnin.
Hiph. with *?N ; ^Q Nto:
Pray, to, b^D Hithpa. (for,
(lit. lift up the face of).

Reign, to, ^7p (over, 1).

Prepare, to, |11 Hiph. (food,
;
Rejoice, to, TVti®.
etc.) ntoy.
' XT Relate, recount, to, *\DD Pi.
Present (noun), Hl'll.
Itt Hiph.
Priest, |ni).
Remain, to, ltp\
Prince. 6>£ Chief.
Be left, 1«tt5 Niph.
Prithee, please, NJ (enclitic).
Remember, to, "lit.
-X
Promise, to, *V?N (sometimes ' '

with Inf.).
Remove, to (trans.), T)D
Prophesy, N13 Niph.
to,
Hiph. (Impf. with Waw
Consec. "1DJ1).
Prophet, ^13.
Prosper, to, or make prosper-
Rend, to. vSV*? Tear.
Repent, to, Dtl2 Niph. (of,
ous, Y\71 Hiph.

Pursue, IJTJ 0"!DN).

to,
Put, to. See Set. Rescue, to. See Deliver.
Put down, to. See Pface. Rest, to, TO.
Put out, to (hand, etc.), 7# give rest to, Hiph.
iron, with *?.

Restore, to. Hiph. of return.

Return, to, 1^.
Q.
Reveal, to, ]?N (172 (uncover
1
Queen, ItS ??? (S e gholate). ear of . . . ). Pass. 1173
Niph.
Quickly, nnn (Inf. Absol.
Pi.). Right (hand), ]W (f.).

To take quickly, yn Righteous, to be, p*!^.

Hiph. Righteous (adj.), p^§.
244 VOCABULARY

Righteousness, npT2 (f.); Servant, iny (m.), a\ "^2

e
jTO(m.),i. (S gholate).
Rise, to, Dip. Hiph. raw* Serve, to, 12V ; mtf, Pi.

///>, «*rry 0/// (zvord, etc.). Set, to, D^ft? (S«j also
;
JOJ.
River, *trtt (m.). Place.)

Roll, to, bbx Set up, to, Dip Hiph.

Rule over, to, btiO Shed, to. See Pour out.
(J).

Run, to, ^V). Sheep (collective), ]N!£ (m.)

(single), Hto.

Sheol, the grave, ^Ntp.

s.
Shore. 5^ Lip.
Sacrifice, to, Hit. Sick, to be, rnn.
Sacrifice (noun), Hit (m.), £ ^/H
Sickness, (m.).
Sake; for the s. of, "Vajtt. Side, on this . . ., on that
Save, to, Wfr Hiph. ; Passive, . . .; ntp . . . rmp.
Niph.
Silent, to be, DOT. Perf.
Say, to, 1EN. Impf. with
D^T; Impf. Q*P.
Waw Consec. *V?fc^l
Silver, f|M (m.), #.
(pausOQkta). Inf.^b^ Sin, to, Mian.
T T
= saying (Eng. partic).
' '

Sin (noun), NtpH (m.), suff.

Sea, D\ Constr. usu. D^
Vtpil. Plur. D^tpn.
Plur. OTJ1 ninN
Sister, (see p. 186).
Search for, to. See Seek.
Sit, dwell, to, Itfj.
See, to, nN"\ (Apocop., see
Slack, HETT
p. 144.^
Slay, to. *SVtf Kill, Smite.
Seed (lit. or metaph.), V*\\
Sleep, to, ]X0\
(m.), a.
Small, to be, ]bj? (stat.).
Seek, to, ttJpl, Pi. (with Inf.
of verb). Small (adj.), ftoj? (only m.

Also tiTH
— T with direct sing.). ]t?p
T,
f.H^p.
Acc. Smite, to, f]?^ ;
HD2 Hiph.
Sell, to, ^5£. So. SV<? Thus.
Send, to, PHtp. SV/zaf away, So as not to, VI7I7, with
loose, Pi. Inf,
 VOCABULARY 245

Sole (of foot). See Palm. T.

Some of, ip (see p. 1 1 o).
Take, to, Hp*? (see p. 131).
Son, ]1 (see p. 186).
Take away, to (guilt), Nfc?J.
Soul, tttDJ (f.), a. 6>£ Remove.
Speak to, "111 (Pi.). Teach, to, 7cb Pi., with two

Spirit, rrn (f.).

Ace. ; TOP Hiph.
Spoil, despoil, to, "fill.
Tear, to, V*\p.

Tell, to, Tn^Hiph.; "1SD Pi.

Stand, to, TD^.
Tent, T>HN (m.). Plur. usu.
Star, IDiS (m.).
a^HN,
t '
but Dn^nw.
v t t:
Statute, ph (m.), v^ppn.
•

Terrible, Niph.
••

partic. of
Steal, to, IDiL fear.
Still, yet, Tiy. (Suff., see p. That (conj.), ^.
1 10.) Then (of time), tN (usu. with
Stone, JIN (f.), a. Plur. Impf.).
Thence, say from there.

Strength, TO (m.) ; fy (m.), There, DttJ.

There is, tfj With suff.

Stretch, to, PHDJ (also Hiph.).

There is not, pM (Constr.)
Apoc. Qal t3\ .SV* also
(see p. 1 10).
Put out.
Therefore, ]5"7^.
Strong, to be,

Strong (adj.), pJPT.

ptTf.
Thing, ^
Think, use say
(m.).
{in ones heart).
Sun, tfDtf (usu. f.).
With Inf. of verb, or direct
Zip m*. N!P
T T
I
;
'
A? ^/, '
speech.
Thither, STOttJ.
XT
W QN
'

Surely (in oaths) 'J, Throne, ND3 (m.). 3rd decl.

(see p. 201). piur. rrt—
Surround, to. See Go round. Throw, "fVtf Hiph.

Swear to, JftttJ, Niph. (see Thus, |5 (°f what precedes) ;

App. 5). TO (of what follows).

Sword, inn (f.), 0. Also ntitt.

j. j.6" VOCABULARY

Till (prep.), IV. (Conj.) Until. 5^ Till.

Unto, b&.

Time (occurrence), D^Q (f.) Unworthy, to be, jb,^ (of,

e
lit. footfall. S gholate. p)-hbp(bp_).
Together, VfiP. Upon, 7J7.

To-morrow. '
*^n?2.
T T
Upright, "Mfc.
Touch, to, W& (with 3. or

V.
Transgress, to (command),
Valley, pD? (m.) ; hm (m.
( = glen).
TO?.
— T

Transgression, VtTC (m.), 2. Valour. See Might.

Tree, \V (m.), collective Very, "TNft (lit. to excess)

noun. Plur. D^y = zww*/ follows adj.

(felled). Vineyard, D*^5 (
m -)> a -

Trust, to, H^a (with J). Visit, to, "IgQ.

Turn, to ; be turned Voice, Tip (m.).
( = changed), "[EH Niph. Vow, to, ttj.
Turn aside, to, ""HD. Waw Vow (noun), lTti (m.), z.

Consec. with Impf. Qal

or Hiph. npjl.
W.
Turn back, to (intrans.)..
Wake, to. See Awake.

Intrans. H2S.
Walk, to, *]hn, Hithpa.
Turn round, »
to, » XT
Trans. 21D Hiph. War, Tinrhn (f.), S e gholate.
His 7nen of war, say,
Two, Dm\ 77^ fcew, DJTJtjJ.
the men of Ids war.

Wash, to, yrn.

u.
Watch, to, IDtlX
— T
Uncover, to,' (173.
Water(s), t^D
' T T (m. plur.).
Under, instead of, nnJH.
Way, TV7. (usu. m.), #.
Under him, '
V-fiJlD.
— t : Weapon, v5 (see p. 186).
Understand, discern, to, pi. His iveapons of war,
Discerning (adj.), jtaj say, the zveapons of
(Niph. partic). his war.
 . !

VOCABULARY 247

Weary, ^. With, JIN ;

D^ (sec p. 49).

Weep, to, rO^.. Apoc. Qal, Of instrument, 5-.

//*? sw/^ zer/£A his sons,

Well (noun), IN* (f.).

say tf/za? to sons
with him.
Well (adv.), ^V (Inf. abs.
Woman, H£N (see p. 185).
Hiph. of Itt^). 7"A?y /^7-^
Wonderful, to be, N7D, Niph.
w*// done, TsS^vh ^W. Wondrous works, partic.
When, 5- or 5 with inf.

1ttJfc}3

verb.
or *0 with finite
Word,
Work
Wf.

(noun)
plur.

(m.).

= deed, TWVQ
Whence? pfcJQ np^M. ;
(m.); = occupation, PDfcOJ?
From what city ? "^N (f.), S e gholate.
"W TVVQ (whence as Worship, to. See Bow
to city ?) down.
Where? PPN. Would that ! See Oh that
Whether . . . or Also V7, usu. with perf.
. . . DN . . n. Write, to, IhS).
Whither? TON.
X

Why? rW? ;
before gut-

turals, Tlus. Also SAID. Y.

Wicked, yilh.
XT
Wife.
'

£>£ Woman. Year, TOtf (f.) ;

plur. 0* 1
—
Wilderness. See Desert. 7V« years old, say, j0#-

Will (noun) ; say what '

is 0/" {daughter -of} ten
good in the eyes of . .
.' years.
Willing, to be. See Consent. Yet. SV* Still, But.

Also h\fr Hiph. ilta ^/, 0*)T?, with

Wine, [5 (m.).
Impf.

Wisdom, HODl! (without Yoke, Vtf (m.), ^SSv.

Metheg). Young. SV<? Small.

wise, a:n. Young man. vSV^ Lad.

 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.
[N.B. — attached
Asterisks are forms which
to those the
beginner should specially note.]

249
250 (•i; THE STRONG
Qal
TVT * 1< 1
-

.y/a/.
Niph al

Perf. Sing, 3 m. . - 't •• T p.< ^j?J

3 f. * rnipp rtjjg r»3tpp n^pp:
T . |T

2 m. mnsT
T '.
~ $T^i?3
2 f. iy?vpT
• •
ri:bp;
• • T
i?7B?J
I c. "•jjrjSa ^Hl?r
Plur. 3 c. Aipp:
; |t • IT

2 m. Drrpttj? cmi? i 3$?ttp DiAtti??

2 f.
W/ffl? jiTJig IWR J* ** "

I c.
:
— 't : — t
n&pT '
w*5i?3
1

Imp/. Sing. 3 m. bv$] "fr? !

w. • •" »T *

3 £ VtDpn -rajpin '9gn

2 m. bbpn ^?fi •• 't •

2 f. vPP^ *W# v*Miyn

I c. "BR9 TS5M TttgN
Plur. 3 m - AupJE
roVtbpn rmi^n
5n ??7
^^
n^tBpn
3 £ t.: I; •

2 m. TOPlW vtIlJj-i Atopn

2 f.
T • . * rrjii?^ n^iopn
T :.- )t
I c. b»top? ^3? TI5p:

Impera. Sing . 2 m. (nbpi5) Sbp rra?) in?(

. •• It •

2 f. ^7??
v^i? Y*?5n
Plur. 2 m. Atpp ^3? ^pn
2 f. nAtop rtnfb
t — : :
nAtopn
t - T : l •

Juss. 3 J7/Z£".
|
VtDj£ T|?? bup*>

Inf. Absol. f?teg Tins bbp:, hbpn

Inf. Cons. bbp in?, ill b^pn
'•It'

Part. Act. insT •• P>>

Part. Pass. * ^rop:
VERB 251

Pi'el Pu'al Iliph'il Hoph'al Hithpa'el

btep Wp ^Pipn SiDpn

""'IT ^Bi20«7
n^p nWp * nV^jpn rntppn rr^j^nn
* fi^ttpn
rn>^i? <37Bij v$i?0 <jj79i2pn
j$tai? i?7¥ip fl*?Bj?n Ffpuph ^^pnn
v6t|p vi^i? ^9j?n ^r&ihpri v^ttpnn
^tpp ^tpp ^tapn ^tppn TOpgJpn
ori^p DJP^tgj? Qfi^Bpn Drj^Kgn ori^pm
l$*?toi? W7S? jj^pepn jnStDpn
1
— t
••• : ' :
l^^pnn
ttTjp «o^ ^^ei?n wupn ^tsprirT

^8P, ^tDpl ^J?5 ^l? T by&jv

blggi-i ^p.n tropin ^i?b btopfih
f?5gjj btejpjji ^tppri ^toppi htopjin
^t?p/n ^EiPfl ^tppn ^ippri *ht$pj}ft

^86*j vgj?tj ^SJN ^i?N 'SBW

^tpg; ^tp T(
A^j£ ^!?r ^tpp;r
nj^ijtti nj^pn * rofpapjg nj^ipri n^tDpi^n
^tppp rasffiji v^&jpri ^tppn Atggijij
1
na^gjji njVil?^ ft^?Bi?5 nj ??)?^ rn^tap^ri

^i?3 Vtsp3 Ss?2 — ': x ^203

^8B wanting * ^Bpn wanting
^B3T*7
# ^givr
p ^£5 ^9i?D
^p ^tppn ^tppnn
n^tDp ft^fipn n x ^pnrr
^BR* * ^gsjp5 bvp*x btopn*
^i?! :

^tDp, VtDjP f?tej? ^??i?n £*?i?CO (fygxyn)

^P .
(Vfflj) b^pri (7W*7) htgxyrj

bwD b^pft bwno

btepn bttDTl
 2 $2 (/;) THE VERBAL SUFFIXES
Qal
Pre/. •
m - 3*.t 2 s. m. 2 s. f.

Suff. nns ta rbpp T —

"t
J&ttiJ
5. i c. ^nng ^yytsg OJjTttj?
# :ri7tpp
*
i

^6m
2 ra. etc. * ?I70p __
: it':
^f^i?
2 f.
if-
'
t
ij^p
t •• ': **nr>7bi? — .

3 m. #
^i? w_ •vrjpTBjj ^nn— *tt&&p ^nf^igp
3 C - n^p •wfeop rrrj^ep rrA^OT
/V. i c. ^p «t t':
T — T

I ** t
'

';
I

T :
— 1;
Eifi^Bjj
2 m. DMnN DJTgj? , MH
2 f *
I3?9i?
m. orhup n^top
3
Q^p *Dn^Bj?
3 f
-
6w to?&? raw? T^*?^?

/;;///. 3 s. m. 3 pl- m - Impera.

si#. tfa^; bfe^. 111^^ Alpj£ ttfa^ biop nStpp

5. I c ^tt?|^ ^9)7! •^vfe^ ^^7;

2 m. etc. JT?^)?*! ^^P 1

2 f. ^p^ T^ip. —
3 m. # ^n^,^ ^tpjp in^i? etc.

3 **
ft-t *nt ?lQi^ i
v : ': •
m ?^
T
1

:
'
n- n^p as in
Im Perf
PL i c.
WWi?.
fc
iltap
-

't •• :

2 m -
pgtjJaV; D.57^. D^ITQjp.
2 f -
]5^j£ i^S^
3 m -
D^iT. D^tpj£ 0^91?
3 f
-
tfe J^i?1 ft*
The first syll. is half-
open.

,
 ; • :

STRONG VERB 253

Qal Pi'el

I s. c. 3 P1 - c. 2 pi. c. I pi. c. 3 s. m.

^bup T
D^^P tt'pfijj ^ffi
# N^3tpp *"»5Vl^Bp
^*rP
T$hvp. jpfop ^h*p. 3%i?
T^tpp ijAnip — etc. TOPB
v— vrj^pttp ^top etc. as 3 pi. TOfj?
mnStop
— rrrcttj? as 3 pi. n^tsp
t • ; '

tt^Bp
t •. '
^^p
ttthup M*?tep
\yphup m^m^ BfteR
D^jnTQp D^ttR sfe
V^http TO frfl?

Impf. with n. Infin. Cons.

VtDj? ^Pl
"9^pi?! ... . ; 1 T ^^i?.

T*?Bp^
t" v

ttfppi?!
; ' i
rlblOp

w
Tl^Wp

was
^i?
T?W
VT^eiT.
:

ayTtsb
v t :
osbuip
» |j
': t • ' M?^
»

The 1
TO
pers. has
fe?
regularly verbal
suff. of object \ the
others have noun
suff. whether of
object or subject.
254 (O PE NUN VERB

Qal Niph. Iliph. IToph.

/ \ rf. Sing. 3 m-. to:

- r ~ T tog toan ton
3 f.
t : •
ntoltn
T
nton
t :
':

2 m. nto:
t - :
•
t : - •
t : - '•.

lmpf. Sing. 3 m - tor

T •• •
to}
3 f- ton Sen etc. to?n
2 m. ton *:sn to?n
2 f ^3ri ^sn ^tofiji

I c. tfaH Sesi toaN

Plur. 3 m.

3 f- n:triin

2 m. V??n
2 f.

I c. tog ^93

Juss. 3 sing. to?

Impera. Sing 2 m. . *to to-n

"T *

2 f. ^tojn
It
• :
•

wanting
Plur. 2 m. itoi ^93 ^ltosn •
: It

2 f.
t :
- t : : t : -t • ra$to

Inf. Absol. toon

T *
ton
Inf. Cons. toan
T •• *
toan ton

Part. Act.
Part. Pass.
tffifl

tt^D
^ toa
to-}E>

ton
 (O PE NUN VERB 255

Qal

1
Perf. Sing. 3 m. I™ np.
?
3 f.
t : it
nnpS
t ': it

2 m. nn-
T
nn:
T - T
etc.

2 f. fin:
- t
:

1 c.

Plur. 3 c. ^:n:
it :

2 m. E£03
2 f.
!#£?
1 c.
— T

Impf. Sing. 3 m. * # ftp.

i^.
3 f.
kw npn
2 m. np_n
i*w
2 f. ^jpji ^n
1 c. njjrp- jri« np_s*
P/ar. 3 m. ttiji ttijp.
5 f.

2 m. uijfl *inpn
2 f.

1 c.
IW rrja

Impera. Sing. 2 m. (roj?) jn (nnp) ng

2 f. ^i? ^i?
Plur. 2 m. tttf VTp
2 f.

/«/. ^/^/. pre nipS

* wi, #
inf. Cons. (]iij) nri ^175, nng(S)

Part. Act. \Tt np'S

/>*»* Pass. y\n mph
-5<5 (D) PE GUTTURAL
Oal Niph.

Per/. Sing. 3 m. unn

- T
top
~ T - T 1 •• T 195J
3 ( rrroy
t it : t : v iv

2 m. t :
_ t rnoxa
t - : v:iv

2 f.
— t if|Qgj)
: :

I C. wrapt
• : -
^m^y;
/Y#r. 3 c. rras : it
ropy]
2 m. omny Dmv;
2 f. prv&gj)
t£T55?
I c.
:
— t VTOJJJ

Imp/. Sing". 3 m. Dhir * TOJ£ o?n: # ptf£ TOin

Tl" ••

3 f- *tttg£ ptrjji TOOT

T M •• |

2 m. toot ptn^ toot

T •• I"

2 f. * •ntjjflp
#
W8 ^toot
TOW
• : it ••

I c. TftgN pjrjig •• T 1"

P/z/r. 3 m. * Trpjjj * vice : it"

3 t j-utoot
t -:
: i-
putoot
nripfnrit - t : 1-

2 m. rrcpjm itoot
VRJE : It ••

™p]C?# putoot
2 f.
PCTOOT
t : -: i- T - : (r 1"

I c.
TbJS "pjrjj TO)^
Tl" ••

Impera. Sing. 2 m. tojt Pin toot

Tl" ••

2 f. *HW w* ^toot
it"
• :

Plur. 2 m. *T93? ^tpin rrayrr

it • :

2 f. wifiy
t - !
n;pfn h:toot
t - t: i"

V
/«/". AbsoL T "rtDJg
Inf. Cons. to^ toot
" T |"

Part. Act. TOir

Part. Pass, TWJ>T TO^:
t v:iv
 :

VERB PE 'ALEPII 257

Hiph. Hoph. Qal

TEyn onnn
- t•
toot v: iv : - t: it - T

h-toot
x • v: |v
htoot
t t : it

rvroyn
t -: %•: iv
htoot
t -
: t: it

infcyn
: -: v: |v
rvroOT
:
- : t: it

^toot
• : —~:\ |v
wroxn
•- : t: it

VTOOT • v. Iv
^lTOOT
T It :

^toot
- : v: iv
^toot
- : t: it

TW • -: l-
TO^ - t: it
* b?^ (in pause blfr)
-toot toot bixn
wn •
• -: 1-

-: 1-
-

tow -
t: it

t: it
bitin

TO^« • -: 1-
TON - t: it

• -: 1- : t it

pctoot potoot
vpeot- • -: 1
*)toot
t it:

rrtTOOT
t -:
: •• 1-
nrrEyn
t - : t: it

TD#3 • -:i-
TO}n
- t:it

/;;/// «/*7A Waw\ ^^^v^ L^wVm*

"•
< ' wanting

nrrpyn nA5N
t — :

toot
—II—
'•
toot•• t: It

toot
T t: It T
17
25 8 {E) 'A YIN GUTTURAL
Qal Niph'al

Per/. Sing. 3 m. BrroJ

— T Bntfj en:
3 f. ntorro
t -: It
ni:nir:
t - : :
•

2 m. t : - t rjtjrntf?

2 f.
: : — t
Wptn#3
1 c. • ; - t
^rpntr?
/Y^r. 3 c. -: It TOfJ^Jj
2 m. Dritpntp DJntpntp?

2 f. ]nrpn0 ]ntprnpj
1 c. «o»rwJ
— t :
^tpntjto

/;;///. SiV^f. m. * wy$] torn^

3 T •* •

3 f. rornp.pi •* T •

2 m. ontjjfl ronton
2 f. ^ntpn •WJl^
I c. ^ntjjM ..
T ..
#

P/wr. 3 m. nroritt^ morrow

-: it*

3 f. njtprngn n:ion^n
t :- t •

2 m. ntDrrt^in *ittrr#ri
-: It •

2 f.
t :
— : •
n:ton^n
t :— t •

1 c. torn?? •• T *

Impera. Sing. 3 m. tanip •' T *

£ f. ^tj$ wnsn
• -: it •

P/#r. 2 m. ttDrraj —. It •

2 f.
t ; - :
reton^n
t :- t •

/#/*. Adsol. X
toinip?

Inf. Cons. tship •• T *

Part. Act. tDrttf

Part. Pass. Bintf tarrafo

VERBS 259

Pi'el Pu'al Hithp.

om cm •• t : •
omnn
roisi
t -:i"
renSi
.t : 1
srnanrr
t :it : •

*QT& T 5
— t : - t : •

ro^a jsiyiSi ttnann

"W3? ^5*53 ro-tenn
^•1
v : - 1
DnDn-rnrr

DW am-; T3W!
' •• t :

win • _ : it : • : it : •

TSJI} Tim
-:it :
H3Tft :it : •

mrran
t — t
: I
mrnnn mirann
-: it :
to^ii-i :it : •

mmnn
t : —t :
mran mm-infi
t! "t : •

T® 7*3 •• t :
•

&D5
o-a • -:ix

-:it :it : •

mnsi
t —t :
rm^ann
t — t
: : •

TO PD3 Tft org T&tpJ Dmrjn

Tan nmg ' •• t :

Dmra
T£? nn:D
t•. :
260 (F) LAMEDH GUTTURAL
Qal Niph. Pi'61

Per/. Sing. 3 m. rhu nSqJp *nW

3 f. nribw tifjtyif} nnVtr
2 m. JJDTti 9?^W iin|tjJ
2 f. *tfn*3ttf ^n^tp? jpnftr
1 c. Vtt^tf etc. etc.
Plur. 3 c.
*^5
2 m. ojinStp
2 f.
|i?n^0
1 c.
: — t

Imp/. Sing. 3 m. * n*w # nS^ * n ?^

1

3 f. nbipn n^n nW^i

2 m. nStpn nS&n rrptffl
2 f. *ry?$F\ foS^ TfVtffl
1 c. fi?0« n^M nW^
Plur. 3 m. *»nV^ nr^ nnW
3 f- n^tpn rrn^fi PTjr^tfjp
2 m. S?r?t}$fl ^n^n irr?tffl
2 f.
njnSt?^ rm^n rm^tffi
1 c. rrVtp? — X •
nVttJJ

Juss. 3 sing.

Impera. Sing. 2 m. n^tp rhwri nW

2 f.
»n?tf vhwn
/Y#r. 2 m. ^n^tp WrflKj
2 f.
rarran
x : - : X - x
t •

/«/". Ad so/. ni^tp rthtii #rr^tf

Inf. Cons. nStjj — X •

nW
Part. Act. # nSft # n^tip

Part. Pass. m^itf n^tp?

VERBS 261

Pu'al Hiph. Hoph. Ilithp.

rh$ rrbtrn rhwn n^nttfn

nrhui rrm^tfn nrhtin nn^ntrrr
firntti nrbwn rin^trn nrrentin
nrfcy nrfotin nrfttin nn^ntrn
etc. etc. etc.

]rinStpn

rhxp rrbfr rhw rhnfy

rm^tpn

# rh& " •
~

# n^tpn (with suff. ^rrh^ii) rhiypn

* Tf4tt5n wanting
wanting >< ".
^C)2 (G) LAMEDH 'ALKl'II

Qal Niph.

Per/. Sing". 3 m. N20t r

V" T
n^:
3 f.
t : it t : It T • I •

2 m.
T T T T ." T T " '. '

2 f. nasto n«7Q ahspjj

I c. "•riMfo to*7& •»n«i^:
Plur. 3 c. n»?p • It
ifc^g n«?95
2 m. 0nN*7P Dm????
rOw^?
2 f.
jrtNSQj
r6*4*?
I c.
T T '" T ttNSOJ

Impf. Sing. 3 m. t : • *• T *

f.
3 t ; • •• T •

2 m. •• T •

2 f. *MfeP\ •
• : It

I C.
x : v ^^^
Plur. 3 m. ^30? •
: It

3 £ t v T
: • V T '

2 m. naSEJi •
: it

2 f.
t v : • T V T "

I c.
T I * ** T •

Impera. Sing. 2 m. N2D

t : " T *

2 f. ifcjqp?
•
• : It

Plur. 2 m. n«§i? •
: It

2 f. rercifopr
t v ; T V T •

Inf. Absol. T
VtSQ}
Inf. Cons. N2£

Part. Act. mb •• T

Part. Pass, mso N!ttpa

VERBS 263

Pi'el Pu'al Hiph. Iloph. Hithp.

M.3Q M2Q
T '•.
fcraon x : x NSttJfln

t : • t • : •
nN2TOT
x x: :
as

Pi.
T •• * x •• : x

etc. etc. as

Pu. ••

M-Stt^ WW N2B1 MSOffi

as as WfOQ 3S as
Niph. Qal Qal Niph.

x •- : -

W8? N?ft?n msoti

wanting wanting

x :
—

Nktt N^rr
Ngg wsgn Msorr
x x :
N-antfn

N^nn W2ED n^to

N2Ett N2SE
264 (//) LAMEDII HE
c
Qal Niph. Pi'el Pu al
Per/. Sing. 3 m. nb§ rh^l H^2 nb:
3 f. *nnb} rrn?^ nrhz nnb:
2 m. * n^7| * nv?£] * n^7? * ry^
2 f. rY»73 n^SjJ etc. etc.

1 c ijt»% w^J?
/%«r. 3 c. *ta TO}}
2 m .
on^| nrr^

7/////. £/«£-. 3 m. * nfp! rh& rfop nb;n

3 f- nb;in nb:m
2 m. nbirn nban
2 f. •£ijii •»%i
1 c. nbiiN nbna
Plur. 3 m. «J! E*
3 f. * re^jjsi TO^SUI
T
2 m. ^b:tn nb-in
2 f.
ns^yi m^aji
1 c. nbj? V T*

/z/.y.y. 3 j/fig-. m. *^y! T • ^

Imp era. Sing. 2 m. nbn bun nbnn bn nbn
2 f.
*i rban
/Y&r. 2 m. *i *iban
2 f.
t v ; T V T •

/«/". Absol. nba n'ba nba nba

Inf. Cons. ^rtbj nib-in
T *
niba nib?

/W-/. ^. nb— nb-i nb;ra

/w. /w n^bn im nb^ nb^n
 VERBS 265

Hiph. Hoph. Hithp. Suffixes.

rhxn rhxn
J T J
nVann Perf. Sing. I c.
'
'-.-;
r ^?3
nnV^n nn?^n nnTgon 2 m. 373
n^—
r "
* rxnsn
t • :
•
* ryt$Ti
t ••
.t :
«
tp—
t••
n^nnn
t — • : •
2

3 m
f.

-
•nnfa
*
3 £ PT7J
/Y«r. I c.
T T
2 m.
2 f.

3 m.
T T
f-
3
n ^- n~>!)^
1 / m\
1

v : t
n^!ir\^
i / "*•.
i '

^^
Ivipf. Sing, i

2
c.

m.
f.
^
*i
3 m. * ynif!

*
3 f-
07P
/Y#r. i c. U7£
2 m.
2 f.

3 m. dVjp
3 £
* ^?. *?sur
Imp era. Sing, i c.

^50 rfajn hz— n^ipn

3 m.

3 £ nfs
P/z/r. i c. •wii
3 m. D%i
mmr *\

n^n nSjri n^?m

ni^n '. T
rvfcnn

rtap rh^y?
rhxo
266 (/) PE VODII AND PE
Verbs 1 D.

Qal Niph.

Per/. Sing. 3 m.
- T
NT
••T
tfr # 2,^2
f.
3 T !

2 m.
T t
"*

2 f.
etc.
I c.

Plur. 3 c.

2 m.
2 f.

I c.

/;////. Siag: 3 m. # 2tl^ NT* # ^J-j* # 2£T

T * T '• *

3 f.
^Ej •• T •

2 m. 2>®n •• T *

2 f.
•
• : [•« • : it

I c. S*S ntriN
7Y?//\ 3 m.
: i" '.
IT •

3 f.
T ; — ••
rmihn
t - t
:
•

2 m.
: i" : it •

2 f.
t : — ••
t : — t •

/
I c.
*#3 •'• T -

y^^i". 3 ,S7/2£\

Imp/, with Waiv Cons. attjSi &rw

Impera. Sing. 2 m. NT tth atftn
T •• •

2 f. ijtjj •atinrr •
• : It

/Y#r. 2 m. tttjj •
: it

2 f. rmiB ronton
t — t :
•

lnfin. Ads. T - T

Infin. Cons. * raf (7) NT n ^l(?) •• T *

Part. Act. itfi NT

•T
tt?T

Part, Pass. ttftr attfi:

T T T
WAW VERBS 267

Verbs 1
D. Verb 5 assimilating.

Hiph. Hoph. Qal Hiph. Qal Niph. Hiph.

*^ttfin * aston
PZ *P^D rcr
—T raj mn
T *
nitron
t :
HjWn p?:

t :
— ratnn
t -
:
fiP^n
etc. etc. etc.

n^ ItpV P3* P^T. ngi rw

mipin P3V3 ?™ i#!
rr'tpin

v^tpin
etc.
•

mPW
P2VH PT#
^P^
P^W

mprnn
—t':
rapivi
iprn
T

p^3
ntpv P3* *t?C
ntftfi PS^J
ntpin PS^O
rr'ipirr ^D
^tpin Jip^n
rmttfirr rtipipn
t —': ••

ntpin PTk!
n^tpin ntiftn PVO
awtfta P?.^ PTQ jt-se

T
pw
 268 (J) 'AYIN WAW AND
Qal
1

A\ in 11 'aw. <
>? ( /A
'
Ay in Yodh.

Per/. Sing. 3 m. DpT '

#rwa tria
t*
3 f.
x Ix
nn6
T "•
ntrii
X
n:i
X X

2 m. nop
x — : 1 x — x : x :
-

2 f.
W?g PS jptfa etc.

1 c.
*Wj2 vug ijn^a
Plur. 3 c.
^3 ^n6 rcfta
2 m. d#9B DJTO v : x
2 f.
IWB jije TO
1 c.
^*?P- W5 tttfa

/;;///. 5^. 3 m. ' X T

tftt;
•to
3 f. DipnX '
ttJtaJi
r^
2 m. mpn urari
to?
2 f. ^ttrtixj
' X • • X
1 c. D*)pN tftaa
X '
to*
/Y&7-. 3 m. n&^ *ltW22 • X
f.
3 xv' : x : •• xv*!
2 m. ^pn ^iin • X
2 f.
rottJnn
x v ' : x : •• XV • '.

1 c>
ma ' X
ttftng
to
yzw.r. 3 .««£. # 0p*
I?:
Imp/, with Waw Cons. dp*i
'xx-
(pause DpJJ)
ub
Cohort 1 .«#£*.
X / X x • X

Impera. Sing. 2 m. pimiJ D^p rvra ttrta r»

2 f. wip itpii vpl
iY^r. 2 m. ttflp ntfli «">£

2 f.
x : 1 x :

/*/. ^fo. Dip rrtfc ttfta pa

/«/". 6^»J. wpfo n^D ttite
*r?
/Vz/Y. ^rt. * °PT *no ttftat
11
A*;Y. /tow. Dip r» 1*
 YODH VERBS 269
Niph. Hiph. Hoph. Inten sive.
irfrf. Polel. Pass. Po'lal.

* Dip:
X '
*&%n * pgn Dttip Dttip

rraip:
T T 1 T >• "
nopvi
x ':

* r»6*ipj
T ' I
* ni^pn
x — ' • : x :
1—

nmp; nto^prj JTOgnn

infinpj vfifcipn ''jnpgri

mip:X '
n^ppi «jpn
DQb5jg oni^pn Dinog^n
•/
jrifripj jnto^prj jnpgin
uihpj V\wpr\ ttippn
* aip^ * D V '• X
pgr» DmT 1

6
QqV\
Dlpi? '• X
pgvi
Dipfi D^pn
X '•
D,Wl
^ipri '• T IJjJW
DipN D^pN
X '•
DjftN

W^ wjfc ^pV
n:^pn
x : i x : » •• x x : J—

wipri n^pri . wjjvi

rcspn
Til
n^pii
x •x : > x : I
—

Dip? D"TOX ' •

Dgtt
Dp*
Dp*]
wpa x F • x

Dipn rravDpn
X '"T
»•

^ipn
'

mipn wpr?
x : » •
ruttprr
x »•• x :

oipn DWlX '••

a^ipn '• X
Dgvi
* D^pn
Dip: f. nm% T '• I
DpIE
-'70 (A') VERBS DOUBLE
Qal
Stat.

Per/. Sing. 3 m. 33? (i?) Vp. ^

3 f. pqjd (nap) n7j| etc.

2 m. T ""

2 f. rrtsiD

1 c. Tiiio
Plur. 3 c. n^D e&D) *ft
2 m. oni-ip
2 f. ]rn-ip
I c. ntfio

Impf, Sing. 3 m. *nb^ nb*» S?. ^£

3 f. nbn nbn bgri htet\
2 m. nbfi a&n bpn bnr\
2 f. *n6n ^IDfi •hpn ^in
1 c. nbaT n&a S^ %$
P/^r. 3 m. ttljn
T

3 f.
r v % !
n:nbn
t : •

2 m. nntpri
X
2 f.
T V '. 1
mign
1 c. 1D2 nb:

<

lmpf. with Waw Cons. ^.D**}

Impf. with Suff. * ^y3D)

Impera. Sing. 2 m. 2D
2 f. ^D
Plur. 2 m. *):1D

2 f. Pr^iD

Inf. Cons. ^E(v)

P
Part. Pass. v SIID
AYIN 271

Niph. Hiph. Hoph. Intensive

Act. Pod. Pass. Po'al.

#303 #
^?r? • nwi nnio nniD
rmpj rapn T —
nnniD
x : 1

* rrtioj * rnion
— x - x :
-
t • :

ninp; rhnpn etc. etc.

^niip? irrtiprj
# naon
— T

Drt&D} drrtapn
{nisiD? jntaprj
tfiioj wipij
* nD" # np npv
.
1

3K T
np^ nniD^ nniD^
npn non etc.

iDii •• T

^npri • •• X

^?9 1DNX ••

top* •• X

T V — * xv #
:

topn •• X

T V — * xv* :

3DJ id:X ••

no*»
" T
2oh
V X-

# ^io«|

npn 1DHX ••

topn t-idh
X
• ••

topn toonX ••

nriDn x v •
—:

niDn non
X ••

npn non
X ••
np^in

••
it • : ••

mo: no:: 1D^

2y2

PIECES FOR TRANSLATION INTO HEBREW PROSE.

The student is advised to begin by translating straight-

forward passages from the Apocrypha, such as

Tobit iii. 1-6, v. 1-8, vii.I— 8.

Judith vii. 23-28, x. 10-17.
Baruch iii. 1—8.
1 Maccabees ii. 29-38, v. 9-29, v. 37-54,
ix. 23-30.

Later, he should attempt passages of straightforward

modern English prose, such as those given below 1 varying
them with such narratives from the New Testament as
St. Matthew ii. 1-8, xxv. 31-40.
St. Luke ii. 41-50, xv. 1 1-32.
Acts vii.

(1) Then Judah approached Joseph and

said, 'Let not
thine anger, pray thee, burn against thy servant, but let thy
I

servant speak before thee.' And Joseph answered, Speak.' '

Then Judah continued, From the time 2 we set foot in '

Egypt thou hast mocked us. We have been accused as

spies; 3 we have been forced to bring our brother Benjamin
hither with us. Let the king now hearken and give heed
to my words, and allow our brother to return to his father
with us, lest we destroy thee, aye and all thy officers who

1
Several of these pieces are taken from papers set in the Theological Tripos,
etc., at Cambridge.
2
r
?P'
3
'Thou hast said, " Ye
Say, are spies, and now bring down . . . etc.," and
we brought him down unto thee . .
.'
 FOR TRANSLATION INTO HEBREW PROSE 273

are stationed 1
about thee. God will not forget the covenant
which He made with Abraham, to protect his seed, and to
chastise their enemies ; therefore listen, O my lord, to the
words which I am speaking. Let our brother return to his
father, lest 2
I carry my words into effect beware, thou ;

canst not prevail over me.'

(2) Then the ten tribes will mourn on hearing the re-
proaches of the two tribes. And they will say, '
What have
we done unto you, brethren ? Surely this tribulation has
not come on all the house of Israel.' And all the tribes will
mourn, crying unto heaven and saying, God of Abraham, '

Isaac, and Jacob, remember Thy covenant which Thou didst

make with them, and the oath which Thou didst swear unto
3
them by Thyself, that their seed should never fail in the
land which Thou hast given them.' Then they will remember
Me, saying in and each man to
that day, tribe unto tribe
his neighbour, Is not this that which Moses did then
'

declare unto us in prophecies, 4 and assuredly called heaven

and earth to witness against us, that we should not trans-
gress His commandments ? Behold these things have
befallen us after his death according to his words.'
(3) Surely in the history of Joseph and his brethren,
God has revealed His goodness to those who seek Him. For
the brethren said one to another, '
Joseph and his brother
are dearer to our father than we, who are the greater
number. Wherefore let us slay Joseph or drive him out
into the wilderness, and the face of our father shall be again
towards us, and we shall be precious in his eyes.' But one
of them said, Let us not slay Joseph, but let us throw him
'

into a well, that some travellers may take him up from

thence.' Then came they to their father and said, O our '

father, if now we have found favour in thine eyes, send

Joseph away with us and we will care for him.' But their
father said, I will
'
not send him with you, for I fear lest

1 2
*?V "WMji Carry into effect Dip (Hiph.).
8
Use DX, and direct speech ; or say, 1D$n "Tl^A
4
Say, ' and did prophesy . .
.'

18
274 PIECES FOR TRANSLATION

some wolf devour him, while ye are busy here or there.'

But they answered and said, *
wolf devour him while
If the
there are so many of us, verily our hands will be slack.' So
he sent him away with them and when they were come ;

into the field, they did with him according to the counsel
which they had purposed one with another.
(4) Once on a time a Scot went on a journey and it ;

befell that, as he was on the road, lo three men came to meet !

him. And one of them said to him, Sir, give us money '

for thou hast too much * and we have none. And beware
of refusing, lest we do thee some injury.' 2
But the Scot
answered and said, I will not give to thee for thou speak-
'
;

est not peaceably. My money is my own, to give or to

3
withhold.' So they fell upon him and though he fought ;

valiantly, they overpowered him, for there were three of

them. So they took his money from him, and lo he had !

only the fourth part of a shekel. In amazement 4 they

asked him, Why didst thou fight, when thou hadst but the
'

fourth part of a shekel ? But he answered, Ye know not

' *

my countrymen for with those who speak peaceably they

;

do kindness but to those who speak roughly, they give

;

blows. And besides, is not money a precious gift of God ?

(5) So he reigned in his father's stead ; but he knew that
God was not with him, and his heart was sad within him.
And it came to pass, that as he was going in the way, he
lifted his eyes and saw a poor old man with torn
5
clothes
coming to meet him. And his heart was moved with pity,
and he spake to him kindly and said, Turn aside now, and '

come into the house, for thou art weary, and wash thy feet,
and comfort thy heart with a morsel of bread.' So he
turned aside and came into the king's palace and sat down,
and did eat and drink. And the king went on to say to
him, Be content now and stay the night, and to-morrow
'

thou shalt go on (to) thy way.' And the man said to him,
1
Say, ' that which thou hast is too much for thee . .
.'

2 3
Use Hiph'il of yjn. yj».
4
Say, '
and they were amazed . .
.'

5 '
Torn-of (jnp) clothes.'
 INTO HEBREW PROSE 275

'
Lo, have a word of God unto thee. O king.' And the
I

king said, Speak on.' And he said, Thus saith the Lord,
' '

Thou hast indeed showed kindness unto the poor therefore ;

shall it not be well with thee ? Now do this to-morrow :

thou shalt put on my garments, and shalt go forth into the

field and work there instead of me and I will abide here ;

in the palace in thy place.' So the king arose early in the

morning and went forth to the field, even as he was bidden ;

and there he abode and worked.

And at the end of two full years 1 it came to pass that
the angel came again to him in the field and said, Because '

thou hast not refused to go forth into the field at my

command, but hast worked these 2 two years, therefore shall
God bless thee in thy sitting down and thy rising up, in thy
coming in and thy going forth. Get thee 3 back to thy
house, and thou shalt be king as aforetime but forget not ;

that thou hast been poor, and do mercy with the poor
always, that thy days may be long in the land.' So he
arose and returned home with a glad heart, and ruled over
his people and they called him the good king, for they
;

said, There hath not been among his fathers one like unto
*

him, to show mercy unto the poor, and to lift up the face of
the righteous.'
(6) While the two forces were encamped at close
quarters, 4
the Roman general any of the strictly prohibited
men under his command from
fighting with the enemy. His
command was obeyed. 5
The enemy, observing this attitude
of the Romans, attributed 6 their inactivity to cowardice, and
their picked men proceeded to taunt the Roman host daily.
Between the two camps there was a small plain, intersected 7

1
'Two-years (dual), days . .
.'

2 3
HT (m. sing.). 'Thee,' ethic dative.
4
Say, '
one on this side and one on that ' : or, '
and the camps had drawn near
this to that.'
6
Say, 'And they did as he commanded.'
6
Say, ' And the enemy saw that the Romans remained in their places
(DiTrinri), and they said one to another, " Are they not afraid, for they do not
come out against us ? " '

7
Say, '
and the brook (/fO) was in the midst.
 276 PIECES FOR TRANSLATION

by a river. One champion, the tallest of the foe, used to

sally forth from the barricade to the bank of the river and, ;

taking his stand, would hurl stones and shout insults. This
state of things proved intolerable 1
to young Manlius, the
only son of the general, who rushed through the ford of the
stream with a javelin and slew the truculent 2 warrior.
Hurling the corpse into the stream he returned. His father,
3
disapproving his act, ordered his instant execution, observ-
ing that obedience was better than vengeance.
(7) The Porter answered, This man is in a journey from '

the city of Destruction to Mount Zion but being benighted ;

and weary, he asked me if he might lodge here to-night.

4

So I told him I would call for thee, who, after discourse

had with him, mayst do as seemeth thee good, even accord-
ing to the law of the house.' Then she asked him whence
he was and whither he was going and he told her. She ;

asked him also how he got into the way and he told her. ;

Then she asked him what he had seen and met with in the
way and he told her. And at last she asked his name,
;

and he said, It is Christian and I have so much the more

'
;

a desire to lodge here to-night,5 because by what I perceive

this place was built by the Lord of the hill, 6 for the relief
and security of pilgrims.'
(8) And the king said,7 '
Thou hast played well with
thy harp, and my anger is appeased. 8
Now tell me wherefore
thou art come, and what is thy request.' And he answered,
1
O give me back my dear wife, and let her come forth
from this gloomy darkness.' So the king said, She may '

certainly return with you to the light of the sun. But

1
Say '
This thing was very evil in the eyes of . .
.'

2
A Hebrew would probably not insert any adjective here, as the context
shows that he was * truculent.' Therefore omit the word.
3
Use direct speech.
4
Say, '
and it came to pass, the sun had gone down and he was weary .' . .

5 therefore let me, I prithee, pass the

Say, '
and because I perceive that . . .

.'
night here . .

6 stronghold (t'VD) and for a retreat (npnp).'

Say, '
for wayfarers for a
7
Say, '
Thou hast done well (3D S Hiph.)
, to play (p, Pi.).'
8
Say, '
I have left off (2VCV TIT]) from my anger.
5
 ;

INTO HEBREW PROSE 277

beware lest thou look behind thee, 1 until thou hast led her
up to the earth.' Having then departed from the king's
palace, he went a long way, with his wife following him, 2
until he came near to the land of the living. But he forgot
the king's command, and looked at his wife. And lo she !

was at once gathered to the 3 shades, and he saw her no

more.
(9) I had scarce 4
left the city when I came upon 5
a
poor woman carrying a child upon her back. I stopped and

asked her whither she was going and what she was seeking
and she replied with tears O sir, if thou wilt only help :

me, may God be gracious unto thee, for indeed I am in

sore distress.6 My husband died at the beginning of 7 the
year,and I was left without money or substance and now ;

I am wandering about with this child, seeking 8 if per-

chance I may find a little bread for him with the labour of
my hands.' When I heard her tale, my heart was deeply
moved and I said, Fear not come with me for I perceive
'
; :

that God hath sent me to succour thee.'

(10) And
end did the Danes, when they saw their
in the
line pierced through, lose heart, begin to quake, and at last
were stricken with mighty fear. For the panic was from
God, and struck them to the heart, so that they might bear
up no longer. To flight they took, dropping their swords,
owning themselves worsted, holding out their right hands, 9
and beseeching quarter. And our kings, stretching forth
10
their swords, hardly so kept their warrior folk back.
Every way did that craven rabble flee, 11 and all day long did
our Englishmen hunt them down.
(11) Willibald's party had now increased to eight in
1
Say, 'turn behind thee to see her.'
2 Circumstantial clause, and
'
his wife after him.'
3 4
D^STl. Cp. Gen. xxvii. 30.
5
coming meet me.' 6
Say, 'behold ! to Cp. Judg. xi. 7.
7 8
n:i^r6. Omit 'seeking . .
.'

9
Say, and held out their right hands, saying, " Ye have prevailed over us
'
;
5
and now spare-us-alive, we pray you."
10
Say, 'and they laboured (flN?) to restrain them.'
11
Say, '
and they fled hither and thither, for they were discomfited '
(^H3).
 278 PIECES FOR TRANSLATION

number, 1 and they became an object of suspicion to the

Saracens,1 who, seeing that they were strangers, seized them
and threw them into prison, because they knew not of
what country they were, and supposed them to be spies.
They them as prisoners before a certain rich old
carried
man, that he might examine them and he inquired ;

whence they came and the object of their mission where- :

upon they related to him the true cause of their journey.

The old man replied, I have often seen men, of the parts
*

of the earth whence these came, travelling hither they :

seek no harm, but desire to fulfil their law.' And upon

that they went to the palace, to obtain leave to proceed
to Jerusalem.
(12) was Omar's custom to take a daily walk out of
It
the city. Wathek, as his Arab enemy was called, watched
his opportunity, 3 hidden in a tree. The Caliph was tired,
and lay down to rest at the foot of the tree where Wathek lay
concealed. He watched the Caliph, and was on the point
of coming down 4 from the tree, when, 5 to his surprise and
alarm, he saw a huge lion come out of a neighbouring
thicket. Wathek felt that the lion would eat the Caliph
up, and spare him the task of killing him but the beast, ;

far from molesting the sleeping Omar, walked gently round

him, and, licking his hands, awoke him and went away.
The Arab exclaimed, It is the work of God.' He told '

Omar all that he had intended to do, and 7 immediately

became a Moslem.
(13) So King Alfred fled in disguise, 8 while his foes
1
Say, 'and there were yet {1)]}) gathered men unto them, and they were
eight who went after Willibald.'
2
Say, ' and the S., seeing that . . . prison ; for they said, " To do evil are ye
"
come ; for we know not of what country (iTJD ^H) ye are ; are ye not spies ?

3
Say, 'watched him to kill him . . .'

4
Say, 'and he said in his heart, Let get down from on .
.'
me now .

5
Transpose to next clause and he wondered, and his heart was troubled
:
'
;

and he said to himself, Why should I kill him, seeing that the lion will surely eat
him up?'
6
Say, 'saw Omar that he was sleeping, and did to him good instead of evik'
7
Say, 'and said, " From now thy God shall be my God. " ;

B
b'Qn (Hithpa'el).
 ;

INTO HEBREW PROSE 279

made diligent search for him. And one evening, after a long
day on the he came about sunset to a remote house.
hills,

It looked so peaceful, that he at once went down and asked

the farmer to give him employment and the man, seeing ;

his well-knit frame, consented to hire him in return for his

keep.
So Alfred stayed some time, happy enough in his work. 1
One day the farmer's wife was making some cakes, while he
was in the house. She asked him to see that they did not
get burnt, while she went out to the well to draw some water.
He promised to watch them carefully but presently he ;

forgot all about them. When the woman returned, her

cakes were burnt ; she flew into a rage and called the king
'
idle and other evil names but 2 he felt that he
Varlet ' ;

deserved them all, and took it quite in good part.

(14) Becket was a very handsome man and between ;

the king and him there grew up the closest affection 3 they
were of one heart and mind. So Henry was anxious to
secure the Archbishopric for him, expecting to find in him
a ready tool to work his will. But after the consecration,
Thomas, willing to serve God rather than man, resisted his
royal master not once nor twice only. 4 Thus the king's
friendship turned to bitter hatred. One day, in a burst of
passion, he cried out, '
Would that 5
I had some faithful
servants, who would not suffer their lord to be mocked by
These words fell on the ears of four unscrupu-
this fellow.' 6

lous men who stood by; and they forthwith took counsel to
kill the Archbishop.
They met at dead of night whence
at a certain place 7
;

early next morning they proceeded to Canterbury. Just

about sunset they approached the palace with a band of
soldiers. The Archbishop had retired to his private
chamber; his friends hurried to him in terror, and made

1
Say, 'and the work was good in his eyes.'
2
Say, 'and he did not get angry,' for he said, 'Lo, I am guilty' (or 'have
sinned') 'about the matter.'
3 4
Cp. 1 Sam. xviii. 1. See 2 Kings vi. 10.
5
Use jrV '•D- 6
Men of Belial. 7
Use *jfo!>K *)%.
 j8o pieces for TRANSLATION

him leave the house and take refuge in the Cathedral.

Just as he was entering it, the assailants ran after him
shouting as they came, 'King's men, King's men.' He
passed in to the sacred edifice with them in pursuit ;

entering it, they could not see him in the dusk, but they
cried, '
Where is Thomas Becket, the traitor ?
'
1
He turned
round and answered, Here am I, no traitor, but priest of '

God. What do you want ? They tried to drag him from '

the church, but he repulsed their efforts so these iniquitous ;

men drew their swords in the house of God and killed him
where he stood.
(15) King Edwin, therefore, delaying
2
to receive the
word of God at the preaching of Paulinus, and using for some
time to sit alone and seriously to ponder with himself what he
was man of God came to him, laid his right hand
to do, the
on and asked whether he knew that sign. The
his knee,
king, in a trembling condition, was ready to fall down at his
feet but he raised him up and 3 in a familiar manner said
;

to him, Behold, by the help of God thou hast escaped the

'

hand of the enemies whom thou didst fear. Take heed not
to delay that which thou didst promise to perform.'
(16) And when he felt that he should die, he said to his
twelve sons, that each of them should bring him one of his
arrows ; and so they did anon. And then he commanded
that they should bind them together in three places, 4 and
then he gave them to his eldest son and bade him break
them and he exerted himself with all his might 5 to break
;

them, but he might not. And then the Chan bade his
second son break them, and so to the others, one after
another but none of them might break them.
; And then
6
he bade the youngest son separate them from each other,7
and break every one by itself; and so he did. And then
said the Chan to his eldest son and to all the others,
1
Wherefore might you not break them ? And they '

1 2
Say, '
for he hath conspired against the king.' "UIK-
3
Use the phrase ^ hv "l?^- 4
Say, '
with three cords '
(?3n).
6 6
Say, '
sought with all his might . .
.'
T)D (Hiph.).
7
to nr-
 ;

INTO HEBREW PROSE 281

answered that they might because they were bound not,

together. Then said the Chan, My sons, truly thus will '

it fare with you for as long as you are bound together in

;

three places, that is to say in love, truth, and good accord,

no man shall have power to grieve 'you; but if you be
divided from these three places, that one of you help not
the other, you shall be destroyed and brought to nothing.'
(17) So Swegen the tyrant sent to the priests of St.
Edmund's Bury, saying, Give me a great sum of money '
:

and if ye give it me
come and burn your town
not, I will
and all and I will pluck down your
the folk that are in it ;

minster to the ground and you that be priests and clerks *

;

I will put to death with all manner of tortures.'

2
And
Swegen the tyrant gathered together his wise men and his
captains and all his host, and spake unto them in the like
manner. And he sat on a goodly horse at the head of his
host. And while he was yet speaking, he saw one coming
towards him like an armed man with a spear in his hand
but no man saw the armed man, save only Swegen the
Tyrant. And Swegen cried, Help, help, my soldiers for '
;

lo !the holy king Edmund cometh against me to slay me.'

So Saint Edmund smote Swegen the Tyrant with his spear,
so that he fell from his horse, and died that night in great
3
pain and anguish.

1
nnab.
2
Say, ' I will do you evil ' (or ' chastise you with scorpions') ' and put you to
death.'
3
Say, '
he was very ill and died.'

Printed by Morrison & Gibb Limited, Edinburgh

 FROM
KEGAN PAUL & CO.'S LIST.
THE BOOK OF PSALMS.
A New Translation by Canon T. K. Cheyne, D.Litt., D.D.
Pott 8vo, cloth, is. 6d. net ; leather, 2s. net ; velvet calf,
3s. net.

HEBREW SATIRE.
A Collection of Anecdotes, etc., illustrating much of the
delightful satire tobe found in Hebrew Literature. By
J. Chotzner, Ph.D., late Hebrew Master at Harrow. Crown
8vo, 5s. net.

THE PRINCE-JUDAH.
An Effort to rehabilitate the Character of the Son of Jacob.
By Frederick Barr. Crown 8vo, 5s. net.

MANUAL OF SCRIPTURE HISTORY: For Jewish

Schools and Families.
An Introduction to the Bible. By L. B. Abrahams. With
Map. Sixteenth Edition. Crown 8vo, is. 6d.

STORY OF THE JEWISH PEOPLE, WITH

STORIES OF THE RABBIS.
Being a History of the Jews since Bible Times. By J. M.
Myers. With Maps and Illustrations ; also a Preparatory
Note by the Very Rev. the Chief Rabbi. Crown 8vo, 2 vols.,
each is. 6d. net. Prize Edition, 2S. net.

STORIES OF THE RABBIS.

By the same Author. Illustrated. Crown 8vo, is. net.

JEWISH STORY BOOK.

Simple Tales for Young Children. By the same Author.
Crown 8yo, 7d. net.

BIBLE STUDENTS' HANDBOOK OF ASSYRI-

OLOGY.
A Manual for the Elementary Study of Oriental
Popular
Archaeology, and for Students of Old Testament History.
By F. C. NORTON. Second and Revised Edition. With an
Introduction by Prof. A. H. Sayce, LL.D., D.D. With 9
Plates and a Map. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. net.

GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGES OF THE

CUNEIFORM INSCRIPTIONS (Sumero- Akka-
dian, Assyro-Babylonian, Vannic, Medic, and Old
Persian).
By George Bertin, M.R.A.S. Crown 8vo, 5s.

KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. LTD.

BOOKS ON EGYPT AND CHALDEA.
The Archaeology, History, Religion, etc., of the
Egyptians, Assyrians, and Babylonians.

Edited by E. A. WALLIS BUDGE, M.A., L. W. KING, & M.A.,

l\(>artiiicnt of Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum.

Uniformly in crown 8vo. Illustrated.

Vol.
I. EGYPTIAN RELIGION. 3s. 6d. net
II. EGYPTIAN MAGIC. 3s. 6d. net.
III. EGYPTIAN LANGUAGE. 3s.6d.net.
IV. BABYLONIAN RELIGION. 3 6d. net. s.

V. ASSYRIAN LANGUAGE. 3s. 6d. net.

VI. BOOK OP THE DEAD, vol. net. i. 5s.

VII. ,, vol. ii. 5s. net.

VIII. ,, vol. iii. 5s. net.

IX. HISTORY OP EGYPT, vol. i. 3s. 6d. net.

X. ,, vol. ii. 3s. 6d. net.

XI. ,, vol. iii. 3s. 6d. net.

XII. „ vol. iv. 3s. 6d. net.

XIII. „ vol. v. 3s. 6d. net.

XIV. „ vol. vi. 3s. 6d. net.

XV. ,, vol. vii. 3s. 6d. net.

XVI. ,,
vol. viii. 3s. 6d. net.
XVII. THE ROSETTA STONE, vol. i. 3s. 6d. net.

XVIII. ,, vol. ii. 3s.6d.net.

XIX. THE STELE OP CANOPUS. 3s. 6d. net.
XX. THE EGYPTIAN HEAVEN AND HELL, vol. i.

6s. net.

XXI. ,,
vol. ii. 6s. net.

XXII. ,, vol. iii. 6s. net.

XXIII. BOOK OP THE KINGS OP EGYPT. 6s.net.

XXIV. „ 6s. net.

XXV. THE LITURGY OF FUNERARY OFFERINGS.

6s. net.
XXVI. (THE BOOK OF OPENING THE MOUTH.
XXVII. I 6s. each net.
XXVIII. THE BOOK OP THE DEAD. Egyptian Text. 5s. net.

XXIX. „ „ 5s.net.
XXX. „ „ 5s.net.
XXXI. VOCABULARY TO THE BOOK OF THE
DEAD. 10s. net.
XXXII. EGYPTIAN LITERATURE. Vol. i., LEGENDS
OF THE GODS. 6s. net.
XXXIII. EGYPTIAN LITERATURE. Vol. ii., ANNALS
OF NUBIAN KINGS. 6s. net.
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. LTD.
TJ
ood, C, PJ
U567
A Hebrew grammar # yg

PONTIFICAL INSTITUTE
OF MEDIAEVAL STUDIES
5v queen's park
[Toronto 5, Canada